Artwork and Signature File for:
MAN-00625, “MNL, SEL MAINT. (AEC), 2ND EDITION”
Artwork consists of:
•
REV AUTHORED BY
J. SHARP
REV DRAFTED BY
Three hundred and twenty-four (324) 8 ½ inch x 11 inch pages.
DATE
11/29/06
DATE
DANBURY, CT 06810
B. MOSES
11/29/06
TITLE
DOCUMENT NUMBER
REV
PROPRIETARY INFORMATION:
The content of this document is the AW, MNL, SEL MAINT. (AEC),
exclusive property of Lorad and may
AW-01550
002
not, without prior written permission
2ND EDITION
of Lorad, be reproduced, copied or
used for any purpose whatsoever.
ARTWORK
SIZE A
SHEET 1 OF 1
ENG-0034-T33, Rev. 001
Selenia Maintenance Manual
Part Number MAN-00625
Revision 002
November 2006
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
List of Figures
-xiii
List of Tables
-xvii
Preface
P-xxi
1.0 Intended Use .................................................................................................................................... P-xxi
2.0 Quality Control ................................................................................................................................ P-xxi
3.0 Training ............................................................................................................................................ P-xxi
4.0 Product Complaints .......................................................................................................................... P-xxi
5.0 Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................................... P-xxi
6.0 Terms and Definitions ..................................................................................................................... P-xxii
7.0 Document Conventions .................................................................................................................. P-xxvi
8.0 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes ...................................................................................................... P-xxvi
9.0 Selenia Manual Set ......................................................................................................................... P-xxvi
10.0 Using the Maintenance Manual ................................................................................................... P-xxvii
Chapter 1—General Information
1-1
1.0 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................1-1
2.0 System Description ..............................................................................................................................1-1
3.0 Film Printer (option) .............................................................................................................................1-2
4.0 Safety ..................................................................................................................................................1-2
4.1 Isolation Integrity ..........................................................................................................................1-2
4.2 Radiation Safety ............................................................................................................................1-3
4.3 Electrical Safety .............................................................................................................................1-3
4.4 Mechanical Safety .........................................................................................................................1-4
4.5 Emergency Off Switches ................................................................................................................1-5
4.6 Interlocks ......................................................................................................................................1-6
5.0 Compliance .........................................................................................................................................1-7
5.1 Compliance Requirements ............................................................................................................1-7
5.2 Compliance Statements .................................................................................................................1-7
5.3 Label Locations .............................................................................................................................1-8
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
2-1
1.0 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.0 Startup Procedures ...............................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Pre-Startup Tests ............................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Start up the System ........................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Resetting the UPS ..........................................................................................................................2-3
2.4 Log in to the Operating System .....................................................................................................2-4
2.5 Startup Wait Time .........................................................................................................................2-4
2.6 Log in to the Application ...............................................................................................................2-5
2.7 Information Dialog Box .................................................................................................................2-6
2.8 Post-Startup Tests ..........................................................................................................................2-6
3.0 Shutdown Procedures ..........................................................................................................................2-7
3.1 User Reboot and User Shutdown ..................................................................................................2-7
4.0 Emergency Off Switches ......................................................................................................................2-8
4.1 Using the Switch ...........................................................................................................................2-8
4.2 Restarting the System After Activating the Emergency Off Switch: .................................................2-9
MAN-00625
iii
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
3-1
1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 3-1
2.0 Acquisition Workstation Controls and Display .................................................................................... 3-1
3.0 TechMate Controls and Display .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1 AWS Keypads ............................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Keyboard and Trackball ................................................................................................................ 3-3
4.0 Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests ............................................................................................. 3-4
4.1 Keyboard and Screen Controls ...................................................................................................... 3-4
4.2 Emergency Off Switches ............................................................................................................... 3-5
4.3 The Flat Screen Display ................................................................................................................ 3-5
4.4 Gantry Controls and Displays ....................................................................................................... 3-6
4.5 C-arm Controls and Displays ........................................................................................................ 3-7
4.6 Dual Function Footswitches ......................................................................................................... 3-8
4.7 Selenia Controls and Functional Tests ........................................................................................... 3-9
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
4-1
1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 4-1
1.1 Component Identification ............................................................................................................. 4-2
2.0 Accessing Internal Components—Selenia AWS ................................................................................... 4-3
2.1 Rear Cover Removal ..................................................................................................................... 4-3
2.2 Internal Components .................................................................................................................... 4-4
3.0 Accessing Internal Components—TechMate ....................................................................................... 4-5
3.1 Front Cover Removal .................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.0 Preventive Maintenance Procedures ................................................................................................... 4-6
4.1 AWS — Clean and Inspect ........................................................................................................... 4-6
5.0 Display Maintenance .......................................................................................................................... 4-8
5.1 Selenia Display Replacement ....................................................................................................... 4-8
5.2 TechMate Display Replacement ................................................................................................... 4-9
6.0 Trackball Replacement ..................................................................................................................... 4-10
6.1 Selenia ....................................................................................................................................... 4-10
6.2 TechMate ................................................................................................................................... 4-10
7.0 Keyboard Replacement ..................................................................................................................... 4-11
7.1 Selenia ....................................................................................................................................... 4-11
7.2 TechMate ................................................................................................................................... 4-11
8.0 Compact Disk Drive and Storage Shelf Replacement ......................................................................... 4-12
8.1 Storage Shelf Replacement ......................................................................................................... 4-12
8.2 Compact Disk Drive Replacement .............................................................................................. 4-13
9.0 Bar Code Reader Replacement .......................................................................................................... 4-13
9.1 Bar Code Reader ........................................................................................................................ 4-13
9.2 Bar Code Reader Power Supply .................................................................................................. 4-13
10.0 AWS Computer Replacement .......................................................................................................... 4-14
10.1 Back up Configuration .............................................................................................................. 4-14
10.2 Back up the Calibration and Map Files ..................................................................................... 4-14
10.3 Create getinfo.html ................................................................................................................... 4-14
10.4 Capture the calibration data on the Host Microprocessor board ............................................... 4-14
10.5 Burn a CD with the backup files ............................................................................................... 4-16
10.6 Ultra 45™ Computer Replacement ........................................................................................... 4-17
10.7 Reinstall Backup Files ............................................................................................................... 4-17
10.8 Verify System Operation ........................................................................................................... 4-17
iv
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
11.0 TechMate Computer Replacement ...................................................................................................4-18
12.0 Radiation Shield Replacement .........................................................................................................4-19
13.0 Power Distribution Assembly Replacement .....................................................................................4-20
13.1 Power Distribution Fuses ...........................................................................................................4-20
14.0 Power Distribution Board Replacement ...........................................................................................4-21
15.0 Power Control Board Replacement ..................................................................................................4-21
16.0 Low Voltage Power Supply Replacement .........................................................................................4-21
17.0 Right X-ray LED Board Replacement ................................................................................................4-22
18.0 Left X-ray LED Board Replacement ..................................................................................................4-22
19.0 AWS Display Power Supply Replacement .......................................................................................4-22
20.0 Cooling Fans Replacement ..............................................................................................................4-23
20.1 Selenia ......................................................................................................................................4-23
20.2 TechMate ..................................................................................................................................4-23
21.0 Circuit Breaker Replacement ...........................................................................................................4-23
22.0 AWS Emergency Off Switch Replacement .......................................................................................4-24
23.0 Uninterruptible Power Supply Maintenance (UPS) ...........................................................................4-25
23.1 Selenia UPS Replacement .........................................................................................................4-25
23.2 UPS Battery Replacement ..........................................................................................................4-26
23.3 TechMate UPS Replacement .....................................................................................................4-27
23.4 TechMate UPS Battery Replacement .........................................................................................4-28
24.0 Fiber Optic Cable Replacement .......................................................................................................4-29
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
5-1
1.0 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................5-1
2.0 Gantry Component Identification ........................................................................................................5-2
3.0 Removing Covers and Panels ...............................................................................................................5-5
3.1 Gantry Cover Removal ..................................................................................................................5-5
3.2 C-arm Covers—Removal ...............................................................................................................5-6
4.0 Preventive Maintenance Procedures ....................................................................................................5-8
4.1 Preventive Maintenance Tools and Procedures .............................................................................5-8
4.2 Gantry—Clean and Inspect ...........................................................................................................5-9
4.3 Review the Exposure, Error, and Alarm Logs .................................................................................5-9
4.4 Accessing the Exposure and Error Logs ..........................................................................................5-9
4.5 C-arm Rotation Gear Assembly Inspection and Lubrication .........................................................5-11
4.6 VTA Lead Screw Inspection and Lubrication ...............................................................................5-12
5.0 Remote X-ray On/Power On Light—Connection ................................................................................5-12
6.0 Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components ........................................................................................5-13
6.1 Fiber Optic Cabling .....................................................................................................................5-13
6.2 Image Receptor ...........................................................................................................................5-15
6.3 Preparing the Image Receptor for Return Shipping ......................................................................5-15
6.4 Image Receptor Fans ...................................................................................................................5-16
6.5 Image Receptor Dust Filter Maintenance .....................................................................................5-16
6.6 HV Generator Assembly ..............................................................................................................5-17
6.7 Beam Limiting Assembly .............................................................................................................5-19
6.8 X-ray Tube ..................................................................................................................................5-20
6.9 Brick Assembly ...........................................................................................................................5-21
MAN-00625
v
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
7.0 Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components .......................................................... 5-22
7.1 Firmware .................................................................................................................................... 5-22
7.2 Host Microprocessor Board ........................................................................................................ 5-23
7.3 Motor/Lamp Control Board ......................................................................................................... 5-24
7.4 Generator Microprocessor Board ................................................................................................ 5-25
7.5 Filament Control Board .............................................................................................................. 5-25
7.6 Rotor Control Board ................................................................................................................... 5-26
7.7 Tubehead Switch Boards ............................................................................................................ 5-27
7.8 Filament Protect Board ............................................................................................................... 5-27
7.9 Tubehead Microprocessor and Motor Driver Boards ................................................................... 5-28
7.10 Bucky Controller Board ............................................................................................................ 5-29
7.11 C-Arm Vertical Travel Limit Switches ....................................................................................... 5-30
7.12 C-Arm Rotation Limit Switch .................................................................................................... 5-30
7.13 C-arm Switch Boards (2) ........................................................................................................... 5-30
7.14 Mag Tray Detector Board ......................................................................................................... 5-31
7.15 Right Rotation Angle Display Board .......................................................................................... 5-33
7.16 Left Rotation Angle Display Board ............................................................................................ 5-33
7.17 VTA Motor Driver Board .......................................................................................................... 5-34
7.18 Compression / AEC Position Display Boards ............................................................................. 5-34
7.19 AEC Position Switch ................................................................................................................. 5-34
7.20 Paddle Detect Board ................................................................................................................. 5-35
8.0 Replacing Electrical Power Components and Assemblies .................................................................. 5-36
8.1 Power Distribution Board ........................................................................................................... 5-37
8.2 Mains Power Board .................................................................................................................... 5-38
8.3 Emergency Off Switch ................................................................................................................ 5-38
8.4 Circuit Breaker ........................................................................................................................... 5-39
8.5 Isolation Transformer/Power Distribution Assembly .................................................................... 5-40
8.6 Power Supply Interconnect Board ............................................................................................... 5-41
9.0 Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies ......................................................................... 5-42
9.1 Tubehead Cooling Fan ............................................................................................................... 5-42
9.2 C-arm Rotation Potentiometer .................................................................................................... 5-43
9.3 C-arm Rotation Drive Motor and Gearbox Assembly .................................................................. 5-44
9.4 C-arm Vertical Drive Motor and Gearbox Assembly ................................................................... 5-45
9.5 Compression Thickness Potentiometer ........................................................................................ 5-46
9.6 Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly ........................................................................ 5-47
9.7 Compression Motor and Motor Brake ......................................................................................... 5-49
9.8 Timing Belt ................................................................................................................................. 5-50
9.9 Force Load Cell .......................................................................................................................... 5-50
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
6-1
1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 6-1
2.0 AWS Adjustments and Calibrations ..................................................................................................... 6-1
2.1 Display Control and Function Adjustments ................................................................................... 6-1
2.2 Bar Code Reader ......................................................................................................................... 6-2
3.0 How to Set the AWS to Non-Imaging Mode ........................................................................................ 6-3
4.0 X-ray and Light Field Compliance ....................................................................................................... 6-5
4.1 X-ray Field Alignment Large Focal Spot ........................................................................................ 6-5
4.2 Light Field Alignment - Large Focal Spot ....................................................................................... 6-6
4.3 X-ray Field Alignment - Small Focal Spot ...................................................................................... 6-6
4.4 Light Field Alignment - Small Focal Spot ...................................................................................... 6-7
4.5 Light Field Illuminance Test and Adjustment .............................................................................. 6-10
4.6 Light Field Edge Contrast Test ..................................................................................................... 6-12
vi
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
5.0 Downloading/Initializing the Selenia Cal Data ..................................................................................6-13
5.1 Downloading Calibration Data ...................................................................................................6-13
5.2 Initializing the Cal Data ..............................................................................................................6-13
6.0 Image Receptor Calibration Procedures .............................................................................................6-14
6.1 Image Receptor Retract Calibration .............................................................................................6-14
6.2 Image Receptor Gridlines Test .....................................................................................................6-15
6.3 Image Receptor Gridlines Calibration ..........................................................................................6-15
6.4 Gain Calibration .........................................................................................................................6-16
6.5 Image Quality Verification ..........................................................................................................6-16
7.0 Exposure Timing Parameters ..............................................................................................................6-16
7.1 DETECTOR_READY Time-out Adjustment ..................................................................................6-16
7.2 Brick Bypass Mode ......................................................................................................................6-17
8.0 X-ray System Adjustments and Calibrations .......................................................................................6-18
8.1 Tube Bias Verification .................................................................................................................6-18
8.2 HV Control Board Over-Current/Over-Voltage Adjustment .........................................................6-19
8.3 Filament Control Board Over-Current/Over-Voltage Adjustment .................................................6-20
8.4 Tube Voltage (kV) Calibration .....................................................................................................6-20
8.5 Tube Current (mA) Adjustment ....................................................................................................6-22
9.0 Compliance Tests—System Level .......................................................................................................6-24
9.1 Reproducibility and Linearity ......................................................................................................6-24
9.2 Beam Quality Assessment (Half-Value Layer Measurement) ........................................................6-29
9.3 Detector Ghosting .......................................................................................................................6-31
10.0 Modifying the TEC Exposure Mode ..................................................................................................6-33
10.1 General Information ..................................................................................................................6-33
10.2 Site-specific Calibration Requirements .....................................................................................6-33
10.3 Initializing the TEC Lookup Tables ............................................................................................6-34
10.4 Setting the Active TEC Table .....................................................................................................6-34
10.5 Adjusting the TEC Master Density Setting ..................................................................................6-34
10.6 TEC Tables ................................................................................................................................6-35
11.0 AEC Calibration ...............................................................................................................................6-37
11.1 Enable AEC Function .................................................................................................................6-37
11.2 Entering the AEC Calibration Tool .............................................................................................6-37
11.3 Determine Half Value Layer (HVL) ............................................................................................6-40
11.4 Determine Entrance Screen Exposure (ESE) ................................................................................6-43
11.5 Generate Goal Image ................................................................................................................6-45
11.6 Exiting AEC Calibration .............................................................................................................6-47
11.7 AEC Dark Offset Calibration ......................................................................................................6-48
11.8 AEC Dosage Scaling ..................................................................................................................6-49
11.9 Confirm AEC Calibration Settings ..............................................................................................6-49
11.10 AEC Verification ......................................................................................................................6-50
12.0 Configure Array Auto-Power Control Time ......................................................................................6-51
13.0 Configure Array Temperature ..........................................................................................................6-52
14.0 C-arm Tests and Adjustments ...........................................................................................................6-53
14.1 Paddle Programming and Verification .......................................................................................6-53
14.2 C-arm Rotation Angle Calibration .............................................................................................6-54
14.3 C-arm Rotation, Vertical Speed, and Compression Control Test ................................................6-56
14.4 C-arm Vertical Travel Adjustment .............................................................................................6-57
MAN-00625
vii
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
15.0 Compression System Calibration ..................................................................................................... 6-58
15.1 Setting—Force Load Cell .......................................................................................................... 6-58
15.2 Compression Chain Tension Adjustment .................................................................................. 6-58
15.3 Compression Speed Calibration ................................................................................................ 6-58
15.4 Compression Thickness Potentiometer Mechanical Adjustment ................................................ 6-59
15.5 Compression Thickness Potentiometer Calibration ................................................................... 6-59
15.6 Compression Force Calibration ................................................................................................. 6-60
16.0 Power Supply Interconnect Board Adjustment ................................................................................ 6-60
Chapter 7—Performance Testing
7-1
1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 7-1
2.0 Service Acceptance Tests Sign Off Sheet ............................................................................................. 7-1
3.0 Standard System Test .......................................................................................................................... 7-1
4.0 Digital Array Field Acceptance Tests ................................................................................................... 7-2
4.1 Image Receptor Linearity .............................................................................................................. 7-2
4.2 Spatial Resolution ......................................................................................................................... 7-3
4.3 ACR Phantom Evaluation .............................................................................................................. 7-3
4.4 Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) Measurements ................................................................................... 7-4
5.0 Glandular Dose and Radiation Output Rate ........................................................................................ 7-4
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
8-1
1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 8-1
2.0 Getting Log Files ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
2.1 Burning Log Files on CD ............................................................................................................... 8-1
2.2 Accessing the System Log Files from the AWS .............................................................................. 8-1
2.3 Selenia Software Status/Alarm Logs ............................................................................................... 8-1
2.4 Operating System Status/Alarm Logs ............................................................................................. 8-2
2.5 Brick Assembly Status/Alarm Logs ................................................................................................ 8-2
3.0 Set AWS IP Address ............................................................................................................................ 8-2
4.0 Updating the Default Router ............................................................................................................... 8-2
5.0 Host Name and Aliases ....................................................................................................................... 8-3
6.0 Setting Time, Date, and Time Zone ..................................................................................................... 8-3
6.1 Setting Time and Date .................................................................................................................. 8-3
6.2 Setting the Time Zone ................................................................................................................... 8-3
6.3 Brick Time Zone ........................................................................................................................... 8-3
7.0 Changing the Brick and Array IP Addresses (Optional) ........................................................................ 8-4
8.0 Back Up Files ...................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.1 Back Up Configuration ................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2 Back Up the Calibration and Map Files ........................................................................................ 8-4
9.0 Burning Anonymous CDs .................................................................................................................... 8-5
9.1 Add Service CD-RW Output Device ............................................................................................. 8-5
9.2 Configure Service CD-RW ............................................................................................................ 8-5
9.3 Add Output .................................................................................................................................. 8-5
9.4 Write Patient Files ........................................................................................................................ 8-5
9.5 Remove Output ............................................................................................................................ 8-5
10.0 Bad Pixel Mapping ............................................................................................................................ 8-6
10.1 Turning on Automatic Bad Pixel Mapping in the Calibrate Screen .............................................. 8-6
10.2 Calibration ................................................................................................................................. 8-6
viii
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
11.0 Repeat Management ..........................................................................................................................8-7
11.1 Change Review Management to Reject and Add Repreview Tab .................................................8-7
11.2 Repeat Analysis Report—Turning Off Secondarily Accepted Images ...........................................8-7
11.3 Turning off Repeat/Reject Management .......................................................................................8-7
11.4 Spool Full Alarm .........................................................................................................................8-8
12.0 Reducing the Printed Contrast of the Laser Cameras ..........................................................................8-8
13.0 Reducing the Display Contrast on the For Presentation Images ..........................................................8-9
13.1 Test Output Device Connectivity ................................................................................................8-9
14.0 R2 Service Utility ...............................................................................................................................8-9
14.1 Viewing the R2 Logs ...................................................................................................................8-9
14.2 Image Checker Reboot ................................................................................................................8-9
15.0 Reinstalling the AWS Software .........................................................................................................8-10
15.1 AWS Driver Installation .............................................................................................................8-10
15.2 AWS Application Software Installation ......................................................................................8-10
16.0 Configuring the Output Devices ......................................................................................................8-11
16.1 Add and Configure Available Printers ........................................................................................8-11
16.2 Add and Configure DICOM Archives ........................................................................................8-14
16.3 Add and Configure a CAD Server ..............................................................................................8-18
16.4 Add and Configure a Workstation .............................................................................................8-21
16.5 Modality Worklist Configuration ...............................................................................................8-22
16.6 Add and Configure the AWS CD-RW ........................................................................................8-24
16.7 Optionally, Set Up Output Devices to use Alternate Queues .....................................................8-25
16.8 AWS Bar Code Reader ..............................................................................................................8-26
Chapter 9—Parts List
9-1
1.0 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................9-1
2.0 The Replacement Parts Lists .................................................................................................................9-1
Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration
10-1
1.0 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................10-1
2.0 Identification .....................................................................................................................................10-1
3.0 Reconfiguring the Selenia Display Arm Assembly ..............................................................................10-2
3.1 Removing the Selenia Display .....................................................................................................10-2
3.2 Removing the Arm ......................................................................................................................10-2
3.3 Removing the Base ......................................................................................................................10-3
3.4 Reconfigure the Base Wiring .......................................................................................................10-4
3.5 Modify the Selenia Display Arm for Left-Side Articulation ...........................................................10-5
3.6 Modify the Display Arm from Left Side to Right Side ...................................................................10-6
4.0 TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration ..............................................................................................10-6
Chapter 11—TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration
11-1
1.0 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................11-1
2.0 Reconfiguring the TechMate Swivel Arm Assembly ...........................................................................11-1
2.1 Modify the Swivel Arm for Right-Side Articulation ......................................................................11-1
2.2 Route the TechMate Swivel Arm Harness ....................................................................................11-2
2.3 Reinstall The Display and Cables ................................................................................................11-3
MAN-00625
ix
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
Appendix A—Specifications
A-1
1.0 Dimensional Information ....................................................................................................................A-1
1.1 Tubestand (Gantry with C-arm) .....................................................................................................A-1
1.2 Acquisition Workstation ...............................................................................................................A-2
1.3 Acquisition Workstation with Dual Swivel Arms ...........................................................................A-2
2.0 Operating Environment .......................................................................................................................A-3
2.1 General Operating Conditions ......................................................................................................A-3
3.0 Storage Environment ...........................................................................................................................A-3
3.1 Tubestand .....................................................................................................................................A-3
3.2 Image Receptor ............................................................................................................................A-3
4.0 Electrical Input ....................................................................................................................................A-4
4.1 Tubestand .....................................................................................................................................A-4
4.2 Acquisition Workstation ...............................................................................................................A-4
5.0 Acquisition Workstation Technical Information ..................................................................................A-5
6.0 Tubestand Technical Information ........................................................................................................A-6
6.1 C-arm ...........................................................................................................................................A-6
6.2 Compression ................................................................................................................................A-6
6.3 X-ray Tube ....................................................................................................................................A-7
6.4 X-ray Beam Filtration and Output .................................................................................................A-8
6.5 X-ray Collimation .........................................................................................................................A-8
6.6 Light Field Indication ....................................................................................................................A-9
6.7 X-ray Generator ............................................................................................................................A-9
7.0 Imaging System Technical Information ..............................................................................................A-11
7.1 Image Receptor ..........................................................................................................................A-11
7.2 Tissue Exposure Control (TEC) Mode—Enhanced Manual mode .................................................A-12
7.3 Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) .............................................................................................A-13
8.0 Hardcopy Film Printing Devices .......................................................................................................A-15
8.1 Image Engine ..............................................................................................................................A-15
8.2 Interface .....................................................................................................................................A-15
8.3 Printed Film ................................................................................................................................A-15
9.0 TechMate ..........................................................................................................................................A-15
x
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
Appendix B—Technical References
B-1
1.0 Service Mode—Switches and Connections ......................................................................................... B-1
1.1 Host Microprocessor Board Switch Settings .................................................................................. B-1
1.2 Peripheral Monitor Port ................................................................................................................ B-5
1.3 Array Monitor Port ....................................................................................................................... B-6
2.0 Alarm Types and System Messages ..................................................................................................... B-7
2.1 Category One Alarm Functions .................................................................................................... B-8
2.2 Category Two Alarm Functions .................................................................................................... B-8
3.0 Alarm Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................... B-9
4.0 Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes ............................................................................................. B-10
4.1 Critical Errors ............................................................................................................................. B-10
4.2 JAM Failure ................................................................................................................................ B-10
4.3 Power/Boot-up Failure ............................................................................................................... B-11
4.4 Power On Self Test (POST) Failure-Major ................................................................................... B-12
4.5 Readout Sequence Failure .......................................................................................................... B-13
4.6 Message Communication Failure ............................................................................................... B-14
4.7 HV Monitoring Failure ............................................................................................................... B-14
4.8 Temperature Monitoring Failure ................................................................................................. B-15
4.9 EL Monitoring Failure ................................................................................................................. B-15
4.10 RFS Failure ............................................................................................................................... B-15
4.11 Software Upgrade Failure ......................................................................................................... B-16
4.12 Flash Failures ........................................................................................................................... B-16
4.13 General Runtime Failures ......................................................................................................... B-17
4.14 AEC Failure .............................................................................................................................. B-17
4.15 Software Upgrade Success Messages ........................................................................................ B-18
4.16 High Voltage Ramp Task Failures ............................................................................................. B-18
5.0 DRAPI Errors .................................................................................................................................... B-19
6.0 System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions ....................................................................... B-21
6.1 System Message Information ...................................................................................................... B-21
6.2 Sample Category One Alarm Messages ...................................................................................... B-22
6.3 Category One Alarms ................................................................................................................. B-22
6.4 Sample Category Two Alarm Messages ...................................................................................... B-24
6.5 Category Two Alarms ................................................................................................................. B-24
6.6 Category Three Alarms ............................................................................................................... B-31
7.0 Test Points ........................................................................................................................................ B-32
8.0 LED Indicators .................................................................................................................................. B-36
9.0 Fuses ................................................................................................................................................ B-38
10.0 Jumpers .......................................................................................................................................... B-40
Appendix C—Selenia Troubleshooting
C-1
1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ C-1
2.0 AWS Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................... C-1
3.0 Software Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... C-3
4.0 Debugging DICOM ............................................................................................................................ C-5
Index
MAN-00625
I-1
xi
Maintenance Manual
Table of Contents
xii
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Selenia System...........................................................................................................................1-1
Figure 1-2 Location of Emergency Off Switches..........................................................................................1-5
Figure 1-3 Selenia Label Locations .............................................................................................................1-8
Figure 2-1 Gantry Circuit Breaker ...............................................................................................................2-1
Figure 2-2 AWS Circuit Breaker..................................................................................................................2-1
Figure 2-3 Emergency Off Switches ............................................................................................................2-1
Figure 2-4 Location of AWS Controls..........................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-5 Resetting the Selenia UPS ..........................................................................................................2-3
Figure 2-6 Resetting the TechMate UPS ......................................................................................................2-3
Figure 2-7 Logon to AWS ...........................................................................................................................2-4
Figure 2-8 Start-up Wait Time Dialog Box ..................................................................................................2-4
Figure 2-9 Login to Application ..................................................................................................................2-5
Figure 2-10 Select a Patient Screen with New Patient Button Active ...........................................................2-5
Figure 2-11 Information Dialog Box ...........................................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-12 Exit from AWS .........................................................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-13 Location of Emergency Off Switches ........................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-14 Waiting for Link.......................................................................................................................2-9
Figure 2-15 Link Established .......................................................................................................................2-9
Figure 3-1 System Controls .........................................................................................................................3-1
Figure 3-2 The Selenia Controls..................................................................................................................3-1
Figure 3-3 TechMate Controls ....................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-4 Location of AWS Controls..........................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-5 Selenia Keyboard.......................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-6 Setting Exposure Techniques Using the Trackball ......................................................................3-4
Figure 3-7 Selenia Function Keys on the Keyboard .....................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-8 Emergency Off Switches ............................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-9 Flat Screen Display ....................................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-10 Compression Device................................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-11 The Dual Function Footswitch .................................................................................................3-8
Figure 4-1 AWS Components—Front View.................................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 AWS Components—Top/Rear View...........................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-3 AWS Covers Removal................................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-4 Internal Components .................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-5 TechMate Computer Rear Panel ................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-6 TechMate Internal Components .................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-7 Removing the Display................................................................................................................4-8
Figure 4-8 Flat Screen Display ....................................................................................................................4-8
Figure 4-9 TechMate Display Connections .................................................................................................4-9
Figure 4-10 Cable Connections and Routing.............................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-11 Cable Connections and Routing.............................................................................................4-11
Figure 4-12 Shelf and CD-ROM Holder....................................................................................................4-12
MAN-00625
xiii
Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Figure 4-13 HyperTerminal Connection ................................................................................................... 4-15
Figure 4-14 AWS Computer ..................................................................................................................... 4-17
Figure 4-15 TechMate Rear Panel and Cable Routing............................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-16 TechMate Computer Removal ............................................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-17 Radiation Shield .................................................................................................................... 4-19
Figure 4-18 Power Distribution Assembly ................................................................................................ 4-20
Figure 4-19 AC Power Distribution Board ................................................................................................ 4-21
Figure 4-20 AWS Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................. 4-23
Figure 4-21 UPS Replacement ................................................................................................................. 4-25
Figure 4-22 TechMate UPS ...................................................................................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-23 Fiber Optic Cabling, AWS. .................................................................................................... 4-29
Figure 4-24 Fiber Optic Cable Termination Points ................................................................................... 4-29
Figure 5-1 System Components Identification ............................................................................................ 5-2
Figure 5-2 Compression System Components Identification ....................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-3 C-arm Rotation and Vertical Travel Components—Rear View of Gantry.................................... 5-3
Figure 5-4 C-arm Components—Front View............................................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-5 Gantry Covers ........................................................................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-6 Tubehead Covers ...................................................................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-7 Compression Device Covers—Remove and Replace ................................................................. 5-7
Figure 5-8 C-arm Rotation Gear Assembly ............................................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-9 Access to Power On and X-ray On Indicators.......................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-10 Fiber Optic Cabling, Gantry .................................................................................................. 5-14
Figure 5-11 Image Receptor—Remove and Replace................................................................................. 5-15
Figure 5-12 Adjusting the C-arm Switch Assembly ................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-13 Image Receptor Dust Cover and Filter ................................................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-14 HV Generator Assembly........................................................................................................ 5-17
Figure 5-15 Beam Limiting Assembly ....................................................................................................... 5-19
Figure 5-16 X-ray Tube ............................................................................................................................ 5-20
Figure 5-17 Brick Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 5-21
Figure 5-18 AWS Cable Connection ........................................................................................................ 5-21
Figure 5-19 Replacing a Firmware Chip ................................................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-20 Host Microprocessor Board ................................................................................................... 5-23
Figure 5-21 Motor Lamp Control Board ................................................................................................... 5-24
Figure 5-22 Generator Microprocessor Board........................................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-23 Rotor Control Board .............................................................................................................. 5-26
Figure 5-24 Tubehead Switchboard ......................................................................................................... 5-27
Figure 5-25 Tubehead Assembly .............................................................................................................. 5-27
Figure 5-26 Tubehead Microprocessor and Motor Driver Boards ............................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-27 Bucky Controller Board ......................................................................................................... 5-29
Figure 5-28 C-arm Rotation Limit Switch ................................................................................................. 5-30
Figure 5-29 C-arm Switch Board .............................................................................................................. 5-30
Figure 5-30 Remove the C-arm Switch Board........................................................................................... 5-31
Figure 5-31 Replacing the Mag Detect Board ........................................................................................... 5-31
Figure 5-32 Position of the Detect board .................................................................................................. 5-31
xiv
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Figure 5-33 Right/Left Rotation Angle Display Board ................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-34 Compression / AEC Position Display Boards ..........................................................................5-34
Figure 5-35 Paddle Detect Board..............................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-36 Power Distribution Components Identification.......................................................................5-36
Figure 5-37 Power Distribution Board ......................................................................................................5-37
Figure 5-38 Emergency Off Switch ...........................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-39 Circuit Breaker.......................................................................................................................5-39
Figure 5-39 Power Distribution Assembly.................................................................................................5-40
Figure 5-40 Tubehead Cooling Fan...........................................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-41 C-arm Rotation Potentiometer................................................................................................5-43
Figure 5-42 C-arm Rotation Drive Motor and Gearbox Assembly .............................................................5-44
Figure 5-43 C-arm Vertical Drive Motor and Gearbox Assembly ..............................................................5-45
Figure 5-44 Compression Timing Belt.......................................................................................................5-46
Figure 5-45 Compression Thickness Potentiometer...................................................................................5-46
Figure 5-46 Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly...................................................................5-47
Figure 5-47 Compression Motor and Motor Brake ....................................................................................5-49
Figure 5-48 Timing Belt ............................................................................................................................5-50
Figure 5-49 Removing the Force Load Cell ...............................................................................................5-51
Figure 6-1 Display Control .........................................................................................................................6-1
Figure 6-2 Patient Screen—Selecting Non-Imaging Mode ...........................................................................6-3
Figure 6-3 Non-Imaging Mode Warning Box ..............................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-4 Non-Imaging Mode Window. ....................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-5 X-ray Field Size and Light Field Alignment Tools .......................................................................6-5
Figure 6-6 Probe Locations—Light Field Illuminance................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-7 Adjustment—Light Field Illuminance .......................................................................................6-11
Figure 6-8 Test—Light Field Edge Contrast................................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-9 Positioning of Terminal and Form1 Windows ..........................................................................6-17
Figure 6-10 Gantry—Doors Open ............................................................................................................6-19
Figure 6-11 Tube Voltage Calibration .......................................................................................................6-21
Figure 6-12 Banana Jack and Test Points ..................................................................................................6-22
Figure 6-13 Waveform Patterns ................................................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-14 Half Value Layer Setup ..........................................................................................................6-29
Figure 6-15 First Exposure for Ghosting ....................................................................................................6-31
Figure 6-16 Ghost Image 1 .......................................................................................................................6-31
Figure 6-17 Second Exposure for Ghosting ...............................................................................................6-32
Figure 6-18 Preview Screen Showing Set-up for Detector Ghosting Test ...................................................6-32
Figure 6-19 Task Launcher Window .........................................................................................................6-38
Figure 6-20 Terminal Window..................................................................................................................6-38
Figure 6-21 Positioning of Terminal, AEC Calibration Tool, and Form1 Windows ....................................6-39
Figure 6-22 AEC Calibration Tool Window, Set Units to R/mR and AGD..................................................6-39
Figure 6-23 AEC Calibration Tool Window, Enable Capture HVL .............................................................6-40
Figure 6-24 AEC Calibration Tool Window, Entering the mR Value ..........................................................6-41
Figure 6-25 AEC Calibration Tool Window, HVL Value Displayed ...........................................................6-42
Figure 6-26 ESE Setup...............................................................................................................................6-43
MAN-00625
xv
Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Figure 6-27 AEC Calibration Tool Window, Enable Capture ESE .............................................................. 6-44
Figure 6-28 AEC Calibration Tool Window, ESE Value Displayed ............................................................ 6-45
Figure 6-29 Goal Image Setup.................................................................................................................. 6-46
Figure 6-30 AEC Calibration Tool Window, Completion Message............................................................ 6-47
Figure 6-31 Location of Array Serial Port.................................................................................................. 6-52
Figure 6-32 CJ16 on Motor Lamp Control Board ..................................................................................... 6-54
Figure 6-33 Location of C-arm Vertical Travel Limit Switches .................................................................. 6-57
Figure 6-34 Compression Chain Tension Adjustment ............................................................................... 6-58
Figure 8-1 Handheld Laser Scanner Programming Guide ......................................................................... 8-29
Figure 10-1 AWS—Front View ................................................................................................................. 10-1
Figure 10-2 Removing the Selenia Display ............................................................................................... 10-2
Figure 10-3 Removing the Display Arm .................................................................................................. 10-2
Figure 10-4 Standard Cable Routing......................................................................................................... 10-3
Figure 10-5 Removing the TechMate Display........................................................................................... 10-3
Figure 10-6 Removing the TechMate Swivel Arm.................................................................................... 10-4
Figure 10-7 Removing the Base................................................................................................................ 10-4
Figure 10-8 Standard Harness Routing (right-side configuration) .............................................................. 10-5
Figure 10-9 Optional Harness Routing (left-side configuration) ................................................................ 10-5
Figure 10-10 Aligning the Cover Plate...................................................................................................... 10-5
Figure 10-11 Aligning the Shaft ................................................................................................................ 10-6
Figure 10-12 Repositioning the Display Bracket ....................................................................................... 10-6
Figure 10-13 Harness Routing Through the Display Arm.......................................................................... 10-6
Figure 11-1 Aligning the Cover Plate........................................................................................................ 11-1
Figure 11-2 Reinstalling the Swivel Arm to the Base................................................................................. 11-1
Figure 11-3 AWS Right-Side Cable Routing.............................................................................................. 11-2
Figure 11-4 Harness Routing Through the Swivel Arm ............................................................................. 11-2
Figure 11-5 TechMate Display Connections............................................................................................. 11-3
Figure A-1 Tubestand Dimensions .............................................................................................................A-1
Figure A-2 Acquisition Workstation Dimensions ........................................................................................A-2
Figure A-3 Acquisition Workstation with Dual Swivel Arms .......................................................................A-2
Figure B-1 Host Microprocessor Board Switches ........................................................................................ B-1
Figure B-2 Debug Port KJ26 on Host Microprocessor Board ....................................................................... B-5
Figure B-3 Placement of Alarms by Type.................................................................................................... B-7
Figure B-4 Category One Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... B-8
Figure B-5 Alarm Icon ................................................................................................................................ B-8
Figure B-6 Alarm Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... B-9
Figure B-7 System Messages..................................................................................................................... B-21
Figure B-8 Gantry Fuses (Right Panel) ...................................................................................................... B-39
Figure B-9 Gantry Fuses (Left Panel) ......................................................................................................... B-39
Figure C-1 AWS Circuit Breaker .................................................................................................................C-3
xvi
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
List of Tables
List of Tables
Table P-1 Selenia Documents ............................................................................................................... P-xxvi
Table 3-1 Selenia Function Keys ................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-2 Functional Tests of System Controls ...........................................................................................3-9
Table 4-1 AWS Recommended Preventive Maintenance Procedures .........................................................4-6
Table 5-1 Selenia Recommended Preventive Maintenance Procedures ......................................................5-8
Table 5-2 Selenia Firmware Identification by Circuit Board .....................................................................5-22
Table 6-1 Display Adjustments Using Control Dial ....................................................................................6-1
Table 6-2 Compression Accessory Sensor Combinations ...........................................................................6-5
Table 6-3 Paddle Codes .............................................................................................................................6-7
Table 6-4 X-ray Field Size Determination Data Sheet ................................................................................6-8
Table 6-5 Light Field Alignment .................................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-1 Light Field Illuminance ............................................................................................................6-10
Table 6-6 Light field Edge Contrast ..........................................................................................................6-12
Table 6-7 Tube Bias Values .....................................................................................................................6-18
Table 6-8 HV Control Board Over-Current / Over-Voltage Adjustment ....................................................6-19
Table 6-9 Filament Control Board Over-Current / Over-Voltage Adjustment ............................................6-20
Table 6-10 Tube Voltage Potential (kV) Data Sheet ..................................................................................6-21
Table 6-11 Reproducibility Worksheet ...................................................................................................6-26
Table 6-12 Linearity Worksheet ...............................................................................................................6-27
Table 6-13 Linearity Worksheet-Small Focal Spot ....................................................................................6-28
Table 6-14 TEC tables ..............................................................................................................................6-33
Table 6-15 AEC Verification settings ........................................................................................................6-50
Table 6-16 Compression Accessory Sensor Combinations .......................................................................6-53
Table 9-1 Gantry Power Distribution Functions Parts List ..........................................................................9-1
Table 9-2 System Control and X-ray Functions Parts List ............................................................................9-2
Table 9-3 C-arm Functions Parts List ..........................................................................................................9-2
Table 9-4 Image Acquisition Sub-system Parts List .....................................................................................9-3
Table 9-5 Selenia Paddles ..........................................................................................................................9-4
Table 9-6 TechMate Parts List ....................................................................................................................9-6
Table 9-7 Miscellaneous Parts List .............................................................................................................9-6
Table B-1 DIP Switch S6 ........................................................................................................................... B-2
Table B-2 Rotary Switch S4 ...................................................................................................................... B-3
Table B-3 DIP Switch S7 ........................................................................................................................... B-4
Table B-4 Computer Serial Port Settings .................................................................................................... B-5
Table B-5 Serial Port Cable Connections .................................................................................................. B-5
Table B-6 Monitoring Host Peripheral Ports .............................................................................................. B-5
Table B-7 Laptop HyperTerminal Communication Settings ....................................................................... B-6
Table B-8 Critical Errors .......................................................................................................................... B-10
MAN-00625
xvii
Maintenance Manual
List of Tables
Table B-9 JAM Failure-Major .................................................................................................................. B-10
Table B-10 JAM Failure-Minor ................................................................................................................ B-10
Table B-11 Power/Boot-up Failure-Major ................................................................................................ B-11
Table B-12 Power/Boot-up Failure-Minor ................................................................................................ B-11
Table B-13 Power On Self Test (POST) Failure-Major .............................................................................. B-12
Table B-14 Power On Self Test (POST) Failure-Minor .............................................................................. B-12
Table B-15 Readout Sequence Failure-Major .......................................................................................... B-13
Table B-16 Readout Sequence Failure-Minor .......................................................................................... B-13
Table B-17 Message Communication Failure-Major ................................................................................ B-14
Table B-18 Message Communication Failure-Minor ................................................................................ B-14
Table B-19 HV Monitoring Failure-Major ................................................................................................ B-14
Table B-20 HV Monitoring Failure-Minor ............................................................................................... B-14
Table B-21 Temperature Monitoring Failure-Major ................................................................................. B-15
Table B-22 Temperature Monitoring Failure-Minor ................................................................................. B-15
Table B-23 EL Monitoring Failure-Major ................................................................................................. B-15
Table B-24 EL Monitoring Failure-Minor ................................................................................................. B-15
Table B-25 RFS Failure-Major ................................................................................................................. B-15
Table B-26 RFS Failure-Minor ................................................................................................................. B-15
Table B-27 Software Upgrade Failure-Major ........................................................................................... B-16
Table B-28 Software Upgrade Failure-Minor ........................................................................................... B-16
Table B-29 Flash Failures-Major .............................................................................................................. B-16
Table B-30 Flash Failures-Minor ............................................................................................................. B-16
Table B-31 General Runtime Failures-Major ........................................................................................... B-17
Table B-32 General Runtime Failures-Minor ........................................................................................... B-17
Table B-33 AEC Failure-Major ................................................................................................................ B-17
Table B-34 AEC Failures-Minor ............................................................................................................... B-17
Table B-35 Software Upgrade Success Message-Major ............................................................................ B-18
Table B-36 Software Upgrade Success Messages-Minor .......................................................................... B-18
Table B-37 High Voltage Ramp Task Failure-Major ................................................................................. B-18
Table B-38 High Voltage Ramp Task Failures-Minor ............................................................................... B-18
Table B-39 Error Communicating with the Detector ................................................................................ B-19
Table B-40 Error Initializing the DRAPI ................................................................................................... B-20
Table B-41 System Messages ................................................................................................................... B-21
Table B-42 Alarm Messages .................................................................................................................... B-22
Table B-43 Category Two Alarms ............................................................................................................ B-24
Table B-44 Image Processing Error Messages .......................................................................................... B-31
Table B-45 HV Control Board ................................................................................................................. B-32
Table B-46 HV Inverter ........................................................................................................................... B-32
Table B-48 Generator Microprocessor Board .......................................................................................... B-33
Table B-49 Power Distribution Board ...................................................................................................... B-33
Table B-50 Mains Board ......................................................................................................................... B-33
xviii
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
List of Tables
Table B-47 Filament Control Board ........................................................................................................ B-33
Table B-51 Power Supply Interconnect Board ......................................................................................... B-34
Table B-52 Host Microprocessor Board .................................................................................................. B-34
Table B-53 Motor/Lamp Control Board ................................................................................................... B-34
Table B-54 Rotor Control Board ............................................................................................................. B-35
Table B-55 Filament Protect Board ......................................................................................................... B-35
Table B-56 Tubehead Microprocessor Board .......................................................................................... B-35
Table B-57 Filament Control Board ........................................................................................................ B-36
Table B-58 Generator Microprocessor Board .......................................................................................... B-36
Table B-59 Mains Power Board .............................................................................................................. B-36
Table B-60 Power Supply Interconnect Board ......................................................................................... B-36
Table B-61 Host Microprocessor Board .................................................................................................. B-36
Table B-62 Motor/Lamp Control Board ................................................................................................... B-37
Table B-63 AWS X-ray LED Board (left) .................................................................................................. B-37
Table B-64 AWS X-ray LED Board (right) ................................................................................................ B-37
Table B-65 Rotor Control Board ............................................................................................................. B-37
Table B-66 High Voltage Control Board ................................................................................................. B-37
Table B-67 Selenia Fuses ........................................................................................................................ B-38
Table B-68 Circuit Board Jumper Settings ............................................................................................... B-40
Table C-1 AWS Troubleshooting Table ..................................................................................................... C-1
Table C-2 Software Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... C-3
MAN-00625
xix
Maintenance Manual
List of Tables
xx
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Preface
Intended Use
Preface
1.0
Intended Use
The Selenia™ is intended to produce radiographic images of the breast. Its intended use is
for the production, storage, and diagnostic review of digital screening, diagnostic, and
needle localization mammography.
2.0
3.0
Quality Control
•
All quality control tests described in the QC manual must be performed at the prescribed
frequencies as required under MQSA regulations.
•
To assure continued high level operation of Selenia, the recommended quality control
procedures must be followed.
Training
Hologic® does not accept responsibility for injury or damage associated with improper or
unsafe system operation.
Service engineers must ensure that they receive training on Selenia with Hologic training
programs prior to servicing the unit.
Service engineers should refer to this Maintenance Manual, the QC Manual, and to the
Operator’s Manual for directions on how to use and service Selenia.
4.0
Product Complaints
Any health care professional (for example, customer or user of this system of products) who
has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the quality, durability,
reliability, safety, effectiveness, and/or performance of this product should notify Hologic. If
the device malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a patient,
Hologic should be notified immediately by telephone, fax, or written correspondence.
5.0
Prerequisites
To perform the procedures in this manual, you should know how to do the following
operations related to the system’s graphical user interface:
• Perform mouse and trackball operations, such as click, drag, and select
• Select from menus
• Click buttons
• Enter information in text fields
• Select options
• Select entries from drop-down lists
• Use scroll bars
You should also have a good working knowledge of:
•
•
•
MAN-00625
Unix
The Acquisition Workstation (AWS) application software
Netscape
xxi
Maintenance Manual
Preface
Terms and Definitions
6.0
xxii
Terms and Definitions
Accession Number
A DICOM term that refers to a RIS generated number that
uniquely identifies a visit to a site by a patient.
AE
Applications Entity. A DICOM term referring to the name
of an application that performs DICOM services.
AEC
Automatic Exposure Control. A method of limiting the
amount of radiation a patient receives.
AGD
Average Glandular Dose
AWS
Acquisition Workstation
B.E.M.
Breast Equivalent Material
Brick
Power and X-ray Control Module (PXCM)
CC, MLO
Names of the view positions for screening mammography.
CHECKONSTART
A term used in setting configurable parameters.
Determines whether a particular parameter is verified each
time the AWS is started.
Collimator
Device at the X-ray tube that is used to restrict the area of
the receptor that is exposed.
CPT
Common Procedural Terminology
Dialog Box
A pop-up which informs the user, may require a user
decision, and requires the action of the user by mouse
click before any other activities can occur. It is used for
important notices, warnings, errors.
DICOM
Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine. An
industry standard for connection of medical imaging
equipment.
Digital Marker
A software implemented mechanism for imprinting a mark
within an image to indicate some information (usually
orientation) – (see Lead Marker).
DMM
Digital Multimeter
DR
Direct Radiography. A term used to distinguish the use of a
photoconductor-based method as opposed to the x-ray
capture and conversion method use in a scintillator or
phosphor-based detector.
DRAPI
Direct Ray Application Programming Interface
EMC
Electro-magnetic Compatibility
EMI
Electro-magnetic Interference
ESA
Exam Specific Algorithm (Look Up Table).
ESD
Electro-static Discharge
ESE
Entrance Skin Exposure dose
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Preface
Terms and Definitions
MAN-00625
Exam
A generic term which is used in this document to mean
everything that the Acquisition Workstation user does to
perform a study. Exam is not part of DICOM nomenclature.
FAST
Fully Automatic Self-Adjusting Tilt Paddle
Flip
Change the orientation of an image about the vertical or
horizontal axis. (Mirror)
FRU
Field Replaceable Unit
Generator
Device that supplies high voltage power to the X-ray tube.
Grid
Element within the Image Receptor which reduces scatter
radiation during exposure.
HIWATER
A term used in setting configurable parameters. If the
reclaimer sees more than this number of images or
patients, the process starts. If it is less than this number, it
immediately stops. A log message says that the reclaimer
started but that there was nothing to reclaim.
HOLDTIME
A term used in setting configurable parameters. The
minimum amount of time that patients/images are held
before being reclaimed. Holdtime is expressed in
days.hours.minutes (00.00.00).
Host System
The electronics connected to the PXCM, which provides
the user interface, hosts the image acquisition library and
API, generates detector corrected data from the array, and
determines disposition of the final image. Another name
for Host System is “Operator Console.”
HV
High Voltage
HTC
High Transmission Cellular Grid
HVL
Beam Quality Half-Value Layer
Image (Object)
A set of modality specific binary data and identifying
attributes which represents the result of an imaging
procedure performed on a patient. DICOM uniquely
identifies image objects with a globally unique identifier
(UID).
INTERVAL
A term used in setting configurable parameters. The time
period that the reclaimer looks for new patients or images
to be reclaimed. Time intervals are expressed in
days.hours.minutes (00.00.00).
IR
Image Receptor
kV
An electrical term used in setting X-ray exposure which
stands for kilo-volts.
Lead Marker
A marking device used in X-ray techniques which blocks
the X-ray from exposing the film thereby creating a white
area within a black background.
xxiii
Maintenance Manual
Preface
Terms and Definitions
xxiv
login/logout
The process of logging into and out of the Operating
System of the Acquisition Workstation. Upon start-up, this
occurs before a user signs into the Acquisition Workstation
application, and upon exiting, occurs after a user signs out
of the Acquisition Workstation.
LOWATER
A term used in setting configurable parameters. If the
reclaimer started, the oldest eligible images are reclaimed
until there are only Lowater images left on the system. For
patients, eligible patients that have been on the system the
longest are reclaimed down to the Lowater mark. Note that
the Lowater mark can never be more than 50 from the
Hiwater mark, or else you can cause very long reclaim times.
LUT
A Look-Up Table (LUT) is an image processing function
that replaces one image pixel value with a different image
pixel value.
LVPS
Low Voltage Power Supply
Mag
Magnification mode
mA
An electrical term used in setting X-ray exposure which
stands for milliamperes.
mAs
An electrical term used in setting X-ray exposure which
stands for milliampere-seconds.
Mirror
see Flip
Mo
Molybdenum
MQSA
Mammography Quality Standards Act
MPU
Microprocessor Unit
N
Newtons
OD
Optical Density
Operating System (OS)
The basic software control system which runs all functions
of a computer.
Outputs
A list of devices to which the captured, accepted image is
sent. Outputs consist of a combination of archives,
workstations, and film printers.
Procedure
A generic pre-defined medical protocol which contains a set
of images (views) which are acquired under certain
conditions, and are performed together for a singular purpose
(for example, standard screening). Because a procedure is a
generic entity in DICOM, there is no procedure instance UID,
but DICOM supports identification of requested procedures.
PXCM
Power and X-ray Control Module. The communication
interface between the Acquisition Workstation and the
Image Receptor. Also referred to as “Brick.”
Reclaimer
A process that allows images and patients to be
automatically removed from the AWS.
Rh or Rho
Rhodium
RIS
Radiology Information System
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Preface
Terms and Definitions
MAN-00625
SecurViewRT™
The Hologic Technologist Review Workstation.
Series
A set of images which have all been acquired by a single
tech for a single study with the same modality.
SID
Source to Image Distance
Sign-in
The process of a user identifying him/herself to the
Acquisition Workstation application.
Sign-out
The process of a user exiting the Acquisition Workstation
application, but not logging out of the OS.
Solaris™
The commercial Sun™ Microsystems’ version of the UNIX
Operating System.
STRATEGIES
A term used in setting configurable parameters. Lists the
strategies (methods) that are used to reclaim images.
Study
A specific instance of a procedure on the Acquisition
Workstation, consisting of a set of images and/or series, which
has been performed on a specific patient, and is usually
identified in some locally unique way. DICOM uniquely
identifies studies with a globally unique instance UID.
TEC
Tissue Exposure Control. The mammographer enters a
density for the patient (dense, normal or fatty), compresses
the patient normally, and the Acquisition Workstation
displays a recommended technique read out of the
generator, based on standard tables. The operator approves
this technique and starts the exposure.
TechMate™
The Hologic SecurViewRT Technologist Review
Workstation accessory, as packaged with the Selenia to
reduce space in the examination room.
Technique
Combination of X-ray parameters (kV, mA, etc.) defined for
a particular procedure view.
TIMEOUT
A term used in setting configurable parameters. The
amount of time that a process is tried before stopping.
Timeout is expressed in days.hours.minutes (00.00.00).
UID
DICOM term meaning unique identifier.
UNIX
Generic term for a class of multitasking, multiprocessing
operating systems which are based on the concepts
initially developed in the early 1970s by AT&T Bell Labs
and later expanded on at the University of California at
Berkeley.
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
View
The combination of a single X-ray image and a specific set of
conditions under which the image was acquired. View is not
part of DICOM nomenclature, but in the context of DR, is
approximately synonymous with a DICOM image object.
xxv
Maintenance Manual
Preface
Document Conventions
7.0
VIEWS
A term used in setting configurable parameters. Includes
the name of patient views that are to be excluded from the
reclaimation process. This only applies to
STR_IMAGE_LRU_QUALITY_CONTROL.
Visit
A set of studies identified in a locally unique manner and
performed on a particular patient at a particular site for a
singular reason. Normally identified by accession number
or Visit ID and is associated with a diagnosis. DICOM has
no concept of a visit instance UID.
VAC
Volts, Alternating Current
VDC
Volts, Direct Current
VTA
Vertical Travel Assembly
Document Conventions
Text written in monospaced font is supposed to be typed exactly as shown. Pressing the
left trackball button is referred to as "click" and the right button as “right-click.”
8.0
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Definitions of Warnings, Cautions, and Notes used throughout this manual are:
9.0
WARNING!
This alerts you to procedures that you must follow precisely to
avoid causing potentially serious or fatal injury to yourself or
others.
Warning:
Warnings indicate procedures that you must follow precisely to
avoid injury to yourself or others.
Caution:
Cautions indicate procedures that you must follow precisely to avoid damage
to equipment, loss of data, or corruption of files in software applications.
Note…
Notes indicate important information that must be followed to ensure the
proper operation of the system.
Selenia Manual Set
The Selenia Manual set contains the following documentation:
Table P-1: Selenia Documents
Title
Operator’s Manual
Administration Manual
Installation Manual
Maintenance Manual
QC Manual
Schematics
xxvi
P/N
MAN-00623
MAN-00193
MAN-00624
MAN-00625
MAN-00093
9-500-0282
Use
Selenia system operation
Selenia system administration
Selenia system installation
Selenia system maintenance
Selenia Quality Control
Troubleshooting supplement to the Service Manual
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Preface
Using the Maintenance Manual
10.0 Using the Maintenance Manual
Chapter 1—General Information. This chapter provides an overview of the
mammography system, including component descriptions, patient and user safety,
interlocks, and compliance information.
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures. This chapter provides the pre- and
post-start up tests, the Startup, Shutdown, and Emergency Operating procedures for
Selenia.
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests. This chapter describes the
Selenia controls and indicators. Also included are descriptions of the switch settings and
connections used while in the service mode.
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance. This chapter provides preventive maintenance
procedures, component identification, how to access internal components, and remove
and replace procedures for components on the Acquisition Workstation.
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance. This chapter provides preventive maintenance
procedures, component identification, how to access Gantry components, and remove
and replace procedures for components on the Gantry.
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration. This chapter provides
adjustments and calibrations for the components which make up the System.
Chapter 7—Performance Testing. This chapter provides system level Compliance
tests and performance tests on the components which make up the X-ray system.
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance. This chapter provides procedures to maintain
the software and to get files for technical support.
Chapter 9—Parts List. This chapter provides tabular listing of the replacement parts.
Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration. This chapter provides
information and instructions for reconfiguring the Selenia Display Arm.
Chapter 11—TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration. This chapter provides
information and instructions for reconfiguring the TechMate Swivel Arm.
Appendix A—Specifications. This appendix contains system specifications.
Appendix B—Technical References. This Appendix provides technical references to
be used as aids in troubleshooting Selenia.
Appendix C—Selenia Troubleshooting. This appendix contains Selenia
troubleshooting information.
MAN-00625
xxvii
Maintenance Manual
Preface
Using the Maintenance Manual
xxviii
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 1—General Information
Introduction
Chapter 1—General Information
1.0
Introduction
This chapter provides an overview of Selenia, including component descriptions, patient and
user safety, interlocks, and compliance information.
2.0
System Description
The Selenia is available with a technologist review workstation (the Hologic SecurViewRT
TechMateTM) accessory. With the addition of this accessory, the SecurViewRT is packaged
with the Selenia to reduce space required in the examination room.
Figure 1-1: Selenia System
Legend for Figure 1-1
1. The Selenia AWS contains the image processing electronics and provides the operator
interface.
2. The SecurViewRT TechMate technologist review workstation accessory.
3. The C-arm consists of the X-ray tube, compression systems, and the digital image
receptor. A pivot mechanism connects it to the Gantry.
4. The Gantry contains the electrical and mechanical subsystems for the Selenia. The Carm and the Gantry make up the Tubestand.
5. Dual-function Footswitches allow hands-free C-arm vertical travel and compression
movements.
MAN-00625
1-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 1—General Information
Film Printer (option)
3.0
Film Printer (option)
Printers are available for printed film. Printed films have the patient information, exposure
technique, projection and institution information displayed.
4.0
Safety
This manual should be read and understood in its entirety before turning the unit On. Always
follow all the instructions in this manual.
The Selenia system is classified as CLASS I, TYPE B permanently connected
equipment as per IEC 60601-1. There are no special provisions to protect
the system from flammable anesthetics or ingress of liquids.
Warning:
4.1
This X-ray unit may be dangerous unless safe exposure factors and
operating instructions are followed. Observe all operating and
safety instructions before making an X-ray exposure.
Isolation Integrity
WARNING!
To ensure the isolation integrity for the system, attach only
Hologic accessories or options to the unit. Any changes to the
interconnections must be performed by Hologic authorized
personnel.
WARNING!
To insure proper isolation, maintain a 1.5 meter distance
between the patient and any non-patient devices. Non-patient
system components (such as the Workflow Manager, or the
hardcopy printer) must not be installed in the Patient Area.
1.5m
1-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 1—General Information
Safety
4.2
Radiation Safety
The exposure duration is limited by the following normal conditions:
•
The manual mAs timer
The exposure duration is also limited by the following abnormal conditions:
•
Premature release of the X-ray exposure switch
•
Exceeding the preset back-up time
•
The independent safety hardware back-up timer
•
Detection of a generator fault
4.2.1
Operator Radiation Shield
The unit’s radiation shield is designed to comply with all requirements of 21CFR
1020 and IEC 60601-2-45.2001. The shield is rated for a 0.5 mm Pb (lead)
equivalence and is permanently mounted to the AWS.
Warning:
4.2.2
For maximum protection from X-ray exposure, the operator must
keep their entire body behind the radiation shield for the duration
of the exposure.
Exam Room Door Indicators
•
Power On Indicator—There is a provision in the system to accommodate local
regulations that require an X-ray System Power-On Indicator at the door.
•
X-ray On Indicator—There is a provision in the system to accommodate local
regulations that require an X-ray Exposure In-Progress indicator at the door.
The connection points are available through the access panel at the rear of the
Gantry. See Chapter 5, Remote X-ray On/Power On Light—Connection, p. 5-12.
4.3
Electrical Safety
Only an authorized service engineer should remove covers from the mammography unit.
MAN-00625
WARNING!
Lethal voltages are present within the interior of this unit.
WARNING!
Per North American electrical safety requirements, grounding
reliability can only be achieved when the Acquisition
Workstation is connected to a receptacle marked Hospital
Grade.
WARNING!
Electrical equipment used in the presence of flammable
anesthetics may cause an explosion.
1-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 1—General Information
Safety
4.4
WARNING!
The Disk Drives equipped with this system are a Class I Laser
Product. Avoid direct exposure to the beam. Invisible laser
radiation is present if the case to a disk drive is open.
WARNING!
The Bar Code Scanner equipped with this system is a Class II
Laser Product. Avoid direct exposure to the beam. Invisible
laser radiation is present if the cover is opened.
Caution:
Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce
magnetic fields, since stored data may be lost.
Caution:
Never switch off the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) except in
emergency (due to the risk of data loss).
Caution:
To minimize potential damage from thermal shock to the Digital Image
Receptor, follow the recommended procedure to turn off the equipment.
Caution:
Only Selenia recommended accessories should be used with this
equipment. Failure to heed this warning may cause unexpected functions
and possible data loss.
Caution:
This is a medical device and should not be considered to be a generalpurpose computer. Users or service/administrative personnel may not
amend, configure, or modify any hardware or software on this medical
device with anything other than Hologic-approved components or
software, including anti-virus software. This device should be installed
behind the institution firewall for network security and anti-virus
protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for
this medical device is provided (for example, a computer firewall).
Network security and anti-virus provisions are the ongoing responsibility
of the user.
Mechanical Safety
The equipment is designed to comply with the requirements of IEC 60601-1, UL 60601-1, and
CSA 22.2 No. 601.1 by these safety features:
1-4
•
The C-arm rotation braking is ensured upon loss of power.
•
Compression release is disabled when a localization paddle is installed.
•
Motorized compression force is limited to 200 N (45 lb).
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 1—General Information
Safety
4.5
Emergency Off Switches
There are three Emergency Off Switches on the Selenia, one on either side of the Gantry and
one on the AWS. Do not use the Emergency Off Switches to routinely remove power from the
Selenia. The Emergency Off switch only affects the Gantry and should be used only in an
emergency. For details on its use, see Chapter 2, Section 4.0, p. 2-8.
Figure 1-2: Location of Emergency Off Switches
MAN-00625
1-5
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 1—General Information
Safety
4.6
Interlocks
In addition to the Emergency Off Switches described above, Selenia has several other safety
interlocks.
4.6.1
C-arm Movement Interlocks
C-arm vertical drive and rotation is disabled when 58 N (13 lb) or greater of
compression force is displayed.
4.6.2
Automatic Compression Release Interlock
Installing a Localization Paddle disables the automatic compression release
functions.
4.6.3
Early Release Interlock
The two X-ray exposure switches must be activated and held throughout the entire
duration of the exposure. When the X-ray exposure switches are released prior to the
end of the exposure, this interlock causes immediate termination of the exposure.
An alarm message displays on the user interface.
4.6.4
Mirror and Filter Interlocks
These interlocks prevent X-ray exposure whenever the Light Field Mirror or the Filter
is not positioned correctly.
4.6.5
Smart Paddle System Position Interlock
When a breast examination (for example, 18 x 24 cm MLO view) is selected
requiring the use of an 18 x 24 cm (7.1 x 9.4 in.) shifting paddle, if the detected
position does not match the view, the acquisition computer prevents the X-ray
exposure until the faulty condition is corrected. A message is displayed to alert the
user.
1-6
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 1—General Information
Compliance
5.0
Compliance
This section details the mammography system compliance requirements and the
manufacturer’s responsibilities.
5.1
Compliance Requirements
The manufacturer is responsible for the effects of safety, reliability, and performance of this
equipment with the following provisions:
5.2
•
The electrical installation of the room complies with the appropriate requirements.
•
The equipment is used in accordance with instructions for use.
•
Assembly operations, extensions, re-adjustments, modifications, or repairs are
performed by authorized persons only.
•
The installed network and communications equipment must comply with an IEC Standard,
and the complete system (network/communications equipment and Selenia
Mammography System) must be installed to comply with IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1.
Compliance Statements
The manufacturer states that this device is manufactured/conforms to:
MAN-00625
•
CAN/CSA ISO 13485:2003/ISO 13485:2003
•
FDA, 21 CFR [Parts 820, 900 and 1020]
•
IEC 60601-1:1988 +A1+A2:1995 +A13:1996 Medical Electrical Equipment—General
requirements for safety
•
IEC 60601-1-1:2000-12 Medical Electrical Equipment—Collateral Standard: Safety
requirements for medical electrical systems
•
IEC 60601-1-2:2001 Medical Electrical Equipment—Collateral Standard:
Electromagnetic compatibility for medical electric systems
•
IEC 60601-1-3:1994 Medical Electrical Equipment—Collateral Standard: Requirements
for radiation protection in diagnostic X-ray equipment
•
IEC 60601-1-4:1996 +A1:1999 Medical Electrical Equipment—Collateral Standard:
Programmable electrical medical systems
•
IEC 60601-2-28:1993-03 Medical Electrical Equipment—Particular requirements for the
safety of X-ray source assemblies and X-ray tube assemblies for medical diagnosis
•
IEC 60601-2-32:1994 Medical Electrical Equipment—Particular requirements for the
safety of associated equipment of X-ray equipment
•
IEC 60601-2-45:2001 Medical Electrical Equipment—Particular requirements for the
safety of mammographic X-ray equipment and mammographic stereotactic devices
•
UL 60601-1: Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1—General Requirements for Safety
•
CSA: Medical Electrical Equipment Part 1: C22.2 No. 601.1–M90—General
Requirements for Safety
1-7
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 1—General Information
Compliance
5.3
Label Locations
Figure 1-3: Selenia Label Locations
1-8
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Introduction
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
1.0
Introduction
This chapter provides the pre- and post-startup tests, the Startup, Shutdown, and Emergency
Operating procedures for Selenia. Refer to the Selenia Operator’s Manual for detailed
information about Operating Procedures.
2.0
Startup Procedures
2.1
Pre-Startup Tests
Before applying power to the system:
1. Verify that:
a. Primary (source) power circuit breaker is On.
b. Circuit breaker on the rear of the Gantry is On.
Figure 2-1: Gantry Circuit Breaker
c.
Circuit breaker on the rear of the AWS is On.
Figure 2-2: AWS Circuit Breaker.
d. All three Emergency Off switches are reset (two
on the Gantry, one on the AWS).
Figure 2-3: Emergency Off Switches
2. Inspect the overall integrity of the mammography unit for open or loose panels, missing
hardware, and signs of damage.
3. Inspect the radiation shield for chips, cracks, breaks, and secure attachment.
4. Be sure the room is clear of obstructions.
5. Correct all discrepancies before starting the system.
MAN-00625
2-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Startup Procedures
2.2
Start up the System
2.2.1
Selenia
1. Press the Selenia Power On button (small black button on the left keypad)
momentarily to start the system. A green LED illuminates indicating power is on.
Legend for Figure 2-4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
On button.
On indicator light.
X-ray Indicator lights on both
panels.
X-ray buttons on both panels, one
on each side of the keyboard.
Compression Release button.
Figure 2-4: Location of AWS Controls
2. Wait for the computer to start up.
The system initializes and runs the diagnostic tests. This may take several
minutes. The temperature of the Selenia Detector is critical for image quality. To
stabilize its temperature, the detector should be on for at least 1 hour (warm up)
before calibrations or patient exposures.
Note…
2.2.2
If during the internal tests, the system detects a fault condition, a message
displays, and the startup is suspended until the problem is remedied.
TechMate
1. Start the TechMate by pressing the button on the upper right side of the
Workstation front cover. See Figure 3-3, p. 3-2.
2. Refer to SecurViewRT documentation for additional TechMate Installation and
User information.
2-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Startup Procedures
2.3
Resetting the UPS
2.3.1
System Power Is Turned Off
If the Acquisition Workstation does not respond to the On button, the
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) may need to be reset. For example: If power is
removed from the Acquisition Workstation (such as power source disconnected or
circuit breaker switched off) and then re-applied, the UPS may not automatically
respond.
To reset the Selenia UPS:
See Figure 2-5.
1. Locate the UPS button at the lower right of the
back panel.
2. Press down and hold the button to press the
reset button on the UPS. The UPS will chirp.
UPS
LBL-00343
3. Press the button again and listen for a second
chirp.
4. Start the Acquisition Workstation normally.
Figure 2-5: Resetting the Selenia UPS
To reset the TechMate UPS:
See Figure 2-6.
1. Locate the access hole in the middle of the left
side of the front cover. This hole is aligned with
the Power button on the UPS.
2. Insert the eraser-end of a pencil into the hole to
press the button on the UPS fully inward until it
catches.
UPS
LBL-00343
3. Start the TechMate normally.
Figure 2-6: Resetting the TechMate UPS
Notes…
MAN-00625
In the event the above procedure fails to reset the UPS, the circuit breaker
located at the right side of the TechMate UPS may have tripped. In this case,
the front cover must be removed; refer to Chapter 4, Section 3.1, p. 4-5.
Locate the circuit breaker (white button) and press.
2-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Startup Procedures
2.4
Log in to the Operating System
You must log in to the computer's Operating System (OS) and the application with a user
name and password.
When the Logon dialog box appears:
1. Type your Operating System user name (case sensitive).
2. Click OK or press Return.
Figure 2-7: Logon to AWS
3. Type your Operating System password in the next dialog box.
Note…
Customers are not to be given any service or apps passwords.
4. Press Return or click OK.
2.5
Startup Wait Time
When the AWS is started, a message window displays the time remaining for the detector to
reach operating temperature. This window is cancellable and does not restrict use before this
time expires.
Warning:
Do not calibrate the system until it reaches operating temperature.
Figure 2-8: Start-up Wait Time Dialog Box
2-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Startup Procedures
2.6
Log in to the Application
When the Login to system dialog box appears:
1. Select your ID from the drop-down list.
2. Click the Password field and enter your password (case sensitive).
Note…
Customers are not to be given any service or apps passwords.
Figure 2-9: Login to Application
3. Click OK. The application window, Select a Patient, appears.
For detailed information on the operating screens, refer to the Selenia Operator’s Manual.
Figure 2-10: Select a Patient Screen with New Patient Button Active
MAN-00625
2-5
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Startup Procedures
2.7
Information Dialog Box
The Information dialog box located within the Main Menu Function identifies the AWS
software version, current temperature of the array, and the date, time, and temperature of the
last calibration.
Figure 2-11: Information Dialog Box
2.8
Post-Startup Tests
After the system starts, perform the C-arm, Tubehead, and Footswitch functional tests to
ensure mechanical integrity. For functional descriptions of the controls and tests refer to
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests.
2-6
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Shutdown Procedures
3.0
Shutdown Procedures
To properly shut down the Selenia System:
1. Exit any open patient procedure.
2. Sign out of the application by selecting File>Exit on the main menu.
a.
Click the Power off the computer button on the dialog box.
b. Click Yes.
Figure 2-12: Exit from AWS
3. At the Confirmation message, Are you sure you would like to power off the computer?
select Yes.
4. When the Green Power indicator on the AWS turns off, the system is completely shut
down.
5. If the program does not close correctly, to shut the system down manually:
a.
After the application closes, select OK at the Logout Confirmation dialog box. If you
do not see the Logout confirmation box, click Exit on the Taskbar.
b. At the Solaris Welcome window, enter shutdown (all lower case) for the user name
and select OK or press Return.
c.
For the Password, enter shutdown (all lower case) and select OK or press Return.
When the Green Power indicator on the AWS turns off, the system is completely shut down.
Note…
3.1
The correct and only way to quit is from the exit menu. Do not use the task
launcher or the bottom Solaris bar, except in emergencies.
User Reboot and User Shutdown
There are two special users on the system: User Reboot and User Shutdown. These are
initiated from a command line or the Sun interface, not from the Selenia interface. Initiating
a User Reboot reboots the operating system. Initiating a User Shutdown provides for an
orderly shutdown of the system.
MAN-00625
2-7
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Emergency Off Switches
4.0
Emergency Off Switches
There are three Emergency Off switches on the Selenia, one on either side of the Gantry and
one on the AWS. Do not use the Emergency Off switches for routinely turning off the Selenia.
They only affect the Gantry and should be used only in an emergency.
4.1
Using the Switch
1. Press any Emergency Off switch. The power to the Gantry is immediately removed.
2. If the emergency occurred during a Patient Exam and the patient is compressed, use the
handwheels to manually release the patient.
Figure 2-13: Location of Emergency Off Switches
2-8
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Emergency Off Switches
4.2
Restarting the System After Activating the Emergency Off Switch:
1. Turn the Emergency Off switch one-quarter turn to reset it.
2. When the Power Panel dialog box displays, Communication with the generator is lost.
examine the Emergency Off Switches and the circuit breaker.
3. Click Cancel if the Gantry is already on.
4. If the Gantry is off, and the Emergency Off Switches and the circuit breaker are set
correctly, click OK to restart the Gantry.
5. Click OK again when the Link established with generator dialog box appears.
If the dialog box reappears:
1. Observe the status of the Gantry before responding to the Power Panel dialog box.
2. If the Gantry displays are On, click Cancel.
3. If they are Off, click OK.
4. After you click OK, a new dialog box, “Waiting for link to be established with
generator,” is displayed.
Caution:
Do Not attempt to close this dialog box.
Figure 2-14: Waiting for Link
5. Once a link is established, the message changes to “Link established with generator” and
an OK button is enabled.
Figure 2-15: Link Established
6. Select OK as soon as this is enabled.
Note…
It may be necessary to click Reset Generator after clicking OK if the
Generator Problem message isn’t cleared.
If the dialog box continues to reappear, shut down the AWS following the “Shutdown
Procedures” on p. 2-7. After waiting a minimum of four minutes, press the On button to
restart the unit.
MAN-00625
2-9
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 2—Startup and Shutdown Procedures
Emergency Off Switches
2-10
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Introduction
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
1.0
Introduction
System controls and indicators are
placed into two main groups.
Legend for Figure 3-1
1.
2.
AWS controls.
Tubestand controls, including control
points on the Gantry and the C-arm.
Figure 3-1: System Controls
2.0
Acquisition Workstation Controls and Display
Legend for Figure 3-3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Emergency Off Switch
Circuit Breaker
Selenia Display
Selenia Trackball
CD-RW Drive
Selenia Keyboard
Selenia Power On Button
Figure 3-2: The Selenia Controls
MAN-00625
3-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
TechMate Controls and Display
3.0
TechMate Controls and Display
Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Display
Keyboard
Trackball
Power Button for TechMate
Reset for TechMate UPS
Figure 3-3: TechMate Controls
3-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
TechMate Controls and Display
3.1
AWS Keypads
Keypads provide Power On, X-ray, and Compression Release functions.
Figure 3-4: Location of AWS Controls
Legend for Figure 3-4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.2
On button.
On indicator light.
X-ray Indicator lights on both panels.
X-ray buttons on both panels, one on each side of the keyboard. Press them both simultaneously to
begin an X-ray exposure and hold for the duration of the tone.
Compression Release button.
Keyboard and Trackball
The Selenia AWS has a standard keyboard and two sets of function keys. Use the keyboard
for entering Patient data and other general information.
Figure 3-5: Selenia Keyboard
Legend for Figure 3-5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
MAN-00625
Selenia Function keys
Trackball
Additional Function keys (future use)
Standard keyboard keys
Standard arrow keys
Standard number keypad
3-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
4.0
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
4.1
Keyboard and Screen Controls
Use the trackball or the function keys to change Exposure techniques.
Figure 3-6: Setting Exposure Techniques Using the Trackball
Figure 3-7: Selenia Function Keys on the Keyboard
Table 3-1: Selenia Function Keys
Key
Name
Function
Exposure Mode
Toggles through AEC, TEC, Manual
Filter;
Toggles between Mo or Rh
kV Up
Increases kV
kV Down
Decreases kV
mAs Up
Increases mAs
mAs Down
Decreases mAs
Grid
Toggles Grid Position (In or Out),
retracts/engages the grid
Focal Spot
Toggles between Small or Large
Breast Density
Toggles through TEC Breast Density settings
AEC position
Moves the AEC Sensor position
New Entry
Opens New Entry (Patient, Sequence, View, etc.)
Close Procedure Closes the Procedure.
3-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
4.2
Emergency Off Switches
Location of Emergency Off Switches
Description
There are three Emergency Off
switches on the Selenia, one
on each side of the Gantry and
one on the AWS.
Press any of the Emergency
Off switches to immediately
remove power to the gantry.
Turn the Emergency Off switch
one-quarter turn to reset the
switch.
To restart the system after
using an Emergency Off
switch, refer to Chapter 2,
Section 4.0, p. 2-8
Figure 3-8: Emergency Off Switches
4.3
The Flat Screen Display
Press the Power button, On-Screen
Display-control dial, to turn on the display.
Green indicator light shows power is on.
Control Dial
To turn the display off, press and hold the
button for at least 1 second until the LED is
off.
To adjust the Tilt viewing angle, grasp the
top of the display and gently push or pull.
Note…
MAN-00625
Figure 3-9: Flat Screen Display
The Display auto-adjusts with initial use. Hologic recommends using the
auto-adjustment feature. The Control Dial can also be used to activate an
on-screen menu, which allows you to perform additional adjustments if
necessary. Refer to Chapter 6, Section 2.1, p. 6-1.
3-5
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
4.4
Gantry Controls and Displays
1. C-arm Rotation Angle displays on either side of the
Gantry show the C-arm angle.
2. Emergency Off Switches, located on each side of the
Gantry, immediately remove power from the Tubestand.
3. The Input Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the
Gantry provides overload protection.
4. Dual-Function Footswitches activate C-arm and
Compression Device movement.
3-6
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
4.5
C-arm Controls and Displays
C-arm controls are located on the Tubehead, the
Compression Device, the rear of the C-arm Side
Rails, and the rear of the Image Receptor Support
Device.
1. Tubehead Controls
2. Compression Device
3. Rear of the C-arm Side Rails
4. Rear of the Image Receptor
Tubehead Controls, located on either side of the
X-ray tube side covers, provide Collimator Override,
C-arm Rotation, and Light Field functions.
The Compression Device houses the AEC Sensor
position controls and displays: AEC Sensor position,
compressed breast thickness, and force. Handwheels
allow manual compression control for patient
positioning and applying final compression force.
The rear edges of the C-arm Side Rail house recessed
push-button controls for motorized compression and
C-arm movement. An additional C-arm Rotation
button is available on the rear of the Image Receptor.
MAN-00625
3-7
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
4.5.1
Compression Device Controls and Displays
Legend for Figure 3-10
6.
7.
4.6
C
E N
A TIO
I
S
5.
Compression Handwheels.
AEC Sensor Position Controls.
AEC Sensor Position Display.
Compression Force Display shows
the compression force through the
range of 10 lb to 67.4 lb (44.5 N to
300 N) in 1 lb (4.4 N) increments.
Compression Thickness Display
shows the thickness between 0 and
15 cm above the image receptor in
0.1 cm increments.
Compression Paddle Sensor
Receptacle.
Compression Paddle Docking
Sleeves.
O
P
1.
2.
3.
4.
AUTO
1
3
5
AEC
7
/L
TONS
NEW
BS
CM
Figure 3-10: Compression Device
Dual Function Footswitches
The system incorporates two
footswitches for C-arm and
Compression Up/Down movement.
Using the Footswitch:
1. Press the footswitch to activate.
2. Release the switch to stop
motorized movement.
Locate the footswitches for easy access
from either side of the C-arm.
Legend for Figure 3-11
1.
2.
3.
4.
C-arm Down
C-arm Up
Compression Down
Compression Up
Warning:
3-8
Figure 3-11: The Dual Function Footswitch
Always position the footswitches so as to eliminate accidental
activation by patient, operators, or wheelchairs.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
4.7
Selenia Controls and Functional Tests
After the system is started, test the C-arm, Tubehead, and Footswitch functions to ensure
mechanical integrity.
Table 3-2: Functional Tests of System Controls
Function
Control Location and Appearance
Compression Down
Description/Functional Test
Pressing a Compression Down button:
•
Engages the compression brake.
•
Turns on the light field lamp.
•
Lowers the compression device.
Note… Once activated, the compression
brake remains engaged until compression
release is pressed.
Compression down movement stops:
C-ARM
•
Upon release of the button.
•
At the compression down force limit.
•
At the lower compression travel limit.
Confirm the buttons function correctly.
Compression Up
Pressing a Compression Up button:
•
Raises the compression device.
•
Does not release or activate the
compression brake.
Motorized compression up movement
automatically stops:
•
Upon release of the button.
•
Upon reaching the upper
compression travel limit.
•
Confirm the buttons function
correctly.
COMPRE
SSION
Compression Release
Pressing the Compression Release button:
•
Releases the compression motor
brake.
•
Raises the compression device
approximately 10 cm
Confirm the buttons function correctly.
Note... The system disables all
compression release functions when a
localization paddle is installed (including
automatic compression release, if
enabled.) Patient release is available
through the compression up functions.
MAN-00625
3-9
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
Table 3-2: Functional Tests of System Controls (Continued)
Function
Counterclockwise
C-arm Rotation
Control Location and Appearance
Description/Functional Test
Pressing this button initializes motorized
counterclockwise C-arm rotation.
C-arm movement is disabled when
compression force of 58 N (13 lb) or
greater is applied.
Confirm the C-arm Angle Rotation
Displays on the Gantry reflect the
changes in rotation.
Rotating the C-arm counterclockwise
changes the display to a more negative
reading.
Clockwise C-arm
Rotation
Pressing this button initializes motorized
clockwise C-arm rotation.
C-arm movement is disabled when
compression force of 58 N (13 lb) or
greater is applied.
Confirm the C-arm Angle Rotation
Displays on the Gantry reflect the
changes in rotation.
Rotating the C-arm clockwise changes the
display to a more positive reading.
3-10
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
Table 3-2: Functional Tests of System Controls (Continued)
Function
Control Location and Appearance
C-arm Up
Description/Functional Test
Pressing this button moves the C-Arm up.
Motorized C-arm movement
automatically stops upon release of the
button or upon reaching the upper C-arm
travel limit.
C-arm movement is disabled when
compression force of 58 N (13 lb) or
greater is applied.
Confirm the buttons function correctly.
RM
C-AR
C-arm Down
Pressing this button moves the C-Arm
down. Motorized C-arm movement
automatically stops upon release of the
button or upon reaching the lower C-arm
travel limit.
C-arm movement is disabled when
compression force of 58 N (13 lb) or
greater is applied.
Confirm the buttons function correctly.
C-ARM
MAN-00625
COMPRE
SSION
3-11
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
Table 3-2: Functional Tests of System Controls (Continued)
Function
Collimator Override
Control Location and Appearance
Description/Functional Test
The Collimator Override button allows
the collimator to cycle through the
available calibrated X-ray fields.
Choice of the collimator mode,
Automatic or Manual, is made in
Edit>Standard Setup.
Confirm the buttons function correctly
(press the light field lamp button to
visualize the X-ray field, and then press
the Collimator Override button).
The collimator device moves to another
field size and the light field size changes.
Light Field Lamp
Pressing the light field lamp button turns
on the light field lamp for approximately
30 seconds, permitting you to visualize
the X-ray field.
The light field lamp automatically turns
on whenever a Compression Down
button is activated.
Confirm the buttons function correctly.
3-12
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
Table 3-2: Functional Tests of System Controls (Continued)
Function
Smart Paddle
System
Control Location and Appearance
Description/Functional Test
Smart Paddles incorporate a mechanical
function that permits the paddle to shift
~2.5 cm into a left, center, or right
position. While compression is applied,
the paddle cannot be unlocked. The
collimator is programmed to follow the
position of the Smart Paddles.
To test this functionality:
1. Install any Smart Paddle into the
compression device.
2. Shift the paddle into one of the detent
positions.
To change the position of a Smart Paddle:
1. Rotate and hold the knob on the side
of the paddle.
2. Move the paddle into the correct
position.
3. Release the knob to lock the paddle
in place.
4. Turn on the light field lamp. Confirm
that the collimator position matches
the paddle position.
5. Repeat this procedure for the other
two paddle positions.
AEC
Position
Change the AEC Position by pressing one
of the arrows on the compression device
top.
(You can also change it at the AWS.)
To test this functionality:
1. Select an AEC mode using the AWS.
2. Change the AEC position using the
arrow buttons on the device and the
AWS display.
3. Confirm the position indicator on the
side of the device and on the AWS
display matches the current position.
4. Move the AEC position beyond #7 or
#1. Confirm the Auto position
indicator on the compression device
is illuminated and the AWS display
indicates Auto.
MAN-00625
3-13
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 3—System Controls, Indicators, and Tests
Controls, Displays, and Functional Tests
3-14
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Introduction
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
1.0
Introduction
This chapter provides maintenance information and instructions for the AWS, including:
MAN-00625
•
Component identification
•
Removing covers and panels
•
Preventive maintenance procedures
•
How to access the System Log files
•
Component replacement procedures
4-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Introduction
1.1
Component Identification
AWS Components—Front View
Legend for Figure 4-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
TechMate Display
Radiation Shield
Selenia Display
Selenia Trackball
CD-RW Drive
Cooling Fan
Selenia Keyboard
TechMate Computer and UPS
(not shown, located behind cover)
9. Barcode reader
10. Storage Shelf
11. TechMate Trackball
12. TechMate Keyboard
Figure 4-1: AWS Components—Front View
Legend for Figure 4-2
1. Selenia Trackball
2. Right LED Board (X-ray LED board)
3. Selenia Keyboard
4. Left LED Board (X-ray LED board)
5. TechMate Trackball
6. TechMate Keyboard
7. Circuit Breaker
8. Cooling Fans (4)
9. Rear Cover Handles
10. Selenia UPS Reset
Figure 4-2: AWS Components—Top/Rear View
4-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Accessing Internal Components—Selenia AWS
2.0
Accessing Internal Components—Selenia AWS
2.1
Rear Cover Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Shut the system down.
Remove the two rear cover screws. See Figure 4-3.
Grasp the handles on each side of the cover.
Slide the cover upwards, then pull backwards to remove the cover.
Disconnect the cooling fan harness.
Legend for Figure 4-3
1.
2.
3.
Rear Cover
Rear Cover Mounting Screws (two)
Rear Cover Handles
(two, only one shown)
Figure 4-3: AWS Covers Removal
MAN-00625
4-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Accessing Internal Components—Selenia AWS
2.2
Internal Components
To access internal components or wiring inside the AWS; see Figure 4-4.
Legend for Figure 4-4
1. Selenia Trackball
2. Right LED Board (X-ray LED board)
3. Selenia Keyboard
4. Left LED Board (X-ray LED board)
5. TechMate Trackball
6. TechMate Keyboard
7. AWS Cooling Fans
8. Circuit Breaker
9. Barcode Reader Power Supply
10. Display Power Supply
11. Computer
12. Uninterruptible Power Supply
(behind computer)
13. Power Distribution Assembly (PDA)
14. Low Voltage Power Supply
15. Power Control Board
Figure 4-4: Internal Components
4-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Accessing Internal Components—TechMate
3.0
Accessing Internal Components—TechMate
3.1
Front Cover Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shut down the system.
Remove the two front cover screws. See Figure 4-6.
Grasp the handles on each side of the cover.
Slide the cover upwards, then pull backwards to remove the cover.
5. Disconnect the cooling fan and power button cables from the TechMate computer.
Figure 4-5: TechMate Computer
Rear Panel
Legend for Figure 4-5
1. Power Button Cable
2. Fan Power Cable
3. Computer Rear Panel
4. Trackball Cable
5. Keyboard Cable
6. Display Cable
7. To UPS “Data Port”
8. Dongle
9. Network Cable
10. AC Power (from UPS) Cable
Figure 4-6: TechMate Internal Components
Legend for Figure 4-6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
MAN-00625
AWS Front Cover
Cover Screws (one each side)
TechMate Computer
TechMate Computer Rear Panel
TechMate UPS
Cooling Fan Power and Power Button Cables
4-5
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Procedures
4.0
Preventive Maintenance Procedures
The tools and materials required for performing preventive maintenance on Selenia are:
•
•
•
Standard hand tools •
Lint Free Cloths
•
Brush
CRT Wipes
Small Vacuum Cleaner
Table 4-1: AWS Recommended Preventive Maintenance Procedures
Freq
Procedure
Refer To
Performer
S
AWS—Clean and Inspect
Section 4.1, p. 4-6
Service Eng
Backup the AWS Computer
Section 10.0, p. 4-14 Service Eng
Empty the Reject Bin
Administrator’s Guide Service Eng
A Inspect/Replace UPS Battery in AWS
Section 23.2, p. 4-26 Service Eng
Recommended frequency of performance: A = Annual S = Semi-Annual
4.1
AWS — Clean and Inspect
The following procedures should be performed to maintain the Selenia AWS in optimum
working condition. The recommended frequency is semi-annual maintenance by a qualified
service engineer. If necessary, revise the care and cleaning cycle as conditions and use
dictate.
4.1.1
Cabinet Cleaning
1. Turn system off.
2. Remove the Workstation rear cover. For Selenia, refer to Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
3. Remove the front cover of the TechMate.
4. Inspect the chassis for loose or missing hardware.
5. Inspect the cables for signs of wear such as crimps, breaks, and frays.
6. Use the vacuum cleaner to remove dust from inside the chassis, cooling fans,
and air intakes on each computer (Selenia and TechMate).
4.1.2
Keyboard Cleaning
1. Use the vacuum cleaner to clean any dust or debris from the keyboard.
2. Wipe clean the keyboard and keys using a standard CRT wipe.
Caution:
4.1.3
Do not use liquid or spray detergents to clean the keyboard. Do not
remove the rear cover of the keyboard to expose the internal circuit board.
Trackball Cleaning
Using a CRT wipe, clean the ball and surfaces.
4.1.4
Acquisition Workstation Display
Avoid touching the display screen. To clean the display screen protective panel, use
a soft cloth that has been dampened with warm water. Do not use anything with
alcohol in it, as over time, this can create fogging of the acrylic protective panel.
4-6
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Procedures
4.1.5
TechMate Display—Nio Barco Display
Precautions:
•
Take care not to damage or scratch the panel
•
Do not apply pressure on the panel
•
Do not apply or spray liquid directly to the panel or cabinet as excess liquid
may cause damage to internal electronics.
•
Do Not Use:
Strong alkalis lye
Acid
Detergents with fluoride
Detergents with ammonia
Detergents with abrasives
Steel wool
Sponge with abrasives
Cloth with thread made of steel
Other coarse tools
Panel
The manufacturer recommends to let the cleaning procedure be done in a Barco
service center. If not, it must be performed in a clean and dust-free environment.
1. If there are dust particles on the LCD panel, blow them away by using a dust
remover. (For example, DUST OFF 67 KONTAKT Chemie). A dust remover is
composed of a blend of compressed liquid gases functioning as propellant.
They provide a jet of dry inert gas that acts like compressed air for a quick and
safe removal of dust particles and other contaminants on the surface of the LCD
panel or the glass panel.
Attention: the dust remover contains a liquid gas. If you shake the can or move
the can too fast while spraying, you may blow drops of liquid on the panel
surface! If this is the case, clean the panel as described below.
2. If the LCD panel is dirty or wet, take a lint-free nonabrasive cloth and lightly
moisten the cloth with t solution of 25% Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) and 75% deionized or distilled water. For example, Cleareen, a product of Certified
Laboratories.
3. Gently clean the panel with the moist cloth.
4. Take another clean, dry, soft, lint-free cloth and gently wipe the glass dry.
Cabinet
1. Clean the cabinet using a recognized cleaning product for medical equipment.
The cloth you use must be moist, not wet!
2. Repeat the water only and wipe dry with a dry cloth.
3. The cabinet has been tested for resistance to the following products: Cidex,
Betadine, Alcohol (Isopropyl and Ethyl), Ammonia-based cleaners (Windex) and
Aquasonic Gel.
MAN-00625
4-7
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Display Maintenance
5.0
Display Maintenance
5.1
Selenia Display Replacement
VGA cable
Cover
Display
screws (4)
Power
supply
cable
Cable clamp
Figure 4-7: Removing the Display
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Shut down the system.
Remove the cable cover from the rear of the Display; see Figure 4-7.
Disconnect the power supply and VGA cables.
Remove the cable clamp.
Remove the Display by removing the four Display screws from the Display Bracket.
Install the new Display to the Display Bracket using the previously removed hardware.
6. Reconnect the VGA and power supply cables.
7. Reinstall the cable clamp.
8. Install the cable cover, carefully positioning the VGA cable so the cover closes easily. Be
sure the cover lock engages.
9. Start the system.
Control Dial
10. Push in the Control Dial, located behind the
LED power indicator on the lower right side
corner, to turn on the Display.
Figure 4-8: Flat Screen Display
4-8
Note…
The Display auto-adjusts with initial use. Hologic recommends using the
auto-adjustment feature. The Control Dial can also be used to activate an
on-screen menu, which allows you to perform additional adjustments if
necessary. Refer to Chapter 6, Section 2.1, p. 6-1.
Caution:
Do not make any brightness and/or contrast adjustments to the display
unless the SMPTE test pattern is on the screen.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Display Maintenance
5.2
TechMate Display Replacement
1. Ensure that the TechMate computer is off.
2. Remove the cover (not shown) from the Display’s right rear compartment to provide
access to the connectors.
3. Note the position of the cables, then disconnect the display power and DVI connectors.
4. Untie the reusable tie wrap (black), and remove the complete harness.
5. Remove the Display.
6. Install the new Display.
7. Reconnect the DVI and power cable.
8. Position the cables as they were originally so the cover may be easily closed.
9. Reinstall the cover on the Display’s rear compartment.
10. Refer to the TechMate manual to calibrate the display if necessary.
Legend for Figure 4-9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Display Power cable
DVI Cable
Service loop for trackball and
keyboard cables
Spiral Wrap
Cable Clamp
Figure 4-9: TechMate Display Connections
MAN-00625
4-9
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Trackball Replacement
6.0
Trackball Replacement
Note…
The Computer does not start up without the trackball installed.
In most cases, the Display Swing Arm must be removed to access and
replace the Selenia Trackball.
6.1
Selenia
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the AWS rear cover; see Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
3. At the top of the Ultra™ 45 computer, disconnect the trackball cable.
4. Cut cable ties securing the trackball cable to the inside of the AWS.
5. To remove the swing-arm, refer to Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration.
Lay it on a clean padded work area on top of the AWS providing access to the under-side
of the swing-arm.
6. The Trackball cable is mounted under the base with double-sided tape. Free the cable
from the tape.
7. Remove the Trackball cable through the access hole on the top of the AWS.
8. When re-installing, on the bottom of the trackball, verify the DIP switch positions 2, 4, 6,
and 8 are On.
9. Reverse the procedure to install.
6.2
TechMate
1. Shut down the TechMate computer and Display.
2. Remove the AWS front cover.
3. Disconnect the trackball
cable, #1, and the keyboard
cable, #2. See Figure 9.
4. Cut the cable ties, #3.
5. Remove the spiral wrap.
6. Replace the trackball.
7. Dress the display, trackball,
and keyboard cables;
replace the spiral wrap as
shown and maintain the
service loops as shown in
Figure 4-9, p. 4-9.
Figure 4-10: Cable Connections and Routing
8. Reconnect the display,
trackball, and keyboard
cables to the computer.
9. Replace any cable ties that you removed.
4-10
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Keyboard Replacement
7.0
Keyboard Replacement
7.1
Selenia
1. Turn the Selenia system off.
2. Working under the keyboard ledge, remove the three screws securing the keyboard to
the center front edge of the AWS work surface.
3. Remove the AWS rear cover. See Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
4. At the top of the Ultra 45 computer, disconnect the keyboard cable.
5. Removing cable ties as necessary, remove the keyboard cable through the keyboard
access slot. Remove the keyboard.
6. Reverse procedures to install the replacement keyboard.
7.2
TechMate
1. Shut down the TechMate computer and Display.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
MAN-00625
Remove the AWS front cover.
Disconnect the trackball
cable, #1, and the keyboard
cable, #2. See Figure 4-11.
Cut the cable ties, #3.
Remove the spiral wrap.
Replace the keyboard.
Dress the display, trackball,
and keyboard cables;
replace the spiral wrap as
shown and maintain the
service loops as shown in
Figure 4-9, p. 4-9.
Figure 4-11: Cable Connections and Routing
Reconnect the display,
trackball and keyboard
cables to the computer.
Replace any cable ties that you removed.
4-11
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Compact Disk Drive and Storage Shelf Replacement
8.0
Compact Disk Drive and Storage Shelf Replacement
Figure 4-12: Shelf and CD-ROM Holder
8.1
Storage Shelf Replacement
Refer to Figure 4-12 when performing this procedure.
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove any items currently stored in the Storage Shelf.
3. Remove the AWS rear cover. Refer to Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
4. From the back of the unit, remove the screw holding the shelf to the AWS.
5. Remove, from the bottom left side of the shelf, the three screws that secure the holder to
the AWS.
6. Supporting the shelf, slide it forward and remove the Bar Code Reader cable from the
notch in the shelf.
7. With a 5/16 driver, remove the hex nut holding the Bar Code Reader cable. Remove the
cable from the shelf housing.
8. Reverse procedures to install the storage shelf.
4-12
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Bar Code Reader Replacement
8.2
Compact Disk Drive Replacement
1. Turn system off.
2. Remove the rear cover. See Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
3. From the back of the unit, remove the screw holding the CD-ROM holder. See Figure
4-12, p. 4-12.
4. Remove, from the bottom right side of the CD-ROM holder, the three screws that secure
the holder to the AWS. See Figure 4-12.
5. Supporting the holder, slide it out to access the cables on the rear of the CD-ROM.
6. Disconnect the cables from the CD-ROM.
7. Access the three screws securing the CD-RW Drive mounting plate to the bottom of the
CD-ROM Holder. Remove the screws.
8. Slide the CD-RW Drive back until the latch on the mounting plate is clear. Remove the
drive from the mounting plate.
9. Reverse procedures to install the CD-RW Drive.
9.0
Bar Code Reader Replacement
9.1
Bar Code Reader
1. Remove the AWS rear cover; see Section 2.1, p. 4-3
2. Remove the storage shelf. See Section 8.1, p. 4-12.
3. Remove the power supply from the bar code reader cable. See Figure 4-4, p. 4-4.
4. Unscrew the two screws that hold the bar code reader connector to the harness.
5. Remove the bar code reader and cable through the hole.
6. Reverse procedures to install the bar code reader.
7. Turn system on.
9.2
Bar Code Reader Power Supply
1. Remove the AWS rear cover.
2. Disconnect the bar code reader power supply cable from serial connector J50. See
Figure 4-4, p. 4-4. Remove tie-wraps as necessary.
3. Remove the three screws securing the bar code reader power supply mounting bracket
to the computer mounting panel.
4. Remove the power supply.
5. Reverse procedures to install the bar code reader power supply.
6. Replace any tie-wraps you removed.
MAN-00625
4-13
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
AWS Computer Replacement
10.0 AWS Computer Replacement
10.1
Back up Configuration
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Login as apps, minimize application and maximize Netscape as necessary.
Select Service Tools in Netscape.
Under Maintenance column, click the Backups link.
Click on the Backup DROC link.
Select Standard Backups + Logos from dropdown menu.
6. Click on Start Backup button and type the password if prompted. File will be saved
under /linx_mp/backups directory on the Selenia, where filename is
MonthDateTime.mpb:
•
MMDDTTTTTT.mpb
7. Click on Service Tools link on the top to go back.
10.2
Back up the Calibration and Map Files
1. Log in as apps (if not already logged in).
2. Insert CD1 into the CD-RW drive. Wait for the read light to stay on.
3.
4.
5.
6.
10.3
Type in a Terminal window su dr and press Return.
Enter password when prompted.
Type in a Terminal window cd /cdrom/cdrom1/5.10 and press Return.
Type in a Terminal window ./usave then press Return.
Create getinfo.html
1. From Terminal Window, type cd<space>/opt/users/dr
2. Type getinfo.pl
3. Follow the on screen instructions:
a. Find the Selenia Serial Number
b. Find the Brick Serial Number
c. From the Application, Info, About Acquisition Station
4. The script will prompt you to place a cd in CDRW. Ignore this step and close the
Terminal Window.
5. Follow the on-screen directions to allow the system to collect system information. Be
sure to click Binary Checksum and Resource Checksum before closing.
6. At the prompt that asks you to insert a blank CD to write the system information in
HTML format, press N. The getinfo file will be written to:
<linx_mp/backups/save/getinfo . . . . .html>
10.4
Capture the calibration data on the Host Microprocessor board
1. Connect the adapter cable (1-040-0812) from Host Microprocessor board KJ26 to the
serial port of your laptop.
2. Launch HyperTerminal.
4-14
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
AWS Computer Replacement
Figure 4-13: HyperTerminal Connection
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter Selenia for the new connection.
Select any icon.
Click OK.
Set Connect using by clicking the drop down arrow to the Com Port that the adapter
cable is connected to:
•
COM1 or COM3
7. Click OK.
8. Change the Serial port settings to:
•
Bits per second : 9600
•
Data bits : 8
•
Parity : None
•
Stop bits : 1
•
Flow Control : None
9. Click Apply.
10. Click OK.
11. From Transfer, Capture Text.
12. Enter the filename of the text file that you wish the log to be written to. (Pay attention to
what folder you are in.)
•
For Example: test.txt
13. Click Start.
14. On the host microprocessor board, set Rotary S4 to Position 0.
15. Display should read 28kV, Man, Auto etc.
16. Set DIP switch S6-1 On, S6-2 On. All others Off.
17. Press S1 to download calibration data. The data will download 1 page at a time.
Continually press S1 until all pages are shown on the screen.
MAN-00625
4-15
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
AWS Computer Replacement
18. Cal Data Download Complete displays:
a.
19 pages for V 2.6.2.
b. 20 pages for V 3.2.2 and above.
19. When complete: Transfer, Capture Text, STOP.
10.5
Burn a CD with the backup files
1. Create a folder on your laptop to move the backups to. This will be your backup folder.
2. FTP the files to your service laptop.
3. Navigate the remote site window pane to /linx_mp/backups on the Selenia.
4. Navigate the local site window pane to your backup folder on your laptop.
5. Select the *.mpb files and the "save" folder.
6. Click "←" to transfer the files and folder to your laptop.
7. Verify that all files have moved.
8. Copy to the backup folder the host microprocessor cal data text file from the directory
used in Step 12 of the previous section.
9. Burn contents of your backup folder to CD.
10. Label the CD, to include from the Application, Info/ About Acquisition Station:
•
4-16
Date of backup.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
AWS Computer Replacement
10.6
Ultra 45™ Computer Replacement
Note…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After you install a replacement computer, to reconfigure the system, refer to
“Chapter 6—Configuring the Components” in the Installation Manual.
Shut the system down.
Remove the rear cover from the workstation, Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
Disconnect all cables from the rear panel (top) of the computer. Note their location.
Remove the two screws from each side of the support bracket.
Disconnect the ground strap from the computer.
Warning:
Two people are needed to safely perform steps 6, 7, and 8.
6. Lift the computer slightly up to free it from the shelf.
7. Remove the computer from the AWS and set it aside.
8. Install the replacement computer on the shelf and reattach the support bracket.
9. Reconnect the ground strap.
10. Reconnect the cables to the computer.
Legend for Figure 4-14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rear Panel
Support Bracket
Screws (2 each side)
Ground Strap
Shelf
Figure 4-14: AWS Computer
10.7
Reinstall Backup Files
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
10.8
Connect the laptop to the computer using a crossover cable.
FTP the backup files to the new computer to the directory linx_mp/backups.
Launch the Netscape Service Tools.
Under the Maintenance column, click Backups.
Click on Restore DROC.
Select the backup from the list.
Click Start Restore. Ignore the warning about it being a backup from an earlier version.
Verify System Operation
1. Turn system on.
2. Confirm system boots up and application loads correctly.
3. Perform the “Standard System Test” on p. 7-1 before returning the unit to service.
MAN-00625
4-17
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
TechMate Computer Replacement
11.0 TechMate Computer Replacement
1. Ensure that the TechMate Computer and Display are off.
2. Remove the front cover from the workstation. See Figure 4-6, p. 4-5.
3. Remove all cables from the computer and note their location. See Figure 4-15.
Legend for Figure 4-15
1. Power Button Cable
2. Fan Power Cable
3. Computer Rear Panel
4. Trackball Cable
5. Keyboard Cable
6. Display Cable
7. To UPS “Data Port”
8. Dongle
9. Network Cable
10. AC Power (from UPS) Cable
Figure 4-15: TechMate Rear Panel and Cable Routing
4. Remove the six captive nuts
from both sides of the
computer’s flanges. See
Figure 4-16.
5. Slide the computer off of the
studs.
6. Reverse the procedures to
install the computer.
7. Refer to the SecurViewRT
Installation Manual and
User/Administrator Guide for
procedures to configure and
restore the Technologist
Workstation.
Figure 4-16: TechMate Computer Removal
4-18
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Radiation Shield Replacement
12.0 Radiation Shield Replacement
Legend for Figure 4-17
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Radiation Shield
Support Shelf
Front Shield Support
Protective Plate (two)
Bolts and Lock
washers (four)
Figure 4-17: Radiation Shield
Warning:
The Radiation Shield is tempered glass and may shatter if dropped
or overstressed.
8. Remove the AWS rear cover. See Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
9. Remove the four bolts securing the two protective plates and the radiation shield to the
AWS rear frame.
10. Lift the radiation shield up off the support shelf and the front shield support high enough
to clear the circuit breaker.
11. Reverse the procedures to install the radiation shield. Ensure the logo faces to the front of
the AWS. Do not over tighten the bolts.
,
MAN-00625
4-19
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Power Distribution Assembly Replacement
13.0 Power Distribution Assembly Replacement
1. Shut down the system.
2. Unplug the AWS.
3. Remove the AWS rear cover, refer to Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
4. Turn off the UPS.
5. Remove the Selenia computer. Refer to Section 10.6, p. 4-17.
Legend for Figure 4-18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
TB1 Terminal Block
Power to TechMate UPS
Line Filter
Power Distribution Board
Power to Selenia UPS
Ground Post
P1 and P2, Gantry Power and Data
F1 and F2, Brick Power
AC Input
Figure 4-18: Power Distribution Assembly
6. Unplug the power cables from P1 and P2, and remove P1 and P2, leaving them attached
to the wire harness. They will be reinstalled on the new assembly.
7. Remove five bolts (three in the front, two in the rear) securing the Power Distribution
Assembly mounting bracket to the base of the AWS.
8. Pull the unit forward until you can get to the wires in the back.
9. Remove wires carefully, noting locations.
10. Pull unit out of cabinet.
11. Reverse the procedures to install the replacement Power Distribution Assembly
13.1
Power Distribution Fuses
There are two fuses for the Brick Power, F1 and F2. See Figure 4-18.
1. Shut down the system.
2. Remove the AWS rear cover.
3. Twist out and replace both fuses (F1 and F2) located on the Power Distribution
Assembly.
4. Reinstall the AWS rear cover.
4-20
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Power Distribution Board Replacement
14.0 Power Distribution Board Replacement
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the AWS rear cover.
3. Turn off the Selenia UPS. See Chapter
2, Section 2.2.2, p. 2-2.
4. Remove the Selenia computer. See
Section 10.6, p. 4-17.
5. Disconnect the cables and connectors
from the Power Distribution board (#1);
note locations.
6. Using needle-nose pliers, pinch the
nylon standoffs, and carefully pull the
board off the standoffs.
7. Reverse the procedures to install the
Power Distribution board.
Figure 4-19: AC Power Distribution Board
Note…
If replacing a bad fuse (#2) on the Power Distribution board, perform Steps 1
through 4. It is not necessary to completely remove the board to replace a fuse.
Refer to Table B-67 on p. B-38 for a list of the fuses on this board.
15.0 Power Control Board Replacement
1. Shut down the system.
2. Remove the AWS rear cover.
3. Turn off the Selenia UPS. See Chapter 2, Section 2.2.2, p. 2-2.
4. Disconnect the cables and connectors from the AWS Power Control board; note
locations. See Figure 4-4, p. 4-4.
5. Pull the board off the plastic standoffs.
6. Reverse the procedures to install the AWS Power Control board.
16.0 Low Voltage Power Supply Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shut the system down.
Remove the AWS rear cover.
Turn the UPS off.
Disconnect cables and connectors from the Low Voltage Power Supply; See Section 2.2,
p. 4-4.
5. Remove four screws securing the power supply to the standoffs. Remove the power
supply.
6. Reverse the procedures to install the Low Voltage Power Supply.
MAN-00625
4-21
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Right X-ray LED Board Replacement
17.0 Right X-ray LED Board Replacement
1. Turn system off
2. Remove the AWS rear cover, refer to Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
3. Remove the CD-ROM Holder, and disconnect the cables from the CD-ROM. See
Section 8.2, p. 4-13.
4. Disconnect the cables and connectors from the Right LED board; note locations.
5. Remove two screws securing the board to standoffs. Remove board.
6. Reverse the procedures to install the Right LED board.
18.0 Left X-ray LED Board Replacement
1. Turn system off
2. Remove the AWS rear cover, refer to Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
3. Remove the storage shelf and bar code cables from the shelf. See Section 8.0, p. 4-12.
Set aside.
4. Disconnect the cables and connectors from the Left LED board; note locations.
5. Remove two screws securing the board to standoffs. Remove board.
6. Reverse the procedures to install the Left LED board.
19.0 AWS Display Power Supply Replacement
1. Turn system off.
2. Remove the AWS rear cover, refer to Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
3. At the Display Power Supply, disconnect the connector.
4. Remove the four nuts securing the power supply mounting bracket to the computer
mounting plate. Remove the bracket and power supply.
5. Reverse the procedures to install the Display Power Supply. Dress cables as required.
4-22
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Cooling Fans Replacement
20.0 Cooling Fans Replacement
20.1
Selenia
The Selenia has four cooling fans installed on the upper inside of the AWS rear cover. See
Figure 4-3, p. 4-3 for location.
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the AWS rear cover.
3. Remove the wires from the fan to be replaced; note locations.
4. Remove the four nuts securing the fan mounting plate and set aside.
5. Remove old fan from mounting plate.
6. Secure the new fan to the mounting plate with original hardware.
7. Connect the wires on the replacement fan to the appropriate leads.
8. Secure mounting plate with original hardware.
9. Reinstall the rear cover, making sure fan power cable is connected.
10. Turn power on.
11. Ensure fans are operating.
20.2
TechMate
The TechMate has one cooling fan installed on the upper right inside of the AWS front cover.
See Figure 4-3, p. 4-3 for location.
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the AWS front cover.
3. Remove the wires from the fan to be replaced; note location.
4. Remove the four nuts securing the fan mounting plate and set aside.
5. Remove old fan from mounting plate.
6. Secure the new fan to the mounting plate with original hardware.
7. Connect the wires on the replacement fan to the appropriate leads.
8. Secure mounting plate with original hardware.
9. Reinstall the front cover, making sure fan power cable is connected.
10. Turn power on.
11. Ensure fan is operating.
21.0 Circuit Breaker Replacement
1. Ensure system is off and AWS is unplugged.
2. Remove the AWS rear cover; refer to Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
3. Turn off the UPS; refer to Section 23.1, p. 4-25.
Figure 4-20: AWS Circuit Breaker
MAN-00625
4-23
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
AWS Emergency Off Switch Replacement
4. Remove the four screws securing the circuit breaker mounting bracket to the rear of the
AWS. Refer to Figure 4-20 for location of circuit breaker.
5. Remove the four Quick Disconnect wires from the bottom of the circuit breaker, noting
their positions.
6. Remove the circuit breaker from its mounting bracket.
7. Reverse the procedures to install the circuit breaker.
22.0 AWS Emergency Off Switch Replacement
The AWS Emergency Off Switch is on top of the AWS near the top of the Selenia keyboard.It
is attached from underneath the AWS with one nut.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ensure system is off and AWS is unplugged.
Remove the AWS rear cover; refer to Section 2.1, p. 4-3.
Turn off the UPS; refer to Section 22.0, p. 4-24.
Remove the Selenia computer. See Section 10.0, p. 4-14.
Using a flashlight if necessary, from the rear of the AWS, locate the underside of the
switch.
6. Unscrew the nut that secures the switch to the AWS.
7. At the top of the workstation, pull the switch up to provide access to the two wire leads
on the switch.
8. Carefully remove the two leads and connect them to the new switch.
9. Insert the new switch into the AWS, and from underneath, re-connect and tighten the
nut.
10. Reinstall the computer.
11. Start the UPS and reinstall the AWS rear cover.
4-24
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Uninterruptible Power Supply Maintenance (UPS)
23.0 Uninterruptible Power Supply Maintenance (UPS)
23.1
Selenia UPS Replacement
Legend for Figure 4-21
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Power out to Brick and Gantry Control
UPS
AC Input Filter
Mounting Brackets
Input Power Receptacle
UPS power button
Figure 4-21: UPS Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ensure system is off and AWS is unplugged.
Remove the AWS rear cover and turn off the UPS.
Disconnect the cables from the rear panel of the UPS.
Disconnect the UPS from the Input Power Receptacle.
On both sides of the UPS, remove the screws that attach the UPS Mounting Brackets to
the AWS frame.
6. Remove the UPS from the AWS.
Note…
If you are only replacing the battery, go to Section 23.2, p. 4-26. You do not
need to remove the Mounting Brackets from the UPS
7. Remove the Mounting Bracket from each side of the UPS.
8. To install the replacement UPS, reverse these procedures.
MAN-00625
4-25
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Uninterruptible Power Supply Maintenance (UPS)
23.2
UPS Battery Replacement
The UPS batteries require recharging after an extended outage. Batteries age faster when put
into service often and when operated at elevated temperatures. If the battery is near the end
of its service life (2 years), consider replacing the battery even if the replace battery indicator
on the front of the UPS is not lit. The UPS charges its battery whenever it is connected to
utility power. The battery charges fully during the first eight hours of normal operation. Do
not expect full runtime during this initial charge period.
To replace the UPS battery with a new
battery:
1. Remove the UPS from the AWS. Refer
to Section 23.1.
2. Lay the UPS flat in a position where
you can access the front panel.
3. Unclip the small panel with the logo
on the front of the UPS.
4. Remove the two screws.
5. Remove the left-hand side of the front
panel by pulling it forward.
6. Disconnect the battery module by
pulling apart the two connectors. Do
not pull on the cables.
7. Remove the cover.
8. Gently pull out the battery by grasping
the plastic tab.
9. Reverse the previous steps to install the
new battery
10. Re-install the UPS by reversing the
procedures in Section 23.1.
4-26
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Uninterruptible Power Supply Maintenance (UPS)
23.3
TechMate UPS Replacement
Figure 4-22: TechMate UPS
1. Ensure that both the TechMate computer and display are off.
2. Remove the Workstation front cover. See Figure 4-6, p. 4-5.
3. Turn off the UPS. The UPS power button, Figure 4-22, #1, is on the UPS front panel,
which is on the left end of the UPS when viewed from the front of the AWS.
4. Disconnect the cables from the UPS. Note the position of the cables.
5. Remove the nut from the bracket that secures the UPS to the workstation.
6. Remove the bracket.
7. Remove the unit from the shelf.
8. Before installing the new UPS:
a.
Open the battery compartment in the new UPS.
b. Pull the battery about halfway out. Refer to Section 23.4, p. 4-28 for accessing the
battery. The UPS is shipped with the internal red battery wire disconnected.
9. Connect the red battery wire to the positive (+) battery terminal.
10. Push the battery all the way into the battery compartment, and reinstall the cover.
11. Install the new UPS in the workstation, and reconnect the cables to the UPS.
12. Allow the UPS to charge for eight hours prior to use.
MAN-00625
4-27
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Uninterruptible Power Supply Maintenance (UPS)
23.4
TechMate UPS Battery Replacement
The UPS battery requires recharging after an extended outage. Batteries age faster when put
into service often and when operated at elevated temperatures. If the battery is near the end
of its service life (3 to 6 years), consider replacing the battery even if the replace battery
indicator on the front of the UPS is not on. The UPS charges its battery whenever it is
connected to utility power. Prior to normal operation, charge the batteries for 8 hours. Do
not expect full runtime during this initial charge period.
To replace the UPS battery with a new battery:
1. Remove the UPS from the AWS. Refer to Section
23.3.
2. While viewing the UPS from the front, lay the UPS
on its left side. In the views shown, the front of the
UPS is to the left; The rear of the UPS is to the right.
3. Slide the battery compartment cover off of the UPS.
4. Grasp the tab attached to the battery and slide the
battery partially out of the case. Hold the battery
firmly and pull it straight out. The battery cables
should disconnect as the battery is pulled out.
5. Insert the new battery halfway into the UPS.
6. Connect the wires to the new battery as follows:
a. Red Wire—to red (positive) terminal, #1.
b. Black Wire—To black (negative) terminal, #2.
Note…
Small sparks at the battery terminals are normal during connection.
7. Carefully insert the battery fully into the UPS.
8. Slide the battery compartment cover back into
place.
9. Re-install the UPS by reversing the procedures in
Section 23.3.
4-28
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Fiber Optic Cable Replacement
24.0 Fiber Optic Cable Replacement
Locate the cable clamp at the rear of the AWS below the cover handle—an identical clamp is
located on the opposite side of the AWS. All the AWS cabling exits from the cutouts in the rear
cover. Gantry routing and connections are covered in Chapter 5, Fiber Optic Cabling, p. 5-13.
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the AWS rear cover.
3. Disconnect the fiber optic cable from
the computer. See Figure 4-23.
4. Remove the fiber optic cable from the
AWS.
5. Route the replacement fiber optic cable
into the AWS as shown. The dotted line
in Figure 4-23 shows alternate entry
paths into the AWS. Use the existing
cable clamps along each path for cable
support.
6. Connect the fiber optic cable into the
termination points at the rear of the
computer. See Figure 4-24.
7. Allowing for a service loop, secure the
wiring with cable ties.
Figure 4-23: Fiber Optic Cabling, AWS.
Legend for Figure 4-24
1.
2.
Rx—Blue Wire
Tx—Orange Wire
Figure 4-24: Fiber Optic Cable Termination Points
MAN-00625
4-29
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 4—AWS Maintenance
Fiber Optic Cable Replacement
4-30
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Introduction
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
1.0
Introduction
This chapter provides maintenance information and instructions for the Gantry, including:
•
Component identification
•
Removing covers and panels
•
Preventive maintenance procedures
•
How to access the system exposure and error logs
•
Component replacement procedures
Component replacement procedures are sub-divided by topics:
•
X-ray and Imaging components
•
Circuit boards, firmware, and circuit components
•
Mechanical components and related assemblies
•
Electrical power components and assemblies
Note…
The Selenia serviceable components are identified in Chapter 9—Parts List.
Warning:
Service engineers must take appropriate radiation safety measures
when testing (or maintaining) the unit.
Caution:
Always observe Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) precautions when working
with electronics and electronic components.
Caution:
Turn Off the system before performing these remove and replace
procedures unless instructed otherwise.
Note…
If a procedure instructs you to remove any covers or panels, do not reinstall
the covers until all required procedures are completed.
Only Hologic-authorized, trained service engineers can service this system. The unit is
designed for module-level repair.
MAN-00625
5-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Gantry Component Identification
2.0
Gantry Component Identification
Remove and replace procedures are provided for the System Components identified in
Figure 5-1.
Rotation Angle
Display (2)
Brick Assembly
VTA Motor Drive Board
HV Generator Assembly
Host Microprocessor
Board
Emergency Off
Switch (2)
Generator Microprocessor
Motor/Lamp Control
Board
Filament Control
High Speed Rotor Control
Mains Power Board
Power Distribution
Board
Relay Connector
Relay
Power Supply
Innerconnector Board
Fuse Block
Fuse Board
Isolation Transformer
Left Door Front View (Doors Open) Right Door
Figure 5-1: System Components Identification
5-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Gantry Component Identification
Legend for Figure 5-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compression Motor
Compression Motor Brake
Compression Chain
Compression Thickness
Potentiometer
5. Compression Device
6. Compression Clutch and
Clutch Brake
7. Compression Thickness
Timing Belt
8. Chain Adjustment Points
9. Chain Idler Gear
10. Compression / AEC
Position Display Boards
(not shown; see
Figure 5-34)
11. Compression Accessory
Detect Board (not shown,
part of Compression
Device)
12. Paddle Detect Board (not
shown; see Figure 5-35)
Figure 5-2: Compression System Components Identification
Legend for Figure 5-3
1.
2.
3.
C-arm Rotation Drive Motor and
Gearbox Assembly
C-arm Rotation Potentiometer
C-arm Vertical Drive Motor and
Gearbox Assembly
Figure 5-3: C-arm Rotation and Vertical Travel
Components—Rear View of Gantry
MAN-00625
5-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Gantry Component Identification
Legend for Figure 5-4
1.
2.
Lead Screw
Rotation Angle Display Boards
(1 on each side—see Figure 5-33, p. 5-33)
3. VTA Motor Driver Board
4. C-arm Rotation Limit Switch
(Normally Closed)
5. Mag Tray Detector Board (not shown,
located on right side patient view)
6. Compression System—VTA Motor Driver
Board
7. C-arm Switch Boards (not shown, 1 on each
side—see Figure 5-29, p. 5-30)
8. Lower Limit Adjusters
9. C-arm Vertical Travel Limit Switches
(Normally Open)
10. Upper Limit Adjusters
Figure 5-4: C-arm Components—Front View
5-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Removing Covers and Panels
3.0
Removing Covers and Panels
The maintenance procedures in this chapter require covers or panels to be removed in order
to gain access to the interior.
Be sure to turn the unit off before removing the covers. Do not reinstall any covers or panels
until all required procedures are completed.
3.1
Gantry Cover Removal
Figure 5-5: Gantry Covers
Legend for Figure 5-5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Top Restraining hardware and Locking Mechanism
for Left Door (not shown for right door)
Bellows Frame bolt (one shown)
Front cover Locating Pin
Right Front Cover
Right Side Door (shown closed)
3.1.1
6. Upper Rear Panel
7. Lower Rear Panel
8. Left Front Cover
9. Gantry Frame
10. Left Side Door (shown open)
Left and Right Side Gantry Doors (hinged)
1. Locate the top restraining hardware.
2. To unlock the door, back out the top nut using a 7/16” nut driver.
3. Pull door to open.
4. To lock door, screw top nut in.
3.1.2
Left and Right Front Gantry Covers
1. Remove screws fastening the front Gantry cover to the Gantry Frame.
2. Pull the cover off the locating pin, then lift it off the frame.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the right front Gantry cover.
3.1.3
Bellows Frame
1. Remove the two bolts securing the top of the Bellows frame to the Gantry.
2. Remove the two bolts securing the bottom of the Bellows frame to the Gantry base.
3. Pull the Bellows frame forward on the pivot tube to enable access to the Gantry
frame components. It may be necessary to rotate the Bellows frame to a
horizontal position in order to facilitate access.
MAN-00625
5-5
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Removing Covers and Panels
3.1.4
Upper Rear Access Panel
1. Remove the screws that fasten the Upper Rear Access Panel to the Gantry.
2. Lift the panel off the unit.
3.1.5
Lower Rear Access Panel
1. Remove the screws that fasten the Lower Rear Access Panel to the Gantry.
2. Lift the panel off the unit.
3. Reverse the procedures to replace the covers and panels.
3.2
C-arm Covers—Removal
Access to the serviceable components and assemblies of the C-arm are through:
•
Tubehead Covers
•
Compression Device Covers
•
C-arm Bellows Assembly
3.2.1
Top and Bottom Tubehead
Covers
Warning:
The Bottom Tubehead
cover is lined with lead.
Do not touch the
interior.
1. Remove the face shield (not
shown) by pulling the rear
sides of the shield out and
sliding the shield off.
2. Remove the two screws at the
front of the tube shield mount,
Figure 5-6 #5, securing the
bottom tubehead cover.
3. Slide the bottom cover down
and forward approximately 2.0
cm, then angle it downward to
Figure 5-6: Tubehead Covers
release.
4. Remove the Tubehead side
covers; refer to Section 3.2.2.
5. Loosen the captive knurled screws securing the top tubehead cover to the side
covers (two rear screws under the side covers, one for each side - #2).
6. Remove the screws, #4, securing the top tubehead cover to the front bracket.
7. Reverse procedures to replace the Tubehead Covers.
3.2.2
Tubehead Side Cover Removal
1. To remove side covers, remove the two screws at the rear, Figure 5-6, #1, and
the two screws at the front of the side covers, #3.
(TIP: Use a screw holder screwdriver when removing the bottom screws—they
can easily fall into the unit.)
2. Reverse procedures to replace the Tubehead Side Covers.
5-6
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Removing Covers and Panels
3.2.3
Compression Device Covers
Access to the serviceable components and assemblies of the C-arm are through the
Upper and Lower Compression Device Covers.
Caution:
The top and bottom Compression Device covers are fastened to the
bellows assembly. Use care not to damage the bellows when removing or
replacing these covers.
1. Remove the mounting hardware that fastens the compression device covers (top
and bottom) to the compression device. See Figure 5-7.
2. Carefully lift the covers off the compression device. The bellows remain
attached.
3. Disconnect the wiring between the covers and the compression device
(includes 1 ground wire for each cover).
4. Reverse procedures to replace the Compression Device covers.
Figure 5-7: Compression Device Covers—Remove and Replace
3.2.4
C-arm Bellows Assembly
Remove the upper and lower Bellows Assembly:
1. Remove the Image Receptor. Refer to Section 6.2, p. 5-15.
2. Disconnect the cables and screws from the top and bottom Compression
Device covers. Refer to Section 3.2.3.
3. From the bottom of the C-arm, unscrew and remove the two bellows rods (one
on each side).
4. Remove three screws securing the upper bellows assembly to the C-arm subframe. Carefully remove the Bellows and Compression Device Cover assembly.
5. Remove three screws securing the lower bellows assembly to the bearing block
assembly. Carefully remove the Bellows and Compression Device Cover
assembly.
6. Reverse procedures to replace the Bellows.
MAN-00625
5-7
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Procedures
4.0
Preventive Maintenance Procedures
4.1
Preventive Maintenance Tools and Procedures
The tools and materials required for performing preventive maintenance on Selenia are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Standard hand tools
Lint Free Cloths
Brush
Laptop Computer
kVp Meter
HV Divider tank
AEC Phantom (US only)
Anti-Static Wrist Strap
Dosimeter
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Synthetic Lubricant PN 2-580-0207
Small Vacuum Cleaner
CD-R/W drive
Oscilloscope
Volt Meter
8 cm BR-12 or equivalent
DB9 female-female adapter and serial cable
CRT Wipes
HVL Aluminum sheets
Table 5-1: Selenia Recommended Preventive Maintenance Procedures
Freq
Procedure
Test Function of Safety Interlocks and
Switches
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
5-8
Input wiring Inspected for safety and
Integrity
Voltage Verification (line voltage, console
supply, HV supply)
C-arm Rotation Gear Assembly Inspection
and Lubrication
VTA Assembly Inspection and Lubrication
C-arm Functionality test.
Refer To
Chapter 1, Section 4.6, p. 1-6;
Chapter 2, Section 4.0, p. 2-8;
Chapter 3, Section 4.7, p. 3-9
Performer
Service Eng
Service Eng
Service Eng
Section 4.5, p. 5-11
Service Eng
Section 4.6, p. 5-12
Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls and
Functional Tests", p. 3-9
Chapter 6, Section 14.2, p. 6-54
Chapter 6, Section 14.2.2, p. 6-55
Service Eng
Service Eng
Rotation Calibration Verified
Rotation Angle Limit Switch Operation
Verified
Compression Force Calibration Verified
Chapter 6, Section 15.6, p. 6-60
Compression Thickness Calibration Verified Chapter 6, Section 15.5, p. 6-59
Exposure System Calibration—Tube
Chapter 6, Section 8.4, p. 6-20
Voltage (kV) Calibration
Exposure System Calibration—Tube
Chapter 6, Section 8.5, p. 6-22
Current (mA) Adjustment
Reproducibility and Linearity
Chapter 6, Section 9.1, p. 6-24
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
Chapter 6, Section 4.0, p. 6-5
Beam Quality Assessment (Half-Value
Layer Measurement)
Evaluation of Focal Spot Performance
Chapter 6, Section 9.2, p. 6-29
Phantom Image Quality Evaluation
Selenia Quality Control Manual
Selenia Quality Control Manual
Detector Flat-Field Calibration
Selenia Quality Control Manual
Image Receptor Dust Filter Maintenance
Section 6.5, p. 5-16
Recommended frequency of performance: A = Annual S = Semi-Annual
Service Eng
Service Eng
Service Eng
Service Eng
Service Eng
Service Eng
Service Eng,
Physicist
Service Eng,
Physicist
Service Eng,
Physicist
Service Eng,
Physicist
Service Eng,
Physicist
Service Eng
Service Eng
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Procedures
4.2
Gantry—Clean and Inspect
Each time the system is down for service:
1. The unit should be inspected for:
•
Cleanliness
•
Loose or missing panels or covers, and loose or frayed wires or cables
2. Vacuum around the light field window and image receptor fans.
3. Clean the Face shield and displays with a CRT wipe. Clean any fingerprints, etc. from the
painted surfaces.
4. Annually or whenever the left Gantry door is opened, perform the procedures in
Section 4.5 and Section 4.6.
4.3
Review the Exposure, Error, and Alarm Logs
1. The Alarm Codes Log should be reviewed for existing fault conditions. Refer to
Chapter 8, Section 2.3, p. 8-1.
2. Review the exposure error logs. Refer to Section 4.3.
3. Correct any problems found before returning the unit to operation.
Upon removing and replacing Selenia components, any recommended calibration and/or
performance test procedures must be performed.
4.4
Accessing the Exposure and Error Logs
1. Connect adapter cable from board KJ26 to the serial port of a pc running Hyper Terminal,
Vterm, or some other serial communication program (see Installation Manual). See Appendix
B, Section 1.2, p. B-5.
2. Set Serial port settings: 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, no flow control.
4.4.1
Downloading the Selenia Exposure Log
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
1. Set Rotary switch to Position 9.
2. Set DIP switch S6-1 On, S6-2 On, S6-4 Off, S6-8 Off.
3. Press S1 to download the exposure log.
Note…
4.4.2
This configuration automatically outputs the exposure log after each
exposure.
Clearing the Selenia Exposure Log
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
1. Set the Rotary switch to Position 9.
2. Set DIP switch S6-1 On, S6-2 On, S6-4 Off, S6-8 Off.
3. Press S3 and S5 together to clear the log. The Host Microprocessor Board
displays “CLR_XLOG”
4.4.3
Downloading the Selenia Error Log
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
1. Set the Rotary switch to Position 9.
2. Set DIP switch S6-1 On, S6-2 On, S6-4 On, S6-8 Off.
3. Press S1 to download the error log.
MAN-00625
5-9
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Procedures
4.4.4
Clearing the Selenia Error Log
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
1. Set the Rotary switch to Position 9.
2. Set DIP switch S6-1 On, S6-2 On, S6-4 On, S6-8 Off.
3. Press S3 and S5 together to clear the log. The Host Microprocessor Board
displays “CLR_ELOG”
4.4.5
Selenia Error Log Format
The error log stores the most recent 48 errors. Each line in the log, approximately 60
bytes in length, represents one error condition. The format is described below.
Sample Error Log
ERROR LOG: 7 RECORDS
E52_X 610_mmddyyyy_28100146000N010104500000000000+000100000450
E06_X 677_mmddyyyy_28100075000N010112000000000000+000000001200
E60_X 691_mmddyyyy_28100075000N010140000000000000+000000004000
E53_X 710_mmddyyyy_28100120000N010112000000000000+000000001200
E33_X 710_mmddyyyy_28100120000N010112000000000000+000100001200
E54_X 1146_mmddyyyy_34080116000N010137500000000000+000000003000
E33_X 1146_mmddyyyy_34080116000N010137500000000000+000100003000
END OF ERROR LOG
Format:
5-10
field name
field width
Error code
exp Count
Date
kV
mA
comp thickness
comp force
filter
sense Num
mode
focal spot
time
mag
paddle ID
collimation code
2 bytes
6 bytes
8 bytes
2 bytes
3 bytes
3 bytes
4 bytes
1 byte
1 byte
1 byte
1 byte
4 bytes
1 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
grid position
C-Arm angle
Generator status
post_mAs
programmed mAs
current.status
Total:
1 byte
4 bytes
1 byte
4 bytes
4 bytes
2 bytes
60 bytes
000000 to 999999
mmddyyyy
range 20 to 40
range 000 to 500
2.1cm would be 021, 12.5cm would be 125
format: 010N (Newtons) or 010# (pounds)
0= Mo 1= Rh
AEC sensor position 1-7 or 8 (auto-sense)
0=Manual, 1=Auto-Time, 2=Auto-kV, 3=Auto-Filter
0 = SMALL FOCAL SPOT, 1 = LARGE FOCAL SPOT
Exposure time in milliseconds. 5 seconds= 5000
1=mag mode.
0001 = 18x24 paddle, etc.
Codes are: 0 = 24x29 cm
1 = 18x24 cm
2 = 15x15 cm
3 = 10x10 cm
0=IN. 1=OUT
Angle in degrees. Range: –180 to +180 (zero = +000)
0 = Ready, 1 = Standby, 2=Setup mode, 3=X-ray
0100 = 10.0 mAs. Measured mAs from last exposure
0100 = 10.0 mAs. Programmed mAs (manual mode)
current Gantry status bytes
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Procedures
4.4.6
Download Calibration Data
On the Host Microprocessor Board, Figure B-1, p. B-1:
1. Set Rotary switch to Position 0.
2. Set DIP switch S6-1 On, S6-2 On. Ensure that all others are Off.
3. Press S1 to download cal data. The data downloads 1 page at a time. There are
20 pages total, and S1 has to be pressed up to 20 times. Press S1 until all pages
are shown on the laptop screen.
4. Cal Data Download Complete displays when done.
5. Print a hard copy of this data and save with the unit.
6. Alternatively, FTP the files to a folder on your laptop and save them to a CD to
leave on site. Refer to Installation Manual for additional details if necessary.
4.5
C-arm Rotation Gear Assembly Inspection and Lubrication
Perform this procedure annually or as required (any time the
upper rear cover is off the unit for service, the rotation gear
assembly should be inspected).
Location in Gantry—Rear View
1. Turn the system off.
2. Remove the Gantry Upper Rear Access Panel. Refer to
Section 3.1.4, p. 5-6.
3. Locate and inspect the gear assembly for loose hardware.
4. Inspect harnesses for proper dress and clearances.
5. Clean and lightly lubricate (if required) the C-arm rotation
gear assembly, Figure 5-8, using approximately 1
tablespoon of synthetic type lubricant (PN 2-580-0207).
Apply lubricant with brush. Ensure gear teeth and worm
gear are evenly coated.
6. Turn the system On.
7. Rotate C-arm through full operational travel.
8. Remove any excess lubrication.
9. Replace Upper Rear Access Panel.
Legend for Figure 5-8
1.
2.
C-arm Rotation Gear Assembly
VTA Lead Screw
Figure 5-8: C-arm Rotation Gear Assembly
MAN-00625
5-11
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Remote X-ray On/Power On Light—Connection
4.6
VTA Lead Screw Inspection and Lubrication
Perform this procedure annually or as required (any time the left front cover is off the unit for
service, the VTA lead screw should be inspected).
1. Turn system off.
2. Remove the Gantry Left Front Cover. Refer to Section 3.1.2, p. 5-5 (do not remove right
front cover).
3. Locate and inspect the VTA lead screw for loose hardware; see Figure 5-8, p. 5-11, #2.
4. Inspect harnesses for proper dress and clearances.
5. Clean and lightly lubricate the VTA lead screw (if required) using approximately two
tablespoons of synthetic type lubricant (PN 2-580-0207). Evenly coat all metal surfaces.
6. Turn system on.
7. Raise C-arm to top of vertical travel. Lower C-arm to bottom of vertical travel.
8. Remove any excess lubrication.
9. Replace Gantry Left Front Cover.
5.0
Remote X-ray On/Power On Light—Connection
Selenia provides the user with the ability to operate remote lights which indicate when the
system is On and when X-rays are being taken. These lights are normally installed above the
door to the exam room. A certified electrician should do the installation. The relay contacts
provided are rated:
•
10 A 250 VAC (normally open)
•
10 A 30 VDC (normally open)
The connection points are available through the access panel at the rear of the Gantry, as
shown in Figure 5-9. Connections are made on the Power On/X-ray On terminal block.
1. Install the remote Power On/X-ray On lights following local guidelines.
2. Route the remote cables from the lights to the Gantry.
3. Connect each cable to the appropriate location on the Power On/X-ray On terminal
block.
Figure 5-9: Access to Power On and X-ray On Indicators
5-12
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
6.0
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
This section describes the replacement of X-ray and imaging components:
•
6.1
Fiber Optic Cabling
•
Image Receptor
•
HV Generator Assembly
•
Beam Limiting Assembly
•
X-ray Tube
•
Brick Assembly
Fiber Optic Cabling
The fiber optic cables are connected between the Gantry (at the Brick) and the AWS
computer.
6.1.1
Removing the Fiber Optic Cable from the Gantry
1. Remove the rear panel from the Gantry.
2. Disconnect and remove the cable.
6.1.2
Installing Fiber Optic Cabling—Gantry
1. Route the cable into the Gantry through the rear lower access panel. A cutout
on the power panel allows entry into the Gantry mainframe. See Figure 5-10,
p. 5-14, inset A.
2. Following the Main Harness inside the Gantry mainframe, route the fiber optic
cable up to the Brick. See Figure 5-10, p. 5-14, inset B. Connect the cable to the
Brick.
Note…
It is possible to install the fiber optic cable incorrectly (reversed). If they are
reversed, the red LED is on. When correct, the red LED is off, the right green
LED is on, and the center LED blinks.
3. Allowing for a ‘service loop’, secure the wiring with cable ties.
4. Secure the fiber optic cable to the bulk cabling from the Gantry to the AWS.
MAN-00625
5-13
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
J3
RIGHT
FOOTSW
A Entry
240V~
230V~
220V~
J2
CONSOLE
POWER
208V~
N
J1
CONSOLE
DATA
200V~
(Rear view of
the Gantry)
J4
LEFT
FOOTSW
POWER
ON
X-RAY
ON
B Routing and
Termination
(Front view of
the Gantry)
Figure 5-10: Fiber Optic Cabling, Gantry
Legend for Figure 5-10
1. LEDs: 1 red, 2 green
2. Blue Wire
3. Orange Wire
5-14
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
6.2
Image Receptor
1. Remove the four decorative caps, two on each
side (Figure 5-11, #1), covering the bolts
securing the Image Receptor (#2) to the C-arm.
Remove the bolts.
2. Remove the Image Receptor by sliding it
forward along the guide rails on the bottom of
the C-arm assembly.
3. Install the new Image Receptor by sliding it
backward along the guide rails on the bottom
of the C-arm assembly
4. Reinstall all four bolts securing the Image
Receptor to the C-arm.
5. Reinstall the four decorative caps covering the
bolts.
6. After replacing the Image Receptor, loosen the
two screws on the bottom of the Image
Receptor, securing the C-arm switch assembly
in the back/shipping position (Figure 5-11, #3, Figure 5-11: Image Receptor—Remove
and Replace
and Figure 5-12).
Warning:
Make sure the switches are not permanently actuated.
7. Slide the switch assembly forward until it is fully positioned within the access slot on the
rear of the C-arm frame.
8. Tighten the screws.
9. Verify the Image Receptor is working properly. Perform the following before releasing
the unit to service:
a. If remounting the original Image Receptor, acquire an image.
b. If installing a new/replacement Image Receptor:
• Phantom Image Quality Evaluation—Selenia Quality Control Manual
• Artifact Evaluation—Selenia Quality Control Manual
6.3
Preparing the Image Receptor for Return Shipping
If the Image Receptor is to be returned, the C-arm switch assembly, located on the rear of the
Image Receptor, must be moved to the shipping position.
1. On the bottom of the Image
Receptor, loosen the two screws
securing the C-arm switch assembly
in the operational position.
2. Slide the switch assembly to the
shipping position.
3. Tighten the screws.
Figure 5-12: Adjusting the C-arm Switch Assembly
MAN-00625
5-15
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
6.4
Image Receptor Fans
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rotate the C-arm to access the bottom of the Image Receptor.
Turn the system off.
Remove the carbon fiber cover (ten screws).
Remove the bottom Black cover (two Phillips screws and two Allen screws).
Disconnect the two connectors.
Remove the two screws from the fan you want to change.
Reverse the process to install the new fans.
Perform the following before releasing the unit to service:
•
6.5
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
Image Receptor Dust Filter Maintenance
To prevent inadequate filtering, inspect the IR dust filter at least semi-annually.
1. Ensure the Selenia is On.
2. Rotate the C-arm right to the 180° position.
3. Remove the six screws that hold the dust cover to the array, and remove the dust cover.
Refer to Figure 5-13.
4. Remove the filter from the dust cover. If installing a new filter, go to step 6.
Note…
Do not immerse the filter or the filter cover in liquid.
Note…
Do not vacuum dust through the filter membrane.
5. Vacuum the filter surface that faces the inside of the dust cover.
6. Clean the dust cover with a moist wipe and dry it thoroughly.
7. Reattach the filter to the dust cover. If this is a new filter, you must remove the backing
material from the hook and loop fasteners before attaching the filter.
8. Reinstall the dust cover on the Image Receptor.
Legend for Figure 5-13
1.
2.
3.
Image Receptor
Dust Filter
Dust Cover
Figure 5-13: Image Receptor Dust Cover and Filter
5-16
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
6.6
HV Generator Assembly
The HV Generator Assembly (For location, see Figure 5-1, p. 5-2):.
Legend for Figure 5-14
1. Upper Mounting Nuts (2)
2. Terminal Block
3. HV Test Well
4. Multiplier Assembly
5. HV Generator Assembly Mounting Plate
6. Center Mounting Nuts (2)
7. Safety Shield
8. PJ1
9. Bottom Screw on Safety Shield
10. HV Control Board
11. NJ1
12. Lower Mounting Nuts (2)
13. NJ5
14. NJ4
15. HV Inverter Board
Figure 5-14: HV Generator Assembly
Note…
The HV Generator is assembled, calibrated, and complied at the factory as
an assembly and must be replaced as an assembly.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of hazardous electrical shock, do not
attempt service until LED D14 is unlit and at least 5 minutes
have elapsed after turning off the equipment.
Refer to Figure 5-14, p. 5-17 when replacing the HV Generator Assembly
1. Turn system off. Wait five minutes.
2. Access the HV Generator Assembly by opening the left side Gantry door. See Section
3.1.1, p. 5-5.
MAN-00625
5-17
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
3. Disconnect the HV cable from the HV Test Well, Figure 5-14 (#3). When reconnecting
the HV cable later in this procedure, observe the ink mark on the banana plug as a guide
for the proper insertion depth of the plug.
4. On the HV Inverter Board, (#15), remove the bottom screw on the safety shield (#7) and
loosen the top screw.
5. Move the shield out of the way.
6. Disconnect PJ1 (#8) on the HV Inverter Board.
7. Remove the green and yellow ground wire from the Terminal Block (#2).
8. Remove the EMO switch assembly (left side, not shown). See Section 8.3, p. 5-38.
9. Move the switch assembly out of the way by pulling it through the cover opening and let
the assembly hang loosely.
10. On the HV Control Board, disconnect NJ1, NJ4 and NJ5, (#11, 14, and 13 respectively);
note locations.
11. Remove the center nuts (#6) securing the HV Generator Assembly mounting plate to the
Gantry.
12. Loosen the two upper nuts (#1) securing the HV Generator Assembly mounting plate to
the Gantry.
13. Remove the bottom nuts (#12) securing the HV Generator Assembly mounting plate to
the Gantry.
14. With one hand on the Multiplier Assembly (#4) and one hand under the HV Control
Board frame, lift up the assembly taking care to clear the bottom studs, removing the
assembly from the Gantry.
15. Once it is clear, slide the assembly down to clear the upper studs, removing the entire
assembly.
16. Reverse procedures to replace the HV Generator Assembly.
17. Perform the following procedures before returning unit to service:
5-18
•
Chapter 6, Section 8.2, p. 6-19, HV Control Board Over-Current/Over-Voltage
Adjustment
•
Chapter 6, Section 8.5, p. 6-22, Tube Current (mA) Adjustment
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
6.7
Beam Limiting Assembly
The Beam Limiting Assembly (Figure 5-15) mounts below the X-ray tube inside the tubehead
enclosure. The Beam Limiting Assembly is a 2-tier mechanism; an upper tier containing the
dual filter changer and the mirror/lamp assembly, and a lower tier containing the 4-blade
automatic beam collimator. The lower tier must be removed before the upper tier.
The following procedures explain how to remove the Beam Limiting Assembly.
1. Turn the system Off.
2. Remove the top and bottom tubehead covers. Refer to Section 3.2.1, p. 5-6.
3. Disconnect the Lamp Cooling Fan power cable, Figure 5-15, #1, from the Filament
Protection Board, Figure 5-1, p. 5-2.
4. Disconnect the cables (DJ1-DJ12) from the Tubehead Motor Driver Board; see
Figure 5-1, p. 5-2.
Note…
It is possible to install cables DJ1, DJ2, DJ3, and DJ4 incorrectly. To avoid
this; note the cable position and orientation before disconnecting.
5. Remove the hardware that secures the lower tier (collimator blades) to the Beam
Limiting Assembly chassis. See Figure 5-15.
6. Carefully remove the collimator assembly and set it aside. Use care not to damage the
lead lining on the collimator blades.
Caution:
Do not touch either filter on the dual filter assembly. Filter contact with
bare skin, or other materials, can cause artifacts on the image.
7. Remove the hardware that secures the
upper tier (mirror and filter assemblies)
to the Beam Limiting Assembly chassis;
see Figure 5-15.
Chassis
8. Carefully remove the mirror and filter
assembly and set it aside.
9. Remove the hardware that secures the
Beam Limiting Assembly chassis to the
tubehead frame and remove the chassis.
Upper Tier
10. Reverse these steps to install the
replacement Beam Limiting Assembly.
11. Ensure the Lamp Harness Cable is
securely routed through the cable
clamp, Figure 5-15, #2.
Lower Tier
12. Perform Light Field Alignment and X-ray
Field Alignment; see Chapter 6, Section
4.0, p. 6-5.
Figure 5-15: Beam Limiting Assembly
Warning:
MAN-00625
The Beam Limiting Assembly contains lead. Return replaced unit to
Hologic or arrange for proper disposal.
5-19
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
6.8
X-ray Tube
The X-ray tube mounts to the tubehead frame. Refer to Figure 5-16 during this procedure.
Note…
The Beam Limiting Assembly (Figure 5-15, p. 5-19) must be removed to
access the X-ray tube mounting hardware.
1. Shut the system down and turn the Gantry circuit breaker Off.
2. Wait until the red LEDs go out. See Figure 6-10,
p. 6-19.
3. Remove the top and bottom tubehead covers. See
Section 3.2.1, p. 5-6.
4.
Remove the Beam Limiting Assembly; see Section 6.7.
5. Disconnect the high voltage cable and the
filament cable from the rear of the X-ray tube.
6. Loosen the band clamp, near the rear end of the
X-ray tube, so that it can be slipped over the rear
edge of the X-ray tube.
7. Remove the X-ray tube mounting hardware from
beneath the tubehead frame.
8. Slide the X-ray tube out of the tubehead frame
from the front.
9. Reverse this procedure to install the replacement
X-ray tube. High voltage conduit grease for the
high voltage cable is included with the
replacement tube.
10. If necessary, install the near aperture in the tube
opening with the window toward the C-arm.
Secure near aperture tight against the tube
element using an Internal Retaining ring.
Figure 5-16: X-ray Tube
11. Reinstall the Beam Limiting Assembly.
12. Turn on the Machine.
13. Exposure Counter Reset:
a. On the Host Microprocessor Board, Figure 5-1, p. 5-2, set the system to display the
exposure counter (S4 to position 0, S6 switch 8 = On).
b. Reset the exposure counter by pressing the Host Microprocessor Board switches S2
and S5 simultaneously.
c. When complete, return all switches to their normal operating positions.
14. Perform the following before returning the unit to service:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 6, Section 8.1, p. 6-18, Tube Bias Adjustment.
Chapter 6, Section 8.5, p. 6-22, Tube Voltage (kV) Calibration
Chapter 6, Section 8.5, p. 6-22, Tube Current (mA) Adjustment.
Chapter 6, Section 9.1, p. 6-24, Reproducibility and Linearity.
Chapter 6, Section 9.2, p. 6-29, Beam Quality Assessment (Half-Value Layer)
Selenia Quality Control Manual—X-ray System Performance.
Selenia Quality Control Manual—Breast Entrance Exposure, Average Glandular
Dose and AEC Reproducibility.
15. Perform the following Compliance Requirements before returning unit to service:
•
•
5-20
Affix new compliance label. See Chapter 1, "Label Locations", p. 1-8.
Complete FDA 2579C form (tube exchange, US only).
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing X-ray and Imaging Components
6.9
Brick Assembly
1. In the AWS application, locate the software PCXM version number in the Information
Dialog box, and verify that the new Brick Assembly has the same software number on
the box label.
2. Exit the application. Shut the system down.
3. Open the right side Gantry door.
4. Remove lower back panel.
5. Disconnect the AWS cables from the rear of the
Gantry. See Figure 5-18.
6. Remove the two screws securing the strain relief cable
clamp to the Brick Assembly mounting plate. See
Figure 5-17.
7. Disconnect the in-line connectors from the
Electroluminescent (EL) power supply.
8. Disconnect harness connectors. Note locations.
9. Disconnect Fiber Optic cables from the fiber optic
connector. Note locations.
10. On the +24 VDC power supply, disconnect the
ground wire quick connect and J1.
11. On the +5 VDC power supply, disconnect J1.
12. Remove the nuts securing the Brick Assembly
mounting plate to the right side Gantry door.
13. Carefully lift the Brick Assembly off the mounting
studs. Ensure all cables and wires are out of the way.
14. Reverse procedures to replace the Brick Assembly.
Figure 5-17: Brick Assembly
Legend for Figure 5-17 and Figure 5-18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Nuts securing the Brick Assembly mounting plate
Brick Assembly mounting plate
Strain Relief Cable Clamp
Fiber Optic connector
+24 V Power supply
+5 V Power supply
EL Power supply
AWS Cables
Figure 5-18: AWS Cable Connection
15. Perform the AEC Calibration to re-calibrate the Goaltab files before returning the unit to
service; see Chapter 6, Section 11.0, p. 6-37.
16. Perform the Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1.
MAN-00625
5-21
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.0
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.1
Firmware
Table 5-2: Selenia Firmware Identification by Circuit Board
Circuit Board
Host
Microprocessor
EPROM
Ref. Des.
Firmware Function
U4
Host CPU
U5
U59
Calibration Data
Programmable Logic
Motor/Lamp Control U1
Generator
U18
Microprocessor
Rotor Control
U13
Motor/Lamp CPU
Generator CPU
H.S. Starter
Tubehead
Microprocessor
Bucky Controller
U2
Tubehead CPU
U1
Bucky Driver CPU
Tubehead Driver
Microprocessor
U2
U17
Tubehead Driver CPU
Tubehead Driver CPLD
Figure 5-19: Replacing a
Firmware Chip
To replace the firmware chips:
1. Using the appropriate style chip remover, gently remove the firmware chip from the
socket, as shown in Figure 5-19.
2. Install the replacement firmware chip. Be sure to align the dot on the chip with the arrow
in the socket, or the flat corner with the flat edge in the socket.
5-22
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.2
Host Microprocessor Board
The Host Microprocessor Board (Figure 5-20) is
positioned on the right side Gantry frame below
the Brick Assembly (Figure 5-1, p. 5-2).
Equipment required:
•
Chip Remover
To replace the Host Microprocessor Board:
1. Shut the system down.
2. Open the right side Gantry door. See
Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors from the
board; note locations.
4. Disconnect the RJ45 jacks from the board;
note locations.
5. Lift the Host Microprocessor Board off of
the mounting standoffs.
6. Remove U5 (#1) (contains calibration data)
from the old Host Microprocessor Board
and set aside.
7. On the new Host Microprocessor Board,
remove U5 and replace with the U5
removed from the old Host Microprocessor
Board.
8. Install the new U4 (#2) and U59 (#3) on the
new Host Microprocessor Board.
9. Install the new board on the same standoffs
used by the old board.
10. Connect the harness connectors in the
positions noted in Step 3 above.
11. Connect the RJ45 jacks in the positions
noted in Step 4 above.
12. Perform the following procedures before
returning the unit to service:
•
•
MAN-00625
Figure 5-20: Host Microprocessor Board
Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls and
Functional Tests", p. 3-9.
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
5-23
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.3
Motor/Lamp Control Board
The Motor/Lamp Control board, Figure 5-21, is
positioned on the right side Gantry frame below
the Host Microprocessor Board (Figure 5-1,
p. 5-2). To replace the firmware chip U1 (#1),
refer to Section 7.1, p. 5-22.
Replace the Motor/Lamp Control board:
1. Shut the system down.
2. Open the right side Gantry door. See
Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors from the
board; note locations.
4. Disconnect the RJ45 jacks from the board;
note locations.
5. Reverse procedures to replace the Motor/
Lamp Control board.
6. Perform the following procedures before
returning the unit to service:
•
Chapter 3, Section 4.7, p. 3-9, Selenia
Controls and Functional Tests.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
Figure 5-21: Motor Lamp Control Board
5-24
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.4
Generator Microprocessor Board
The Generator Microprocessor board
(Figure 5-22) is positioned near the center of the
left side Gantry frame below the HV Generator
Assembly (Figure 5-1, p. 5-2).
To replace the firmware chip U18 (#1),
Generator CPU EPROM, refer to Section 7.1, p.
5-22.
Replace the HV Generator Microprocessor
Board:
1. Shut the system down.
2. Open the left side Gantry door, Section
3.1.1, p. 5-5.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors from
AGJ2, AGJ7, and AGJ8 on the board.
4. Disconnect the 40 pin ribbon cables from
AGJ3 and AGJ4.
Figure 5-22: Generator Microprocessor Board
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
7.5
Disconnect the 20 pin ribbon cable from AGJ1.
Disconnect the RJ45 jack from AGJ5.
Lift the board off of the four “squeeze type” mounting standoffs.
Reverse procedures to replace the Generator Microprocessor Board.
Perform the following procedures before returning the unit to service:
•
Chapter 3, Section 4.7, p. 3-9, Selenia Controls and Functional Tests.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
Filament Control Board
Replace the Filament Control board (Figure 5-1, p. 5-2):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
MAN-00625
Turn system off.
Open the left side Gantry door—Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
Disconnect the harness connectors.
Disconnect the 40 pin ribbon cable.
Lift the board off of the four “squeeze type” mounting standoffs.
Reverse the procedure to install the replacement board.
Perform the following procedures in the order listed before returning the unit to service:
•
Chapter 6, Section 8.3, p. 6-20, Filament Control Board Over-Current/Over-Voltage
Adjustment
•
Chapter 6, Section 8.5, p. 6-22, Tube Current (mA) Adjustment.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
•
X-ray System Performance—Selenia Quality Control Manual
5-25
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.6
Rotor Control Board
The Rotor Control board (Figure 5-23) is positioned on the left side Gantry frame below the
Filament Control board (Figure 5-1, p. 5-2).
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of hazardous electric shock, do not attempt
service until 5 minutes have elapsed after turning off the
power to unit. Wait until the 2 Red LEDs on the board are off.
To replace the firmware chip U13 (#1)
H.S. Starter EPROM, refer to Section 7.1.
To replace the Rotor Control board:
1. Turn system off.
2. Open the left side Gantry door. See Section
3.1.1, p. 5-5.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors.
4. Disconnect ribbon cable.
5. Disconnect the quick disconnects.
6. Lift the board off of the 6 squeeze type
mounting standoffs.
7. Reverse procedures to replace the Rotor
Control board.
8. Perform the following procedures before
returning the unit to service:
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
Figure 5-23: Rotor Control Board
5-26
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.7
Tubehead Switch Boards
There are two Tubehead Switch Boards; one on each tubehead side cover. See Figure 5-24.
1. Locate the Switch Board that requires replacement.
2. Shut the system down.
3. Remove the right or left side
tubehead covers. See
Section 3.2.1, p. 5-6.
4. Remove all cables from their
board connectors. Note
each cable location for
replacement.
5. Remove switch hardware.
6. Remove the switch board
from the tubehead side
cover.
7. Reverse these steps to install
the replacement Switch
Board.
8. Verify all switch functions
before releasing the unit to
the user.
Figure 5-24: Tubehead Switchboard
7.8
Filament Protect Board
1. Turn system off.
2. Remove the upper tubehead cover. See Section 3.2.1, p. 5-6.
3. Locate the Filament Protect board
(see Figure 5-25, #1) on the C-arm
frame. Disconnect all cables from
the board connectors; note
locations.
4. Remove the hardware and the board
from the standoffs on the C-arm
frame.
5. Reverse these procedures to install
the replacement board.
6. Perform the following procedures
before returning the unit to service:
•
Chapter 7, "ACR Phantom
Evaluation", p. 7-3
Figure 5-25: Tubehead Assembly
Legend for Figure 5-25
1.
2.
MAN-00625
Filament Protect Board
Beam Limiting Assembly
5-27
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.9
Tubehead Microprocessor and Motor Driver Boards
The Tubehead Motor Driver Board (#1) mounts to the bottom of the tubehead frame, directly
behind the beam limiting assembly. The Tubehead Microprocessor (#4) mounts to standoffs
on the Tubehead Motor Driver board.
To replace the Tubehead microprocessor board only, perform Steps 1 through 5, 8, and 9.
Perform all the steps when replacing the Tubehead Motor Driver board. Refer to Section 7.1
to replace the firmware chip U2 (#3-not visible in Figure 5-26), Tubehead CPU EPROM on
the Tubehead Microprocessor board, and firmware chips U17 (#5) and U18 (#2) EPROMs on
the Tubehead Motor Driver board.
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the tubehead top and bottom
covers. See Section 3.2.1, p. 5-6.
3. Locate the Tubehead Microprocessor
Board, Figure 5-26, which is mounted to
the Tubehead Motor Driver Board, beneath
the tubehead frame (to the rear of the beam
limiting assembly; see Figure 5-25, #2).
4. Remove the hardware that secures the
Tubehead Microprocessor to the standoffs
(attached to the Tubehead Motor Driver
Board).
5. Carefully pull the connector on the
Tubehead Microprocessor from its mating
socket on the Tubehead Motor Driver
Board.
Figure 5-26: Tubehead Microprocessor and Motor Driver Boards
6. Disconnect all cables from their connectors on the Tubehead Motor Driver Board. Note
each location for replacement.
7. Remove the hardware that secures the Tubehead Motor Driver Board to the tubehead
frame. Carefully remove the board from the tubehead.
8. Reverse these steps to install the replacement Tubehead Microprocessor and the
Tubehead Motor Driver Board.
9. Perform the following procedures before returning the unit to service:
5-28
•
Cycle through all the light fields manually.
•
Light Field and X-ray alignment.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.10
Bucky Controller Board
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the four decorative caps, two on each side (Figure 5-11, #1), covering the bolts
securing the Image Receptor (#2) to the C-arm. Remove the bolts.
3. To provide access to the Bucky Controller board, slide the Image Receptor forward along
the guide rails on the bottom of the C-arm assembly.
4. To replace only the firmware chip U1 (#5) Bucky Driver CPU, refer to Section 7.1, p. 522 and Figure 5-27.
5. To replace the Bucky Controller board, refer to Figure 5-27.
a.
Disconnect all cables that are attached to the board.
b. Remove four screws.
c.
Install the new board, and reinstall the four screws.
d. Reconnect the cables.
6. Slide the Image Receptor backward along the guide rails on the bottom of the C-arm
assembly.
7. Reinstall all four bolts securing the Image Receptor to the C-arm.
8. Reinstall the four decorative caps covering the bolts.
9. After reinstalling the Image Receptor, loosen the two screws on the bottom of the Image
Receptor, securing the C-arm switch assembly in the back/shipping position
(Figure 5-11, #3, and Figure 5-12).
Figure 5-27: Bucky Controller Board
MAN-00625
5-29
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.11
C-Arm Vertical Travel Limit Switches
1. Shut the system down.
2. Open left Gantry door to access the switches; see Figure 5-4, p. 5-4.
3. Remove the two slotted head screws holding the switches (3) to the bracket.
4. Remove the wires from the switches noting their location.
5. Replace the appropriate switch(es).
6. Mount the switch assembly to the bracket, do not tighten.
7. Perform the C-Arm Vertical Travel Adjustment; refer to Chapter 6, Section 14.4, p. 6-57.
7.12
C-Arm Rotation Limit Switch
1. Shut the system down.
2. Open the left Gantry door.
3. To locate C-arm rotation limit switch; see Figure 5-4, p. 5-4.
4. Remove the two slotted screws holding the switch to its bracket;
see Figure 5-4, p. 5-4, #3.
5. Remove the wires from the switch, noting their location.
6. Reconnect the wires to correct locations on the replacement
switch.
7. Mount the switch to the bracket, but do not tighten.
Figure 5-28: C-arm Rotation Limit Switch
8. Verify the adjustment of the C-Arm Rotation Limit Switch. Refer to Chapter 6, Section
14.2.2, p. 6-55.
7.13
C-arm Switch Boards (2)
There are two C-arm Switch boards on
the C-arm Frame, one on each side. See
Figure 5-29.
1. Shut the system down.
2. At the rear of the C-arm, locate the
C-arm Switch board (#1) to be
removed.
3. Remove the upper and lower
decorative hole covers (2) to access
the screws securing the board to the
C-arm.
4. Remove the screws.
5. Remove the board from C-arm
frame and disconnect the cable
connectors. Note locations.
Figure 5-29: C-arm Switch Board
6. Reverse procedures to re-install the C-arm Switch board. Ensure the top switch is convex
(bump) and the bottom switch is concave (dimple).
7.
5-30
Perform the Functional Tests—Mechanical (C-arm controls)—Chapter 3, Section 4.7, p. 3-9.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.14
Mag Tray Detector Board
7.14.1 Access the Mag Tray Detector Board
1. Raise the Selenia C-arm to a height that facilitates access to the front of the pivot
tube.
2. Shut down the system.
3. Remove any attachments from
the C-arm (for example, image
receptor).
4. Remove the Lower
Compression Device Cover for
easier access while replacing
the board:
a.
Remove the two buttonhead screws that fasten the
compression device lower
cover to the Compression
Device.
b. Remove the ground wire
Figure 5-30: Remove the C-arm Switch Board
from the lower cover, and
lower the cover and bellows.
5. At the rear of the C-arm, locate the right C-arm Switch board (Figure 5-30).
a.
Remove the upper and lower decorative hole covers (using a thin-bladed
screwdriver) that access the screws securing the board to the C-arm.
b. Remove the screws.
c.
Remove the board from the C-arm frame and let it hang, but do not remove
the cable connectors.
Figure 5-31: Replacing the Mag Detect Board
MAN-00625
Figure 5-32: Position of the Detect board
5-31
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.14.2 Remove the Mag Tray Detector Board
1. Remove the 5-pin connector at the bottom of the Mag Detect board
(Figure 5-31, p. 5-31).
2. Through the right C-arm Switch board access hole, using a 1/4” nutdriver,
remove the two #4 internal tooth washers and two 4-40 nuts holding the
assembly (Figure 5-32, p. 5-31). Save the hardware.
3. Untie the Mag Tray Detector Board cable and harness from the mount.
4. Pull the Mag Tray Detector Board assembly through the C-arm Switch opening.
5. Remove the old board from the assembly. Using the original hardware, install
the new board on the assembly.
6. Through the C-arm Switch board access hole, position the Mag Tray Detector
Board bracket over the two studs.
7. Using a 1/4” nutdriver, secure the assembly through the access hole using two
#4 internal tooth washers and two 4-40 nuts.
Tip…
Place the nut and then the washer onto the nutdriver. Carefully align the
nutdriver with the stud before securing. To prevent the studs from
stripping, do not over-tighten.
8. Reinstall the 5-pin connector at the bottom of the replacement board.
9. Re-tie the cable and existing harness to the mount.
10. Reinstall the right C-arm Switch board. Ensure the top switch is convex (bump)
and the bottom switch is concave (dimple). Tighten screws and replace the
decorative hole covers.
11. Reinstall the lower Compression Device cover.
12. Install a Mag Platform and observe the AWS to verify that the display recognizes
the Mag platform.
13. Perform the following procedures before returning the unit to service:
•
5-32
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.15
Right Rotation Angle Display Board
1. Shut the system down.
2. Open right Gantry door.
3. To access to the right rotation angle display board (see Figure 5-33), the Brick Assembly
must be removed. Refer to Section 6.9, p. 5-21.
4. Disconnect the harness from the rear of the right rotation angle display board.
5. Disconnect the RJ45 jack from the rear of the board.
6. Remove the mounting hardware (4 hex nuts) that secure the board to the chassis, then lift
the board out of the Gantry door.
7. Reverse procedures to replace the right rotation angle display board.
8. Rotate the C-arm to ensure the display changes.
7.16
Left Rotation Angle Display Board
1. Shut the system down.
2. Open left Gantry door.
3. To access the left rotation angle display board (see Figure 5-33), the HV Generator
Assembly must be removed. Refer to Section , p. 5-16.
4. Disconnect the harness from the rear of the right rotation angle display board.
5. Disconnect the RJ45 jack from the rear of the board.
6. Remove the mounting hardware (4 hex nuts) that secure the board to the chassis, then lift
the board out of the Gantry door.
7. Reverse procedures to replace the left rotation angle display board.
8. Rotate the C-arm to ensure the display changes.
Note: Right board is shown.
Figure 5-33: Right/Left Rotation Angle Display Board
MAN-00625
5-33
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.17
VTA Motor Driver Board
1. Shut the system down, switch off the input power circuit breaker, and disengage the
voltage source.
2. Remove the Bellows frame—Section 3.1.3, p. 5-5.
3. On the VTA Motor Driver board, see Figure 5-4, p. 5-4, disconnect harness connectors.
4. Remove 7 screws and associated hardware securing the board to the VTA.
5. Remove board.
6. Reverse procedures to install the new VTA Motor Driver board.
7. Perform the following procedures before returning unit to service:
•
7.18
Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls and Functional Tests", p. 3-9.
Compression / AEC Position Display Boards
The Compression/AEC Position Display Boards (left and right—Figure 5-34) provide readouts
for compression thickness, compression force, and the position of the AEC Sensor Board.
These display boards mount to the inside of the top Compression Device cover.
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the top Compression Device
cover—Section 3.2.3, p. 5-7.
3. Disconnect the cable connectors
from the Compression/AEC Position
Display Board to be removed (left or
right).
4. Remove the hardware securing the
Compression/AEC Position Display
Board to the standoffs on the top
cover.
5. Reverse these steps to install the
replacement display board.
6. Perform the following procedures
before returning unit to service:
•
7.19
Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls
and Functional Tests", p. 3-9.
Figure 5-34: Compression / AEC Position Display
Boards
AEC Position Switch
The AEC Position Switch selects a different area used by the electronic circuitry during AEC
exposures.
1. Shut the system down.
1. Remove the top Compression Device cover—Section 3.2.3, p. 5-7.
2. Unplug the 3 conductor ribbon cable from the top of the Paddle Detect board, see
Figure 5-35, p. 5-35.
3. Peel off the old switch from on top of the compression device cover.
4. Pull the ribbon cable through the slot in the compression device cover.
5. Reverse procedures to install the new switch.
6. Perform function test, Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls and Functional Tests", p. 3-9
5-34
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Circuit Boards, Firmware, and Circuit Components
7.20
Paddle Detect Board
The Paddle Detect board, Figure 5-35, has four electrical contacts that detect the type of
Compression Paddle installed on the Compression Device. This board mounts to the bottom
Compression Device frame, near the front.
1. Turn system off.
2. Remove the top and bottom
Compression Device covers—
Section 3.2.3, p. 5-7. Use care not
to damage the Compression
Device bellows.
3. Disconnect the cable connectors
on the Paddle Detect Board; note
locations.
4. Remove the screws securing the
Paddle Detect board to the
Compression Device frame as
shown in Figure 5-35.
5. Reverse these steps to install the
replacement Paddle Detect Board.
Figure 5-35: Paddle Detect Board
Legend for Figure 5-35
1.
2.
Note…
Paddle Detect Board
AEC Switch Connector
The Paddle Detect Board is spring loaded. Make sure the board has free
movement.
6. Perform the following procedures before returning unit to service:
MAN-00625
•
Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls and Functional Tests", p. 3-9, Smart Paddle test.
•
Ensure the paddle is identified correctly on the display.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1.
5-35
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Electrical Power Components and Assemblies
8.0
Replacing Electrical Power Components and Assemblies
Remove and replace procedures are provided for the Power Distribution Components
identified in Figure 5-36. Refer to Figure 5-36 as needed when performing the procedures in
this chapter.
Legend for Figure 5-36
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rotation Angle Display
Boards
Emergency Off Switch
Left Fuse Panel
Mains Power Board
Power Supply
Interconnect Board
Isolation Transformer
Right Fuse Panel
Power Distribution
Board
Figure 5-36: Power Distribution Components Identification
WARNING!
5-36
Ensure system power is Off and Gantry circuit breaker is in
the Off position for the procedures in this section. Some
procedures in this sections also require the wall circuit
breaker be off.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Electrical Power Components and Assemblies
8.1
Power Distribution Board
All system voltages are sourced from the Power Distribution Assembly.
To reduce the risk of hazardous electrical shock, do not attempt
service until Red LED D14 on the HV board is unlit and at least 5
minutes have elapsed after turning off the equipment.
WARNING!
Replacing the Power Distribution Board; see Figure 5-37.
1. Turn system off and ensure mains (wall) circuit breaker is in the Off position.
2. Open the left and right side Gantry doors. See Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
3. Remove the two front panels, Figure 5-37, #4, and the lower rear access panel.
4. Remove the four hex-head bolts holding the Gantry bellows to the base and the top of
the Gantry. Pull back bellows and rotate to expose the Power Distribution Assembly.
AEC
POSIT
ION
Figure 5-37: Power Distribution Board
5. Remove the two bolts (#1) securing Power Distribution Assembly to Gantry base plate.
6. Remove the four flat-head screws securing the Power Distribution Assembly to the rear
of the Gantry frame #2; also see Figure 5-39, p. 5-40.
7. Carefully slide Power Distribution Assembly forward to access the power distribution board.
8. Disconnect the harness connectors from the Power Distribution board; note locations.
9. Remove the six screws securing the Power Distribution board to the standoffs and
carefully remove the board #3.
10. Reverse the procedures to install the new board, and the Power Distribution Assembly.
11. Set the wall circuit breaker to the On position and turn system On.
12. Inspect for abnormal indications of an electrical malfunction.
13. Before returning the unit to service:
• Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls and Functional Tests", p. 3-9.
• Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
MAN-00625
5-37
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Electrical Power Components and Assemblies
8.2
Mains Power Board
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of hazardous electrical shock, do not
attempt service until Red LED D14 on the HV board is unlit
and at least 5 minutes have elapsed after turning off the
equipment.
The Mains Power Board controls the On/Off function for the Gantry, including the Exposure
Switch interface.
1. Turn system off and ensure mains (wall) circuit breaker is in the Off position.
2. Open the left side Gantry door.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors from the Mains Power board, Figure 5-36, p. 5-36,
and note the locations.
4. Lift the board off the mounting standoffs.
5. Reverse procedures to replace the Mains Power Board.
6. Set the circuit breaker to the On position and turn system On.
7. Inspect for indications of an electrical malfunction.
8. Perform the following procedures before returning the unit to service:
8.3
•
Chapter 3, Section 4.7, p. 3-9.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
Emergency Off Switch
Refer to Figure 5-36, p. 5-36, for location of switches.
1. Turn system Off.
2. Open the applicable Gantry door. See
Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
3. Remove the cable tie securing the cables to
the Gantry.
4. Loosen the ring nut and back the ring nut
and the lock washer off the switch assembly;
see Figure 5-38.
5. From the front of the Gantry door, pull the
switch assembly out of the door until the
wires are accessible. Note the wire locations
and cut the wires off of the switch assembly
leads.
Figure 5-38: Emergency Off Switch
6. Solder the wires to the new switch assembly
leads in the location noted in Step 5.
Legend for Figure 5-38
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to install the new
switch assembly.
8. Test switch for functionality. Refer to Chapter
2, Section 4.0, p. 2-8.
5-38
1.
2.
3.
Switch assembly
Ring nut
Lock washer
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Electrical Power Components and Assemblies
8.4
Circuit Breaker
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of hazardous electrical shock, do not
attempt service until Red LED D14 on the HV board is unlit
and at least 5 minutes have elapsed after turning off the
equipment.
Refer to Figure 5-38 when replacing the Circuit Breaker.
1. Turn system off and ensure mains (wall) circuit breaker is in the Off position.
2. Remove the lower rear access panel. See Section 3.1.5, p. 5-6.
3. Remove the two screws securing the circuit breaker mounting bracket to the Power
Distribution Assembly.
4. Gently pull the circuit breaker forward to access the connectors on the rear.
5. Disconnect the wires from the rear of the circuit breaker; note locations.
6. Remove the four screws securing the circuit breaker to the mounting bracket.
7. Re-install the mounting bracket on the new circuit breaker.
8. Reverse procedures to install the new circuit breaker.
Legend for Figure 5-38
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mounting bracket screws
Circuit Breaker
Circuit breaker mounting bracket
Screws holding circuit breaker to
mounting bracket
Figure 5-39: Circuit Breaker
MAN-00625
5-39
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Electrical Power Components and Assemblies
8.5
Isolation Transformer/Power Distribution Assembly
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of hazardous electrical shock, do not
attempt service until Red LED D14 on the HV board is unlit
and at least 5 minutes have elapsed after turning off the
equipment.
Refer to Figure 5-36, p. 5-36, for location of boards.
If the Isolation Transformer, Figure 5-36, #6, fails, the Power Distribution Assembly must be
replaced.
1. Shut down the system and ensure the
mains (wall) circuit breaker is in the Off
position.
2. Remove the lower rear access panel.
See Section 3.1.5, p. 5-6.
3. Disconnect the input power cord from
the input power terminal block on the
rear of the Gantry. See Figure 5-39.
4. Disconnect the equipotential ground
wire from the ground stud.
5. Remove the strain relief hardware from
the rear of the Gantry.
6. Remove the four screws securing the
Power Distribution Assembly to the
rear of the Gantry frame.
7. Open the left and right Gantry door.
See Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
8. Remove the left and right front covers
and bellows frame. See Section 3.1.2,
p. 5-5.
9. On the Mains Power board, disconnect
ABJ6 and ABJ8; note locations.
Remove cable ties securing the cables
to the main harness assembly.
Figure 5-39: Power Distribution Assembly
10. On the lower left side of the Power Distribution
Assembly, locate the relays and disconnect the
following connectors; note locations (remove
cables ties as necessary):
•
•
•
•
K1-1
K1-2
SS1-3
SS1
Legend for Figure 5-39
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Screws attaching Power Distribution
Assembly
Ground Stud
Input power terminal block
Strain Relief Hardware
Input Power Cord
Equipotential ground wire
11. On the left fuse panel, disconnect F22 and GB4; note locations.
12. On the left side of the Power Distribution Assembly, disconnect in-line connector LPP2,
and remove cable ties as necessary.
5-40
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Electrical Power Components and Assemblies
13. On the Power Distribution board, disconnect connector ACJ11.
14. At the front of the Gantry, locate the Harness Assembly which is cable tied to the lower
tray above the Power Distribution Assembly. Disconnect all cables from this Harness
Assembly which are connected to the Power Distribution board and the Right Fuse
Panel; note locations.
15. From the front of the Gantry, disconnect the two ground wires connected to GB1 located
at the rear of the Power Distribution Assembly.
16. Remove the two bolts securing the Power Distribution Assembly to the Gantry base
plate; see Figure 5-37, p. 5-37.
17. Carefully slide the Power Distribution Assembly forward and out of the Gantry frame.
18. Reverse procedures to install new Power Distribution Assembly.
19. Inspect for indications of an electrical malfunction.
8.6
Power Supply Interconnect Board
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of hazardous electrical shock, do not
attempt service until Red LED D14 on the HV board is unlit
and at least 5 minutes have elapsed after turning off the
equipment.
The Power Supply Interconnect Board distributes power to assemblies located on the left side
of the Gantry door. Refer to Figure 5-36, p. 5-36, for location of board.
1. Shut down the system and switch circuit breaker to the Off position.
2. Open the left side Gantry door. See Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
3. Disconnect the harness connectors from the Power Supply Interconnect board; note
locations.
4. Lift the board off of the mounting standoffs.
5. Reverse procedures to replace the Power Supply Interconnect board.
6. Inspect for indications of an electrical malfunction.
7. Perform the following procedures before returning the unit to service:
MAN-00625
•
Power Supply Interconnect Board Adjustment, Chapter 6, Section 16.0, p. 6-60.
•
Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls and Functional Tests", p. 3-9.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1.
5-41
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
9.0
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
9.1
Tubehead Cooling Fan
The tubehead cooling fan mounts to the tubehead frame, on the bulkhead directly behind
the X-ray tube.
1. Turn system Off.
2. Remove the tubehead top cover. See
Section 3.2.1, p. 5-6. Locate the
tubehead cooling fan.
3. Disconnect the fan power cable.
4. Remove all cable ties from the
power cable, then remove the
hardware securing the cooling fan
mounting bracket to the tubehead
frame.
5. Lift out the fan and bracket assembly.
6. If necessary, remove the hardware
that secures the mounting bracket to
the cooling fan.
7. Reverse these steps to install the
replacement cooling fan.
8. Verify fan is operating before
returning to service.
Figure 5-40: Tubehead Cooling Fan
5-42
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
9.2
C-arm Rotation Potentiometer
1. Access the C-arm Rotation Potentiometer by removing the upper rear Gantry panel.
See Section 3.1.4, p. 5-6.
2. Raise the C-arm so the C-arm Rotation
Potentiometer, Figure 5-41 (#2) is
positioned in the Upper Rear Access
Hole (#1).
3. Turn system off.
4. Remove cable ties securing wires to
mounting bracket.
5. Note position of wires on potentiometer
(Pins 1, 2, and 3). Unsolder the wires.
6. Remove two screws securing the
potentiometer mounting bracket (E) to
the VTA. Remove bracket with
potentiometer still attached.
E
7. Note alignment of potentiometer to
mounting bracket.
A
8. Loosen screw (A) on the end of the
potentiometer shaft (B). Remove the
sprocket assembly (C).
Pin 2
9. Remove the hex nut (D) securing the
potentiometer to the mounting bracket.
Slide the potentiometer out of the
bracket.
B D
C
Pin 3
Figure 5-41: C-arm Rotation Potentiometer
Pin 1
10. Reverse Steps 3 through 9 to install the replacement C-arm Rotation Potentiometer.
11. Perform the following procedures:
MAN-00625
•
Rotation Angle Calibration procedures—Chapter 6, Section 14.2, p. 6-54.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
5-43
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
9.3
C-arm Rotation Drive Motor and Gearbox Assembly
1. Remove the upper rear Gantry panel—Section 3.1.4, p. 5-6.
2. Position the C-arm so the C-arm Rotation Drive Motor and Gearbox Assembly,
Figure 5-42, is accessible through the Gantry upper rear access hole—Figure 5-41,
p. 5-43 (#1).
3. Shut down the system.
4. From rear of unit, disconnect the motor power cable from the wiring harness. Cut all
cable ties securing the harness to the motor and gearbox assembly.
See Figure 5-42.
5. On the drive coupling, loosen the
upper coupling screw.
6. Remove the four bolts that mount the
motor and gearbox assembly to the
VTA.
7. Lift assembly shaft out of drive
coupling and remove motor and
gearbox assembly through the
Gantry upper rear access panel.
8. Reverse this procedure to install the
C-arm Rotation Drive Motor and
Gearbox Assembly.
9. Turn system on.
10. Perform the following procedures
before returning unit to service:
•
5-44
Verify the C-arm Rotation Drive
Motor and Gearbox Assembly is
working properly.
•
Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls
and Functional Tests", p. 3-9.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System
Test", p. 7-1.
Figure 5-42: C-arm Rotation Drive Motor and
Gearbox Assembly
Legend for Figure 5-42
1.
2.
3.
4.
Drive coupling
Upper coupling screw
Four bolts holding assembly to VTA
Assembly shaft
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
9.4
C-arm Vertical Drive Motor and Gearbox Assembly
1. Remove the Gantry left front cover—Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
2. Remove the upper rear Gantry panel—Section 3.1.4, p. 5-6.
3. Position the C-arm so the C-arm Vertical Drive Motor and Gearbox Assembly,
Figure 5-43, is accessible through the Gantry upper rear access hole, Figure 5-41,
p. 5-43 (#1).
4. Shut down the system.
5. From the rear of the unit, disconnect the motor power cable from the wiring harness. Cut
all cable ties securing the harness to the motor and gearbox assembly.
See Figure 5-43:
6. From front left side of unit, at bottom
of C-arm drive pulley coupler,
remove the two hex head bolts.
7. Reinsert them in the other threaded
holes (between where they were).
8. Alternately tighten the bolts until the
machine lock is broken and the
coupler and drive pulley can be
removed from the assembly shaft.
Remove the bolts. (Do not re-install
screws in these holes when
installing the C-arm Vertical Drive
Motor and Gearbox Assembly.)
9. Remove coupler, drive pulley and
key, taking care not to drop the key.
Note pulley position and key-way
orientation. As pulley is removed,
the belt may fall to the bottom of the
unit around the lead screw
(Figure 5-4, p. 5-4). Set coupler,
drive pulley, and key aside.
10. From rear of unit, remove the four
bolts that mount the motor and
gearbox assembly to the VTA.
11. Reverse this procedure to install the
C-arm Vertical Drive Motor and
Gearbox Assembly. Ensure the
following:
Figure 5-43: C-arm Vertical Drive Motor and
Gearbox Assembly
Legend for Figure 5-43
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C-arm drive pulley coupler
Drive pulley
Assembly shaft
Key
Mounting bolts (Assembly to VTA)
•
Belt is positioned around the C-arm drive pulley and the lead screw nut pulley prior
to tightening the two C-arm drive pulley hex head bolts.
•
Pulley is positioned and key way is aligned with drive shaft as noted in Step 8 above.
•
Key is installed.
12. Perform the following procedures before returning unit to service:
MAN-00625
•
Verify the C-arm Rotation Drive Motor and Gearbox Assembly is working properly.
•
Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls and Functional Tests", p. 3-9.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1.
5-45
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
9.5
Compression Thickness Potentiometer
The Compression Thickness Potentiometer mounts to the left side bulkhead of the
Compression Device frame. See Figure 5-44.
1. Shut down the system.
2. Remove the top and bottom Compression Device covers—Section 3.2.3, p. 5-7.
3. Remove the Image Receptor—
Section 6.2, p. 5-15.
4. Remove the lower bellows
assembly—Section 3.1.3, p. 5-5.
5. Loosen two hex screws securing
the Compression Timing Belt to
the Bearing Block Assembly.
Remove timing belt from the
bottom clamp.
6. Gently thread timing belt up and
out of the pulleys.
Compression
Timing Belt
7. Inspect timing belt. If damaged,
Bottom Clamp
order new belt and replace,
Bearing Block
Section 9.8, p. 5-50.
Assembly
Figure 5-44: Compression Timing Belt
8. Loosen the clamp screw (A) on the
end of the potentiometer (B) shaft.
Remove the clamp and the
sprocket (C) together.
9. Remove the hex nut (D) that
secures the potentiometer to the
mounting bracket (E). Slide the
potentiometer off the bracket.
10. Unsolder the three wires’
connections (white, red, and black)
from the pins on the potentiometer
(Pins 1-3). Note the color of the
wire for each pin.
11. Reverse steps 3 through 10 to
install the replacement
potentiometer.
Figure 5-45: Compression Thickness Potentiometer
12. Perform Chapter 6, "Compression Thickness Potentiometer Mechanical Adjustment",
p. 6-59 before performing steps 13 through 15.
13. Reinstall the lower bellows assembly.
14. Reinstall the Compression Device Assembly upper and lower covers.
15. Reinstall the Image Receptor.
16. Turn the system on.
5-46
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
17. Perform the following procedures before returning unit to service:
•
•
•
•
9.6
Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls and Functional Tests", p. 3-9.
Chapter 6, "Compression Force Calibration", p. 6-60
Chapter 6, "Compression Thickness Potentiometer Calibration", p. 6-59
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1.
Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly
The Compression Device houses a clutch and clutch brake assembly. The clutch brake
prevents Compression Device backlash after motorized compression; the clutch stops
manual compression before the maximum compression force is exceeded.
Refer to Figure 5-46 during this procedure.
9.6.1
Remove the Clutch Assembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
9.6.2
Shut system down.
Remove the top and bottom Compression Device covers—Section 3.2.3, p. 5-7.
Loosen the set screws that secure the right side compression knob to the clutch shaft.
Slide the knob off the shaft.
Loosen the screws that secure the locking bar to the clutch shaft.
Slide the clutch shaft out of the Compression Device from the left side.
Lift the clutch, the armature, and the brass spacer from the Compression Device.
If it is only necessary to replace the clutch, skip the next procedure.
Replace the Clutch Brake
1.
Remove screws securing clutch brake to the left side Compression Device frame.
2. Remove the clutch brake harness connector from the main harness.
Figure 5-46: Compression Clutch and Clutch Brake Assembly
Legend for Figure 5-46
1.
Clutch Shaft
5.
Clutch
2.
3.
Armature
Force Load Sensor
6.
7.
Locking Bar
Brass Spacer
4.
Right Compression Knob 8.
Clutch Brake
3. Install the replacement clutch brake and tighten the mounting screws.
4. Connect the clutch brake harness to the main wiring harness.
MAN-00625
5-47
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
9.6.3
Replace the Clutch
1. Slide the clutch shaft into the Compression Device from the left side the shaft
end protrudes through the opening in the clutch brake.
2. Slide the brass spacer, raised edge first, over the shaft and into the brake.
3. Place the armature on the end of the replacement clutch, machined side toward
the brake.
4. Slide the clutch shaft through the clutch, then out the opposite side of the
Compression Device.
5. Install the previously removed knob and tighten the set screws.
9.6.4
Adjust the Assembly
1. Adjust the clutch shaft by sliding it back and forth until both knobs are equal
distances from the sides of the Compression Device. The shaft should protrude
2.625 in. from the load cell.
2. Place a 0.015" feeler gauge (or shim stock) between the armature and the clutch
brake. Spread the clutch mechanism so that the clutch sprocket is pressed firmly
against the chain gears (at right), and that the armature is pressed against the
feeler gauge.
3. Tighten the locking bar mounting hardware.
4. Remove the feeler gauge. Verify that the gap between the armature and the
clutch is 0.25 mm (minimum) to 0.51 mm (maximum) (0.010 in. to 0.020 in.).
Verify that there is no left-to-right “play” in the clutch.
5. Reinstall the covers.
6. Verify compression movement functions correctly, Chapter 3, "Selenia Controls
and Functional Tests", p. 3-9.
7. Perform Chapter 6, "Compression Thickness Potentiometer Calibration", p. 6-59.
5-48
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
9.7
Compression Motor and Motor Brake
The Compression Motor drives the compression chain through a series of gears to move the
Compression Device up or down. The Compression Motor Brake holds the chain in place to
prevent a decrease in compression force from slippage.
9.7.1
Access the Compression Motor and Brake
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the Image Receptor—Section 6.2, p. 5-15.
3. Remove the top and bottom compression device covers—Section 3.2.3, p. 5-7.
4. From the bottom of the C-arm, locate, unscrew and remove the two bellows
rods (1 on each side).
5. Remove three screws securing the upper bellows assembly to the C-arm subframe. Carefully remove assembly.
6. Remove the lower tubehead enclosure—Section 3.2.1, p. 5-6.
7. Remove the Tubehead Microprocessor and the Tubehead Motor Driver Board—
Section 7.9, p. 5-28.
8. Manually move the Compression Device to center it on the C-arm.
9.7.2
Remove the Compression Motor
1. Disconnect the master link on the drive chain, then remove the drive chain from
around the Compression Motor sprocket.
2. Disconnect the input power wires from the rear of the compression motor. Note
the polarity for replacement purposes.
3. Remove the two screws
that secure the
compression motor
bracket to the C-arm
frame.
4. Pull the compression
motor and brake out of
the C-arm as an
assembly.
5. Loosen the set screws
that secure the motor
shaft to the motor
sprocket.
6. Pull the brake, with the
sprocket, off the motor
shaft.
7. Remove the screws that
fasten the compression Figure 5-47: Compression Motor and Motor Brake
motor to the mounting
Legend for Figure 5-47
bracket.
1.
2.
3.
4.
MAN-00625
Motor shaft set screws
Compression motor bracket
Compression motor bracket screws (two)
C-arm frame
5-49
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
9.7.3
Replace the Compression Motor and Brake Assembly
1. Mount the replacement motor onto the bracket.
2. Reverse these procedures to install the replacement compression drive motor
and brake assembly.
3. Perform the procedures below before releasing the unit to the user:
9.8
•
Chapter 6, "Compression Force Calibration", p. 6-60
•
Chapter 6, "Compression Thickness Potentiometer Calibration", p. 6-59
•
Chapter 6, "Compression Chain Tension Adjustment", p. 6-58
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1.
Timing Belt
Perform this procedure only if the compression timing belt has been damaged.
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the top and bottom Compression Device covers—Section 3.2.3, p. 5-7.
3. Remove the Image Receptor—Section 6.2, p. 5-15.
4. Remove the lower bellows assembly—Section 3.1.3, p. 5-5.
5. Loosen two allen hex screws securing Compression Timing Belt to the Bearing Block
Assembly.
6. Remove timing belt from the bottom clamp.
7. Gently thread timing belt up and out of
the pulleys.
8. Loosen the two screws securing the
timing belt in the upper clamp block
(Figure 5-48, #1).
9. Remove the belt and discard it.
10. Insert the new timing belt through the
upper clamp on the Tubehead Support
Plate.
11. Apply Blue Loctite 242 and retighten
screws.
Figure 5-48: Timing Belt
12. Perform the procedures below before releasing the unit to the user:
9.9
•
Chapter 6, "Compression Thickness Potentiometer Mechanical Adjustment", p. 6-59.
•
Chapter 6, "Compression Thickness Potentiometer Calibration", p. 6-59.
•
Chapter 7, "Standard System Test", p. 7-1
Force Load Cell
9.9.1
Remove the Force Load Cell
1. Shut the system down.
2. Remove the top compression device cover, Section 3.2.3, p. 5-7.
3. Take both bottom screws out that hold the load cell to the bottom plate; see
Figure 5-49.
4. Loosen the set screws that secure the right side compression knob to the clutch
shaft.
5-50
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
Figure 5-49: Removing the Force Load Cell
5. Slide the knob off the shaft.
6. Loosen the screws that secure the locking bar to the clutch shaft.
7. Slide the clutch shaft out of the compression Device from the left side and note
the position and orientation of all parts removed from the assembly.
8. Remove the load cell from the compression device by removing the two hexhead screws. The spring wrap in the side pulls the load cell up.
9. Remove the gear on the load cell housing, holding it with the chain attached, in
your left hand and slide the load cell off with the right.
9.9.2
Replace the Force Load Cell
1. While still holding the gear and chain, slide the new wire for the load cell in
between the chain loop and place the new load cell on the bottom plate.
2. Reinstall the top screw on the new load cell into the Compression device.
3. Tilt the load cell to outside slightly and reinstall the socket gear with the chain
loop, using the original hardware.
4. Push the load cell down into the lower half, and reinstall both screws in the
lower plate.
5. Put in the bottom screw that fastens the load cell to the compression device.
6. Slide the compression clutch shaft into the load cell and test to see if it slides
smoothly. If not, loosen the lower screws and adjust until it is smooth.
7. Re-assemble the compression clutch and brake assembly and adjust following
steps 12 through 21 in Section 9.6, p. 5-47.
8. Turn on the system.
9. Carefully move the compression device with the Compression Up and Down
buttons to be sure the compression device moves. If not reverse procedures and
adjust.
10. To calibrate the Force Load Cell, perform the following procedures:
•
Chapter 6, "Setting—Force Load Cell", p. 6-58.
•
Chapter 6, "Compression Force Calibration", p. 6-60
•
Chapter 6, "Compression Thickness Potentiometer Calibration", p. 6-59
11. Reinstall the compression device covers.
MAN-00625
5-51
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5—Gantry Maintenance
Replacing Mechanical Components and Assemblies
5-52
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Introduction
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
1.0
Introduction
This chapter provides adjustments and calibrations for the system components.
2.0
Warning:
Service engineers must take appropriate radiation safety measures
when testing (or maintaining) the unit.
Caution:
Always observe Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) precautions when working
with electronics and electronic components.
Note…
When servicing the Selenia, if a procedure instructs you to remove any
covers or panels, do not reinstall the covers until all required procedures
(for example, calibrations, adjustments, tests, remove and replace, etc.) are
completed.
AWS Adjustments and Calibrations
2.1
Display Control and Function Adjustments
Hologic recommends using the auto-adjustment
feature. If necessary, activate the on-screen display
menu by rotating the Control Dial.
Control Dial
The following adjustments can be made using the onscreen display menu. See Table 6-1.
Figure 6-1: Display Control
Table 6-1: Display Adjustments Using Control Dial
Control Dial Movement
Action
Rotate clockwise
Move Up/Right, Increase, Larger, More
Rotate counterclockwise
Button Press
Move Down/Left, Decrease, Smaller, Less
Execute, Do, Save
The main menu displays a list of submenu icons:
•
•
•
•
MAN-00625
Auto Setup
Display Mode
Brightness
Clock/Phase
•
•
•
•
Contrast
Management
Display— Horizontal/Vertical position control
EXIT
6-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AWS Adjustments and Calibrations
Procedures for adjusting the Brightness, Contrast, and Position controls are described next.
Display mode, Clock/Phase, and Management controls are factory set and do not need
adjustment.
Caution:
2.1.1
Do not make any brightness and/or contrast adjustments to the display
unless the SMPTE test pattern is on the screen.
Setting Display Brightness
1. From the AWS, select Admin>Test Patterns. Select SMPTE in the Pattern field.
2. Click Preview to display the full screen.
3. Press the control dial and select Brightness on the on-screen display menu.
4. Use the control dial to make adjustments to the luminosity level of the display
screen in the scale of 0 to 100.
The brightness is changed when the on-screen display menu is off by rotating the
control dial up/down. If this happened, follow the directions above to reset the
brightness correctly.
2.1.2
Setting Display Contrast
1. From the AWS, select Admin>Test Patterns. Select SMPTE in the Pattern field.
2. Click Preview.
3. Press the control dial and Select Contrast on the on-screen display menu.
4. Use the control dial to make adjustments to the contrast level of the display
screen in the scale of 0 to 100.
2.1.3
Setting Display Horizontal/Vertical Position Control
1. Select Display on the on-screen display menu.
2. Select H. Position to adjust the Horizontal Positioning, select V. Position to
adjust the Vertical Positioning.
3. Use the control dial to position the image in the desired position (vertically or
horizontally) on the screen.
4. Click the trackball to leave the full screen display.
5. Click Close to close the test Pattern dialog box.
2.2
Bar Code Reader
If the system is connected to a workflow manager, the Bar Code Reader must be configured
to the appropriate system. For procedures, refer to Chapter 8, AWS Bar Code Reader, p. 8-26.
6-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
How to Set the AWS to Non-Imaging Mode
3.0
How to Set the AWS to Non-Imaging Mode
Setting the AWS to Non-imaging Mode allows the service engineer to take X-rays without
capturing the images.
Set the AWS to Non-imaging Mode prior to performing the following procedures:
•
Reproducibility and Linearity— Section 9.1, p. 6-24
•
Beam Quality Assessment— Section 9.2, p. 6-29
•
Power Supply Interconnect Board Adjustment— Section 16.0, p. 6-60.
•
Tube Current (mA) Adjustment (Half-Value Layer Measurement)— Section 8.5, p. 6-22.
•
Tube Voltage (kV) Adjustment—Section 8.4, p. 6-20.
1.
At the AWS, on the Patient Screen, select the Non-Imaging Mode button. See Figure 6-2, #1.
Figure 6-2: Patient Screen—Selecting Non-Imaging Mode
2. A Warning box, Figure 6-3, appears. Click OK.
Figure 6-3: Non-Imaging Mode Warning Box
MAN-00625
6-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
How to Set the AWS to Non-Imaging Mode
3. The “Non-Imaging Mode” window, Figure 6-4, appears.
Figure 6-4: Non-Imaging Mode Window.
6-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
4.0
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
Equipment Required:
•
•
•
X-ray Field Size Tool (P/N 9-060-0412)
Light Field Alignment Tool (4X)(P/N 9-060-0173)
24x30 Film Cassette with film
Light Field Alignment Test
X-ray Field Size Test
9-060-0412
9-060-0173
cassette
cassette
Figure 6-5: X-ray Field Size and Light Field Alignment Tools
4.1
X-ray Field Alignment Large Focal Spot
1. On the Host Microprocessor Board:
• Turn the rotary switch (S4) to position F.
• S6, Position 4 - On.
• S1 - to save X-ray field DAC value.
• S2 - select collimation blade.
• S3 - decrease X-ray field DAC value.
• S5 - increase X-ray field DAC value.
2. Install the X-ray Field Size Tool (9-060-0412).
3. Install 18x24 paddle. (Do not use FAST paddles.)—See Table 6-2.
Table 6-2: Compression Accessory Sensor Combinations
Paddle
No Paddle Installed
18 x 24 cm
10 cm Magnification
10 cm Perforated Localization
10 cm Rectangular Localization
10 cm Contact
15 cm Magnification
15 cm Perforated Localization
15 cm Rectangular OPEN
Compression 24 x 30 cm
15 cm Contact
7.5 cm Spot Magnification
7.5 cm Contact Spot
Small Breast
Frameless Spot
15 cm Ultrasound
FAST 18 x 24 cm
24 x 30 cm FAST
MAN-00625
Paddle ID
Shifting
X-ray Collimation
000D
001D
002D
003D
004D
005D
006D
007D
008D
009D
011D
012D
014D
016D
017D
018D
019D
020D
N/A
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
24 x 29 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
24 x 29 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
24 x 29 cm
6-5
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Use S2 to select collimation front blade (FC).
Take an X-ray and examine the beam on the tool.
Use S2 and S3 to adjust the front blade to align the designated field zone on the tool.
Repeat Steps 4 - 6 for remaining collimation blades (BC, LC, and RC).
Install the 24 x 30 cassette into the X-ray Field Size Tool.
Expose and develop X-ray films for each required spot size and collimator opening.
Refer to Table 6-4 on p. 6-8.
10. Measure the films in accordance with Table 6-4 on p. 6-8. Ensure the results are in
compliance with the listed specifications.
11. Shift the paddle to the left and repeat Steps 4 through 10.
12. Shift the paddle to the right and repeat Steps 4 through 10.
13. Repeat Steps 4 through 10 for the 24 x 29 Paddle.
14. Record Pass and/or visual inspection results.
15. Repeat for the other paddles.
If screen-film processing is not available, use alternative methods to obtain the same results.
4.2
Light Field Alignment - Large Focal Spot
1. Install the (9-060-0412) X-ray Field Size Tool on the Image Receptor.
2. Using the hardware adjustments on the Collimator Bulb Assembly (see Figure 6-7, p. 611) and the X-Ray Field Size tool, adjust the light field to the designated 18x24 and
24x29 field zones.
3. Place the 24 x 30 cassette on top of the X-ray Field Size Tool.
4. Illuminate the light field lamp and align the center rods of the Light Field Alignment Tool
(9-060-0173) with the light field, one along each edge of the rectangular field on top of
the cassette as illustrated in Figure 6-5, p. 6-5.
5. Expose and develop X-ray films for each required spot size and collimator opening.
6. Measure the films in accordance with Table 6-5 on p. 6-9, and record the results,
ensuring compliance with the specifications listed in the table.
4.3
X-ray Field Alignment - Small Focal Spot
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
6-6
• Turn the rotary switch to position 8.
• S2 - select collimation blade
• S3 - decrease X-ray field DAC value
• S5 - increase X-ray field DAC value
Install the X-ray Field Size Tool / Fixture (9-060-0412) on the Image Receptor.
Install 18x24 Paddle.
Use S2 to select collimation front blade (FC).
Take an X-ray and observe the beam on the template.
Use S2 and S3 to adjust the front blade to align with the designated line on the template.
Repeat Steps 3 - 5 for the remaining collimation blades (BC, LC, and RC).
Install the 24x30 cassette into the Intensifying Screen Template / Fixture.
Expose and develop X-ray films for each required spot size and collimator opening.
Measure the films in accordance with Table 6-4.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
4.4
Light Field Alignment - Small Focal Spot
1. On the Host Microprocessor Board:
•
•
Turn the rotary switch S4 to position F.
Set S6, Position 4 - On
While performing this procedure, use:
•
•
•
•
S1 - to save the light field DAC value
S2 - select collimation blade
S3 - decrease light field DAC value
S5 - increase light field DAC value
2. The X-ray Field Size Tool (9-600-0412) should be on the Image Receptor and no
compression paddle should be installed.
3. The Host Microprocessor Board display reads “dd LC####”, where dd is the aperture
code, L is the Blade (L = Left, R = Right, F = Front, B = Back), C is the shift position (C =
Center, L = Left, R = Right), and #### is the DAC value.
4. Press the aperture button on the tubehead to select the 18 x 24 aperture.
5. Use S3 and S5 to adjust the light field to the designated 18x24 cm field stop. Use S1 to
save the light field DAC value for each collimation blade.
6. Repeat step 4 and 5 for Paddle Code 6 (15 x 15), Paddle Code 2 (10 x 10), and Paddle
Code 14 (7 x 8.5).
Table 6-3: Paddle Codes
FS/Size
Paddle Code
Small / 18 x 24
Small / 10 x 10
1
2
Small / 15 x 15
Small / 7.0 x 8.5
6
14
Small / 18 x 24
0
7. Place a 24x30 cassette on the top of the X-Ray Field Size tool and select the 18 x 24 cm
aperture by pressing the aperture button on the tubehead. Illuminate the light field lamp
and align the center rod of the Light Field Alignment tool (9-060-0173) with the light
field, one along each edge of the rectangular field.
8. Expose and develop X-ray films for each FS size.
9. Measure the films in accordance with Table 6-5 on p. 6-9, and record the results.
Indicate (+) Dimension where light field is larger than the X-ray field and indicate (-)
where light field is smaller than the X-ray field.
MAN-00625
6-7
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
Table 6-4: X-ray Field Size Determination Data Sheet
Collimation/FS/
Shift
18x24/Small/NA
18x24/Large/Center
24x29/Large/NA
18x24/Large/Left
18x24/Large/Right
15x15/Small/NA
10x10/Small/NA
7x8.5/Small/NA
15x15/Large/Center
15x15/Large/Left
6-8
Measurement Location
Specification
(cm)
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
16.4 - 16.7
10.7 - 11.0
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
10.7 - 11.0
0.2 - 0.5
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
16.4 - 16.7
10.7 - 11.0
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
10.7 - 11.0
0.2 - 0.5
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
21.2 - 21.5
13.2 - 13.5
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
13.2 - 13.5
0.2 - 0.5
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
16.4 - 16.7
13.2 - 13.5
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
8.3 - 8.6
0.2 - 0.5
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
16.4 - 16.7
8.3 - 8.6
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
13.2 - 13.5
0.2 - 0.5
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Actual (cm)
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
Table 6-4: X-ray Field Size Determination Data Sheet (Continued)
Collimation/FS/
Shift
15x15/Large/Right
10x10/Large/Center
10x10/Large/Left
10x10/Large/Right
7x8.5/Large/Center
7-8.5/Large/Left
7-8.5/Large/Right
Measurement Location
Specification
(cm)
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Visually Inspect
Left Edge to Center
Right Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Left Edge to Center
Right Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Left Edge to Center
Right Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Left Edge to Center
Right Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Left Edge to Center
Right Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Visually Inspect
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Chest Wall to Rear Edge
Left Edge to Center
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Right Edge to Center
Front Edge to Chest Wall
Visually Inspect
Visually Inspect
Actual (cm)
Indicate (+) Dimension where light field is larger than X-ray field and indicate (-) where light
field is smaller than the X-ray field.
Table 6-5: Light Field Alignment
Collimation/Focal
Spot
Front Edge (chest wall)
Rear Edge
Sum of Front plus Rear
disregarding the sign
Left Edge
Right Edge
Sum of Left plus Right
disregarding the sign
MAN-00625
18 x 24 cm/
Small
18 x 24 cm/
Large
24 x 29 cm/
Large
Max. Dev.
The sum of the Front
plus the Rear edge
(disregarding the sign)
must be less than or
equal to 10 mm.
Sum of Left plus Right
(disregarding the sign)
must be less than or
equal to 10 mm.
6-9
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
4.5
Light Field Illuminance Test and Adjustment
Equipment Required:
• Light Meter
• Metric Hex-head wrench set
Test the intensity and consistency of the Light Field with the following procedure.
D
1. Place a light meter probe at position A
(Figure 6-6) on the Image Receptor with its
sensor facing up.
A
B
2. Take a background light reading, with the
light field lamp off, and record the results in
Table 6-3.
3. Take a light reading with the light field lamp
on and record the results in Table 6-3.
4. Subtract the background lux value from the
illuminated value and record the difference
in Table 6-3.
3mm
3mm
5. Repeat this illuminance test for the
remaining positions (B, C, and D).
6. The difference between the background
reading and the illuminated reading (in any
quadrant) must be 160 lux or greater.
3mm
3mm
1mm dia.
APERTURE
DETECTOR
Figure 6-6: Probe Locations—Light Field Illuminance
Table 6-1: Light Field Illuminance
Quadrant
Meter Reading (Lux)
A Background (Lamp Off)
Illuminated (Lamp On)
Light Field Difference
B Background (Lamp Off)
Illuminated (Lamp On)
Light Field Difference
C Background (Lamp Off)
Illuminated (Lamp On)
Light Field Difference
D Background (Lamp Off)
Illuminated (Lamp On)
Light Field Difference
6-10
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
If the light field illuminance at “A” or “B” does not meet the requirement:
1. Remove the lower tube head cover. Do not touch the lead inside.
2. loosen the two metric, hex-head screws that secure the lamp socket to the lamp cradle.
Note…
The lamp socket mounting screws are metric hex screws.
3. Increase the light field illuminance by adjusting the lamp position within the cradle.
Rotate the lamp and socket together (clockwise or counterclockwise) so that the lamp
filament is parallel with the plane of the mirror.
4. Tighten the screws.
5. Reinstall the tubehead cover, then repeat
the test described in steps 1 through 4 on
p. 6-10.
6. Verify that the length to width ratio of the
light field is not altered.
7. If the test still fails, replace the lamp and
repeat “Light Field Alignment - Large Focal
Spot” on p. 6-6 and “Light Field Alignment
- Small Focal Spot” on p. 6-7.
SCREWS
Figure 6-7: Adjustment—Light Field Illuminance
MAN-00625
6-11
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray and Light Field Compliance
4.6
Light Field Edge Contrast Test
This test ensures the contrast of the lighted X-ray field complies to the performance standard
set forth by FDA 21 CFR Subchapter J. Always perform this test with the ambient light
reduced (darken the room).
Equipment Required:
•
Light Detector Model 268P
•
Light meter (UDT Instruments, Model 351)
•
Aluminum Aperture, 1 mm diameter (or equivalent)
1. Center the probe of a light detector
on the Image Receptor.
2. Place the aluminum aperture directly
on the probe. Position it so that the
aperture is centered on the probe’s
sensor.
3. Turn the room lights off and record
the ambient light reading as IA in
Table 6-6.
4. Place the light detector in area “A” on
the Image Receptor. See Figure 6-8.
5. Orient the center of the probe 3 mm
from the edge of the defined light
field toward the center of the field.
6. Collimate the light probe so that only Figure 6-8: Test—Light Field Edge Contrast
a 1 square centimeter area (near the
center) is visible.
7. Press the light field button.
8. Record the inside lux value (I1).
9. Move the probe 3 mm from the edge of the defined light field away from the center of
the field.
10. Reposition the aluminum filter.
11. Press the light field switch, then record the outside lux reading (I2).
12. Subtract both edge readings from the ambient reading and record each of the
differences:
(IA - I1 = D1 and IA - I2 = D2).
13. Divide the inside difference by the outside difference and record the ratio: (D1 / D2 = R).
14. Repeat the procedure for the remaining light field edges. Place the light meter probe at
positions B, C, and D for these tests. A contrast ratio less than 4 at any edge is cause for
rejection.
Table 6-6: Light field Edge Contrast
Location
6-12
I1
I2
IA
I1-IA
I2-IA
Ratio
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Downloading/Initializing the Selenia Cal Data
5.0
Downloading/Initializing the Selenia Cal Data
1. Connect adapter cable from board KJ26 to the serial port of a pc running HyperTerminal,
Vterm or some other serial communication program. See Appendix B, Section 1.2, p. B-5.
2. Set Serial port settings: 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, no flow control.
5.1
Downloading Calibration Data
1. On the Host Microprocessor Board (see Figure B-1, p. B-1):
a.
Set Rotary switch to Position 0.
b. Set DIP switch S6-1 On, S6-2 On. All others Off.
2. Set DIP switch S6-1 On, S6-2 On. Ensure that all others are Off.
3. Press S1 to download cal data. The data downloads 1 page at a time. There are 20 pages
total, and S1 has to be pressed up to 20 times. Press S1 until all pages are shown on the
laptop screen.
4. Cal Data Download Complete displays when done.
5. Print a hard copy of this data and save with the unit.
6. Alternatively, FTP the files to a folder on your laptop and save them to a CD to leave on
site. Refer to Installation Manual for additional details if necessary.
5.2
Initializing the Cal Data
These procedures load default cal data. This removes all present cal data. Set switches
carefully. This procedure is used when replacing the Host Microprocessor Board Dallas chip.
1. On the Host Microprocessor Board:
a.
Set the Rotary switch to Position 0.
b. Set DIP switch S6-4 On, S6-8 On.
2. Press the following switches together to initialize cal data:
S1, S2: system defaults
S1, S3: tubehead defaults
S1, S5: filament defaults
S2, S3: TEC defaults
S3, S5: motor defaults
Note…
MAN-00625
Host Microprocessor Board displays “CAL INIT”
Host Microprocessor Board displays “TH INIT”
Host Microprocessor Board displays “FIL INIT”
Host Microprocessor Board displays “TEC INIT”
Host Microprocessor Board displays “MOT INIT”
After performing this procedure, you must recalibrate the entire system or
use the saved data from the file that was downloaded from the Host
Microprocessor Board.
6-13
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Image Receptor Calibration Procedures
6.0
Image Receptor Calibration Procedures
6.1
Image Receptor Retract Calibration
Note…
The carbon filter cover must be removed for visual inspection.
Caution:
Be careful not to touch the grid.
If the grid retract mechanism is binding, perform the following:
1. Open the right side Gantry door.
2. On the Host Microprocessor Board (See Figure B-1, p. B-1):
a.
Set DIP switch S6
•
position 4 to On
•
position 8 to Off.
b. Set rotary switch S4 to position “A”.
3. Using S1, S2, S3, and S5, located at the top of the Host Microprocessor Board, adjust the
distance the grid moves before it retracts.
•
S5 is used to decrement the count from +99 to -99. The count rolls over from -99 to
+99.
•
S3 is used to increment the count from -99 to +99. The count rolls over from +99 to
-99.
•
S2 and S1, pressed simultaneously, transmit the count to the Image Receptor.
•
The count sent to the Image Receptor is added to the default count in the firmware.
4. Each time the new count is sent to the driver board, the grid moves to the new retract
position for 5 seconds and then moves back to the home position. This is done so that
the new retract position can be visually verified as being centered. There must be a
minimum of 0.02” (0.5 mm) of clearance between the grid and the nylon bumpers on
both side of the grid.
5. On the Host Microprocessor Board, set DIP switch S6 position 4 and position 8 to Off.
6. Press S2 to retract grid and inspect for mechanical interference. If interference exists,
press S1 to move the grid in. Repeat the procedure until no interference exists.
6-14
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Image Receptor Calibration Procedures
6.2
Image Receptor Gridlines Test
Perform this procedure any time the Image Receptor is replaced or upon report of grid
patterns appearing on the images. Be sure the Auto Release is set to manual.
Use the Gain Calibration to perform the following steps:
1. Set Auto-Release to manual.
2. Position C-arm at 0°.
3. Place 4.0 cm of BEM (use Phantom PN 1-04981) on the breast platform.
4. Hold the attenuation phantom in place with the 24x29 paddle, but don’t seat it all the
way into the compression device.
5. Set the unit for a manual mode exposure at large focal spot, Moly filter, 28 kV, 40 mAs.
6. Acquire an image, and examine for grid pattern.
7. Reject the image when asked to ‘Accept or Reject Image’.
8. Set the unit for a manual mode exposure at large focal spot, Moly filter, 23 kV, 200 mAs.
9. Acquire an image, and examine for grid pattern.
10. Reject the image when asked to ‘Accept or Reject Image’
11. Set the unit for a manual mode exposure at large focal spot, Moly filter, 20 kV, 300 mAs.
12. Acquire an image, and examine for grid pattern.
13. Reject the image when asked to ‘Accept or Reject Image’.
14. Position C-arm at -90°. Repeat Steps 5 through 13.
15. Position C-arm at +90°. Repeat Steps 5 through 13.
16. If grid patterns are present on any exposure, perform the Image Receptor Gridlines
Calibration procedure in Section 6.3.
6.3
Image Receptor Gridlines Calibration
1. Delete the Calibration File:
a. At the AWS, on the desktop, open the File Manager.
b. Select /opt/linx_mp/data.
c. List the files.
d. Find and delete the calibration file, for example, MPxxxx.cal or MMxxxx.cal (for
some newer arrays).
e. Reboot the AWS.
2. On the Host Microprocessor Board (See Figure B-1, p. B-1):
a.
Set DIP switch S6
•
position 4 to On
•
position 8 to Off.
b. Set rotary switch S4 to position “A”.
3. Using S1, S2, S4 and S5, adjust the distance the grid moves during an exposure:
• S5 is used to decrement the count from +21 to -21. The count rolls over from -21 to +21.
• S3 is used to increment the count from -21 to +21.
• Press S1 and S2 simultaneously to transmit the count to the Image Receptor.
• The count sent to the Image Receptor is added to the default count in the Image
Receptor firmware.
4. Adjust the count in increments of 2.
MAN-00625
6-15
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Exposure Timing Parameters
5. After each increment, acquire an image in cal mode using 28 kV, 40 mAs but do not
accept them. Determine if the grid patterns decreased or increased.
6. Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until the grid lines are decreased to the lowest level.
7. Repeat Image Receptor Gridlines Test and Calibration procedures as necessary.
8. When gridlines are no longer present, examine the images for bad pixels.
a. If there are no bad pixels, calibrate the Image Receptor as described in Section 6.4.
b. If bad pixels are present, perform pixel mapping. See Chapter 8, Section 10.0, p. 8-6.
6.4
Gain Calibration
1. On the Select a Patient Screen main menu, select Admin>Calibrate.
2. Follow the instructions which appear on the screen.
Caution:
6.5
Image Quality Verification
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7.0
When calibrating the system, ensure that you follow all screen
instructions, especially the requirement of rebooting the system after
performing a calibration.
Place the 4.0 cm Acrylic block on the Image Receptor.
Set the techniques to 28 kV, 30 mAs, large focal spot, Moly.
Acquire an image.
Examine for artifacts (gridlines, white/black spots, etc.). Do not accept the images.
Repeat for 60 mAs and 120 mAs.
Exposure Timing Parameters
7.1
DETECTOR_READY Time-out Adjustment
Caution:
Only adjust if necessary to accommodate new detector sequence files.
1. On Host Microprocessor Board:
•
•
•
Set DIP switch S6-4 On
Set DIP switch S6-8 On
Set Rotary Switch S4 to position B
The Host Microprocessor Board display should now show: “D_RDY #“where # is the
delay time in seconds. (the default time should be 14).
2. Set the delay time to 14 if necessary.
3. Press push buttons S2 or S3 to increase/decrease the time. The adjustable range is 4 to
15 seconds.
6-16
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Exposure Timing Parameters
7.2
Brick Bypass Mode
In Bypass mode, the Selenia makes exposures without waiting for control signals and
commands from the Brick. This mode can be used to test the operation of the Gantry when
the Brick is not functioning or you do not have the array yet.
Note…
This mode must be disabled when in normal operating mode or in “nonimaging” mode.
To bypass the Brick and Array:
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
•
Set DIP switch S7-2 On
Selenia ignores DETECTOR_READY
•
Set DIP switch S7-3 On
Selenia ignores Brick message blocks
•
Set DIP switch S7-8 On
Selenia ignores Brick Ready/Standby signals
•
Set DIP switch S7-6 On
HTC Grid is disabled
Note…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
At the end of these calibration/debug procedures, be sure to return DIP
switches S6 and S7 back to Off.
Log on as apps.
Wait for all the tasks to come on.
Double-click the Task Launcher icon.
Click the KILL ALL button. Wait for all tasks to stop.
In the Terminal Window type cd /opt/users/dr then press Return.
6. In the same Terminal Window, type aeccal.sh then press Return.
Figure 6-9: Positioning of Terminal and Form1 Windows
7. Position AEC Calibration Tool and Form1 windows so they are all visible as shown in
Figure 6-9.
8. Use the generator control panel in Form1 to operate the system.
9. When finished, reset the DIP switches to Off.
10. Reboot the system using reboot.
MAN-00625
6-17
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray System Adjustments and Calibrations
8.0
X-ray System Adjustments and Calibrations
8.1
Tube Bias Verification
1. Set Selenia to calibration mode (Host Microprocessor Board, S6 switch 4 = On)
2. Set the Host Microprocessor Board for the Tube Bias adjustment:
•
S4 Rotary to position 4,
•
S6 switch 8 = Off.
•
Host Microprocessor Board display U25 indicates “BIAS dd” if in large focal spot
and “bias dd” if in small focal spot where dd is the bias (1 to 10).
3. Select the large focal spot, then set it to 5 by increasing (S5) or decreasing (S3) the value.
4. Select the small focal spot, then set it to 5 by increasing (S5) or decreasing (S3) the value.
5. If it was necessary to change the setting, press Save (S1).
6. Set Switch S6 and S7 back to Off.
Table 6-7: Tube Bias Values
VARIAN (Both Spots)
1 = -3 V
2 = -3 V
3 = -3 V
4 = -4 V
5 = -5 V
6 = -6 V
7 = -7 V
8 = -8 V
9 = -9 V
10 = -10 V
6-18
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray System Adjustments and Calibrations
8.2
HV Control Board Over-Current/Over-Voltage Adjustment
1. Open the left side Gantry door. See Chapter 5, Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
2. Turn system on and log on to the AWS as apps.
3. On the HV Control board (Figure 6-10, p. 6-19, #4), connect a voltmeter to TP8 (+) and
TP24 (-).
4. Confirm that the small focal spot over-current reading matches the value in Table 6-8.
Table 6-8: HV Control Board Over-Current / Over-Voltage Adjustment
Function
Small Tube—Over-Current
Test Point Ground Adjust
Voltage
TP8 (+)
TP24 (-)
R33
1.8 VDC
Large Tube—Over-Current TP9 (+)
Inverter—Over-Current
TP2 (+)
TP24 (-)
TP24 (-)
R32
R3
6.0 VDC
8.5 VDC
Tube—Over-Voltage
TP24 (-)
R6
11.0 VDC
TP1 (+)
5. Adjust the potentiometer as required.
6. Connect the voltmeter to TP9 (+) and TP24 (-). Confirm that the large focal spot overcurrent reading matches the value in Table 6-8. Adjust the potentiometer as required.
7. Connect the voltmeter to TP2 (+) and TP24 (-). Confirm that the inverter over-current
reading matches the value in Table 6-8 on p. 6-19. Adjust the potentiometer as required.
8. Connect the voltmeter to TP1 (+) and TP24 (-). Confirm that the tube over-voltage
reading matches the value in Table 6-8. Adjust the potentiometer as required.
Legend for Figure 6-10
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
HV Transformer (part of HV
Generator Assembly)
HV Multiplier Board (part of
HV Generator Assembly)
HV Inverter Board (part of HV
Generator Assembly)
HV Control Board (part of HV
Generator Assembly)
Generator Microprocessor
Board
Filament Control Board
Rotor Control Board
Figure 6-10: Gantry—Doors Open
MAN-00625
6-19
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray System Adjustments and Calibrations
8.3
Filament Control Board Over-Current/Over-Voltage Adjustment
1. Open the left side Gantry door if not already open. See Chapter 5, Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
2. Turn system on if not already on.
3. On the Filament Control board (Figure 6-10, p. 6-19), connect a voltmeter to TP17 (+)
and TP7 (-). Verify that the small filament over-current reading matches the value for the
tube, as shown in Table 6-9. Adjust the potentiometer as required.
4. Connect the voltmeter to TP16 (+) and TP7 (-). Verify the large filament over-current reading
matches the tube value, as shown in Table 6-9. Adjust the potentiometer as required.
5. Connect the voltmeter to TP8 (+) and TP7 (-). Verify that the filament over-voltage
reading matches the value for the tube, as shown in Table 6-9. Adjust the potentiometer
as required.
6. Remove the test equipment.
Table 6-9: Filament Control Board Over-Current / Over-Voltage Adjustment
Test
Point
Ground
Small Filament—Over-Current
TP17 (+)
TP7 (-)
R45
6.0 VDC
Large Filament—Over-Current
Filament—Over-Voltage
TP16 (+)
TP8 (+)
TP7 (-)
TP7 (-)
R44
R20
6.0 VDC
12.5 VDC
Function
8.4
Adjust
Voltage
Tube Voltage (kV) Calibration
This procedure sets the HV Generator Assembly so that the actual kV produced matches the
kV selected/indicated.
Required equipment:
•
•
•
•
an invasive high voltage divider
a digital voltmeter
coaxial cable and BNC to banana plug
an adapter cable to connect the divider to the test receptacle on the unit’s HV Generator
Warning:
X-ray exposures are made during this test. Observe all safety
precautions while making X-ray exposures.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of hazardous electrical shock, do not
attempt service until the LED (D14) on the HV Inverter board
is extinguished (this takes approximately 5 minutes). Once the
LED is extinguished, do not proceed until an additional 1
minute has elapsed.
1. Ensure that the system is off.
2. Set Selenia to calibration mode (Host Microprocessor board, S6 switch 4 = On) if not
previously done.
3. Connect a DC voltmeter to the low voltage terminals of a 1,000:1 Voltage Divider.
Position the meter where it can be read from behind the radiation shield.
See Figure 6-11, p. 6-21.
6-20
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray System Adjustments and Calibrations
4. Using a coaxial cable and a BNC to banana plug splitter, connect a digital voltmeter to
the anode terminal of the Voltage Divider.
5. Connect the ground terminal of the Voltage
Divider to chassis ground on the Gantry.
HV Test
Well
6. Connect one end of the high voltage adapter cable
into the Voltage Divider receptacle and the
opposite end into the HV test well on the HV
Generator Assembly. Ensure the adapter cable is
firmly seated.
7. Turn on the system and log on to the AWS as apps.
8. Set the AWS to Non-imaging mode. Refer to “How
to Set the AWS to Non-Imaging Mode” on p. 6-3 if
necessary.
9. Set the exposure factors for manual mode and
large focal spot.
Figure 6-11: Tube Voltage Calibration
10. Using the Tube Voltage Potential (kV) Data Sheet, Table 6-10, make an exposure at the
28 kV, 300 mAs setting and record the meter reading.
Table 6-10: Tube Voltage Potential (kV) Data Sheet
kV
mAs
Setting
Meter Reading
Tube Voltage
(kV)
Minimum
Permitted kV
Maximum
Permitted kV
20
220
19.60
20.40
25
300
24.50
25.50
28
300
27.40
28.60
35
240
34.30
35.70
39
200
38.22
39.78
11. Confirm that the meter reading falls into the range shown in Table 6-10.
12. If the voltage reading is more than 2% of the kV setting, adjust R18 on the HV Control
board (clockwise to increase, counterclockwise to decrease).
13. Repeat the adjustment and exposure as necessary to achieve the required voltage
reading.
14. Make an exposure for the remaining kV and mAs settings shown in Table 6-10, and
confirm the meter readings are within 2% of their kV settings. For 39 kV, set the filter to
Rhodium.
Note…
It may be necessary to adjust R18 so that the voltage reading for the 28 kV
exposure is within 1% of the kV setting to ensure that the remaining kV
levels fall within the 2% tolerance shown in Table 6-10. Re-verify the mA
output if R18 is adjusted.
15. Shut down the system. Remove the test equipment.
MAN-00625
6-21
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray System Adjustments and Calibrations
8.5
Tube Current (mA) Adjustment
The unit selects and regulates X-ray tube current as a function of kV.
Warning:
8.5.1
Observe all safety precautions while acquiring an exposure.
Set up the System for the Test
1. Shut down the system if necessary.
2. Set the system to calibration mode (Host
Microprocessor Board, S6 switch 4 = On).
See Figure 5-1, p. 5-2 for location of
boards.
3. Connect a Digital Multimeter (set to read
millivolts) across R74 (TP 31 and TP 24)
on the Filament Control board (primary
filament current). See Figure 4.
4. Connect Channel 1 of a storage
oscilloscope to TP4 on the HV Control
board. Connect the probe ground to TP17
on the HV Control board.
LED
5. Locate the two position banana jack on
the HV Multiplier board. Remove the
jumper bar and plug in an mAs meter.
Caution:
Never operate the system without
either the jumper bar or a mAs meter
installed into the mA/mAs meter
“banana” jack.
6. Turn on the system.
7. Log on to the application as apps.
8. Position the meters where they can be
read from behind the radiation shield.
8.5.2
Evaluate the Standby Current
1. Record the voltage reading on the meter
connected across R74.
2. Verify that the product is between 240 260 millivolts (indicating the standby
current). If not, adjust R87 on the Filament
Control board.
LEDs
Figure 6-12: Banana Jack and Test Points
3. Disconnect the meter across R74 on the Filament Control board.
4. Set the AWS to Non-imaging mode.
6-22
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
X-ray System Adjustments and Calibrations
8.5.3
Test the System at 100mAs
1. Select Edit>Standard Setup>Set Technique Defaults, and set the mAs mode to
MODE 2 (59 mAs levels).
2. Set the unit for a manual mode exposure at 25 kV, large focal spot, 100 mAs.
3. Make an exposure.
4. Refer to the mAs meter connected in 3.4.1, step 5. Verify that the mAs reading
on the meter is between 96 and 104 mAs (+ 5 mAs). If not, adjust R20 on the
HV Control board for 100 mAs + 5 mAs.
8.5.4
Test Filament Preheat Values and Make Adjustments (100mA test)
1. Set the oscilloscope to acquire and store a single sweep:
Trigger:
Vertical:
Horizontal:
Channel
DC Volts 0.2/division (small focus)
DC Volts 0.5/division (large focus)
20 milliseconds, Single Sweep
2. Set the unit for manual mode exposure at 20 kV, 40 mAs. The Host board
displays “FIL=####”
3. Press X-ray switches and examine the acquired waveform.
4. Examine the waveform 10 ms (0.01 sec.) into the X-ray or just behind the boost
spike from the leading edge of the waveform for undershoot or overshoot. A
reference waveform is shown in Figure 6-13.
5. If undershoot or overshoot exists, set the Host Microprocessor for Filament
Calibration (S4 to position 2, S6 switch 8 = Off). Press S5 to increase (for
undershoot) or press S3 to decrease (for overshoot) the displayed value. The
Objective is to ensure the waveform is flat from 10 ms and greater.
Figure 6-13: Waveform Patterns
6. Make another exposure and inspect the waveform again for undershoot or
overshoot each time you make an adjustment.
7. Repeat the adjustments and exposures until the waveform is stable.
8. Advance to the next kV station (21 kV).
9. Repeat the exposures and adjustments as per steps 3 to 7.
10. Continue advancing through the kV stations for the large focal spot until all kV
stations have been adjusted, 20 kV to 39 kV.
MAN-00625
6-23
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compliance Tests—System Level
8.5.5
Test the System for Each Available mAs Station
1. Repeat Steps 3 to 10 in Section 8.5.4 at each available mAs station (60, 30,
20,10).
a.
Set mAs to 28. Host board displays “fr4=####” where #### is the 60 mA
filament DAC value. Repeat Steps 3 to 10.
b. Set mAs to 14. Host board reads "htc=####" where ### is the 30 mA
filament DAC value. Repeat Steps 3 to 10.
c.
Set mAs to 8. Host board displays “fr2=####” where #### is the 20 mA
filament DAC value. Repeat Steps 3 to 10.
d. Set mAs to 4. Host board displays “fr3=####” where #### is the 10 mA
filament DAC value. Repeat Steps 3 to 10.
8.5.6
Test the Small Focal Spot
1. Set mAs to 16. Repeat Steps 3 to 10 in Section 8.5.4, p. 6-23 for 20 to 39 kV for
small focal spot.
2. When complete, turn off the system.
3. If not going on to the next procedure, set the Host Microprocessor Board for
normal operation (S6 switch 4 = Off).
4.
9.0
Remove all test equipment and replace the banana jack shorting bar.
Compliance Tests—System Level
9.1
Reproducibility and Linearity
The following test verifies that the X-ray system is operating within the reproducibility and
linear requirements of 21 CFR. Failure to meet these performance standards indicates the
need to examine the HV Generator and X-ray tube calibration.
Warning:
Observe all safety precautions while making an exposure.
Required equipment:
•
•
•
Calibrated mammographic ionization meter and electrometer (MR Meter and small
Probe) as per the 1999 ACR Mammography Quality Control Manual, Beam Quality
Assessment section. (RadCal or Victoreen)
Lead apron
Copies of Table 6-11, Table 6-12, and Table 6-13.
9.1.1
Reproducibility
1. Set the AWS to Non-imaging mode. Refer to Section 3.0, p. 6-3 if necessary.
2. Place a lead apron over the Image Receptor.
3. Connect a 10 cm2 radiation probe to a dosimeter, then set the meter to read
milliroentgens. Position the meter so it can be read from behind the radiation
shield.
6-24
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compliance Tests—System Level
4. Select manual collimation, then illuminate the light field. Limit the field to the
approximate size of the probe, then center the probe’s detector in the X-ray
field. Align the surface of the probe so it is perpendicular to the beam axis.
5. Set the unit for manual mode exposure at 28 kV, 60 mAs, large focal spot. Select
the Mo filter and make an exposure. Record the milliroentgen reading on the
copy of the Reproducibility Worksheet (Table 6-11 on p. 6-26).
6. Change the exposure techniques for both kV and mAs, then return them to 28
kV and 60 mAs. Make another exposure and record the milliroentgen reading
on Table 6-11.
7. Continue to randomly change the technique data for kV and mAs, and return
them to 28 kV and 60 mAs. Acquire images in this manner until 10 individual
exposures are made. Record each milliroentgen reading on Table 6-11, part A.
8. Computations (record on Table 6-11):
a.
Compute and record the average milliroentgen reading on part B.
b. Subtract each actual reading from the average and record on part C.
c.
Square each difference and record the results on part D.
d. Add the squares (part E) and divide the sum by 9 and record on part F.
9.1.2
e.
Take the square root of the result and record on part G.
f.
Divide the number calculated in Step e by the average milliroentgen
reading to obtain the coefficient of variation. Record on part H. The
coefficient of variation must be less than 0.05.
Linearity
1. Change the exposure data to 28 kV and 20 mAs. Make an exposure and record
the milliroentgen reading on the Linearity Worksheet (Table 6-12 on p. 6-27).
2. Repeat Step 1, changing the mAs to 60, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, and 400 for
each exposure. Record milliroentgen readings at each setting on Table 6-12,
part A.
3. Divide each milliroentgen reading by its corresponding mAs value and record
on Table 6-12, part B.
4. For each pair of successive tests (20 mAs and 60 mAs, then 60 mAs and 100
mAs, and so on), calculate the difference between each corresponding Step 3
result and record on Table 6-12, part C.
5. For each pair of successive tests, calculate the sum of each Step 3 result and
record on Table 6-12, part D.
6. Divide each Step 4 difference by each Step 5 sum value and record on Table 612, part E. If the result for any pair exceeds 0.10, the test is considered failed.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 using the small focal spot. Record your results in the
Linearity Worksheet-Small Focal Spot, Table 6-13 on p. 6-28. If the unit fails any
part of the above test, first verify all calculations, then repeat the tests.
MAN-00625
6-25
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compliance Tests—System Level
Table 6-11: Reproducibility Worksheet
6-26
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compliance Tests—System Level
Table 6-12: Linearity Worksheet
MAN-00625
6-27
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compliance Tests—System Level
Table 6-13: Linearity Worksheet-Small Focal Spot
6-28
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compliance Tests—System Level
9.2
Beam Quality Assessment (Half-Value Layer Measurement)
Equipment Required:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calibrated mammographic ionization meter and electrometer (MR Meter and small
Probe) as per the 1999 ACR Mammography Quality Control Manual, Beam Quality
Assessment section. (RadCal or Victoreen)
Acrylic Phantom
0.2 mm aluminum sheet
0.1 mm aluminum sheets
Lead apron
Laptop with Excel software
Detector Subsystem disk (provided with system)
Warning:
9.2.1
Observe all safety precautions while acquiring an exposure.
Set up the System up for the Test
1. Ensure the system is on.
2. Set the AWS to Non-imaging mode—Chapter 6, Section 3.0, p. 6-3.
3. Remove the Face Shield.
4. Mount a 10 cm Mag paddle, upside-down, onto the Compression Device.
5. Raise the Compression Device until the paddle is approximately 1 cm below
the tubehead port.
6. Cover the detector with lead.
Figure 6-14: Half Value Layer Setup
7. Referring to Figure 6-14, place a radiation probe exactly 4.5 cm above the
Image Receptor. (Use BR-12 if available to build up the sensor to exactly this
height.)
a.
Position it so that it is centered laterally and exactly 4.0 cm from the chest
wall edge of the support device
b. Position completely within the X-ray field.
8. Press the Light Field button to illuminate the X-ray field.
a.
Reposition the probe so that the radiation detector is centered in the beam
and 4.0 cm from the chest wall edge.
b. Align the surface of the probe perpendicular to the beam axis.
c.
MAN-00625
Adjust the collimator to the smallest field size that fits the probe.
6-29
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compliance Tests—System Level
9.2.2
Set up the Excel Spreadsheet
1. Copy selenia_calculations.xls to your notebook from Selenia Detector SubSystem CD.
2. Start the Excel application.
3. Click on Tools > Macros > Security.
4. Select Medium.
5. Open selenia_calculations.xls using Excel.
6. Click on the HVL tab.
7. Record the height of the effective ionization chamber center from the top of the
Array into the Excel spreadsheet.
8. Set up the Excel spreadsheet to match the meter reading units (mR, mGy, or R).
9.2.3
Acquire the HVL measurements
1. Following the spreadsheet, place aluminum sheets on top of the 10 cm Mag
paddle.
2. Take manual exposures following the spreadsheet for the required techniques.
3. Fill out the Exposure Measurements section for all ten kV/Filter settings.
4. Click on the m4_tube tab in the spreadsheet.
5. Click on the Save m4_tube.cfg button to save the file to the hard disk.
6. Use ftp to transfer the m4_tube.cfg file to /opt/users/dr directory on the Selenia.
7. On the Acquisition Station, type in the Terminal Window su dr then press
Return. Log on with password.
8. Type in the Terminal Window cd /opt/users/dr then press Return.
9. Type in the Terminal Window install-tube.sh then press Return.
10. Minimize the Terminal Window. Maximize the application window.
6-30
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compliance Tests—System Level
9.3
Detector Ghosting
This procedure is done to assure that the level of detector ghosting does not interfere with
image quality.
Required Equipment
•
4 cm thick uniform attenuation block of acrylic large enough to cover the digital
image receptor. The acrylic block is supplied by the manufacturer.
•
0.1mm sheet of aluminum (the filters which are used for the HVL measurement)
9.3.1
Ghosting Test Setup
1. Click New in the Patient pane to create a test patient on the Acquisition
Workstation and select the Phys QC: Ghosting procedure. Refer to the
Operator's Manual for details about adding a new patient.
2. Install the 24 x 30 cm compression paddle on the compression device.
9.3.2
First Exposure
1. Place the 4 cm thick uniform attenuation block
of acrylic on top of the image receptor cover
positioned such that half of the digital image
receptor is covered and the other half of the
digital image receptor is not covered by the
standard test block; see Figure 6-15.
Note…
The block must extend at least 1” beyond
the AEC Sensors, and cover the sensors.
Figure 6-15: First Exposure for Ghosting
2. Lower the compression device until the compression paddle touches the acrylic
block.
3. Set the system in the AEC mode that is used clinically (for example, Auto-Filter).
4. Set the exposure compensation to Step 0 or the step used clinically.
5. Set the AEC sensor to position “2.”
6. Set the filtration and kVp to clinically used values, if applicable in the selected
AEC mode.
7. Select the first available view.
8. Make a single exposure in the
selected AEC mode.
9. Accept the preview image.
Figure 6-16: Ghost Image 1
MAN-00625
6-31
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compliance Tests—System Level
9.3.3
Second Exposure
1. Move the 4 cm thick uniform attenuation block of
acrylic so that it covers the entire image area of the
digital image receptor.
2. Place the 0.1 mm aluminum filter on top of the
standard block centered against the chest wall edge of
the digital image receptor; see Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17: Second Exposure for Ghosting
3. Select the second view and make a single exposure in the selected AEC mode as
soon as possible, preferably about 1 minute after completing the first exposure.
Figure 6-18: Preview Screen Showing Set-up for Detector Ghosting Test
4. Set ROI size to 128 x 128 on the Preview of the Second Exposure.
5. Measure and record the mean pixel value in the ROI on locations shown in
Figure 6-18.
9.3.4
6-32
Record Forms
Use 13. Detector Ghosting form in the QC Manual to record the results.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Modifying the TEC Exposure Mode
9.3.5
Data Analysis
Calculate and record the Ghost Image Factor by using the following formula and
record in the form.
Ghost Image Factor =
Note…
9.3.6
mean
region 3
- meanregion 2
mean
region 1
- mean
region 2
Regions 1 and 2 correspond to the section of the detector that was covered
by the acrylic attenuator during both exposures. Region 3 corresponds to
the section of the detector that was covered by the acrylic attenuator during
only one of the two exposures.
Recommended Performance Criteria and Corrective Actions.
The measured Ghost Image Factor must be within ± 0.3. If it is greater, repeat the
test. If this criterion is not met, a qualified service engineer must correct the problem
before using the system for clinical imaging.
10.0 Modifying the TEC Exposure Mode
10.1
General Information
There are two TEC tables: Table 0 and Table 1.
The tables are used to select the appropriate kV, mAs, and filter technique based on
compressed breast thickness and selected tissue composition.
Each table contains slightly different kV/mAs technique combinations, in order to
accommodate different customer preferences.
Additionally, the following cal parameters are also provided for TEC:
•
Master Density Factor: (default = 100%) All calculated mAs values are multiplied by this
factor.
• Rh filter crossover point: (default = 32) kV setting at which the Selenia switches to Rh.
• Rh factor: (default = 120%) All calculated mAs values are multiplied by this factor if Rh
filter is selected.
• Active TEC table: The lookup table to be used for TEC technique calculation (default = 0
for ROW installations and 1 for US installations).
Individual lookup table settings (kV and mAs) can also be modified.
10.2
Site-specific Calibration Requirements
The system leaves the factory with the default TEC table set to 0.
At the site, the following calibration steps should be followed:
1. Choose the appropriate active TEC table. Refer to Section 10.4, p. 6-34. This selection is
based on customer preference. The tables have the following characteristics:
Table 6-14: TEC tables
Table 0 Low dose; default for various states, foreign countries, and individual sites that have
instituted the 2 mGy (200 mRad) maximum average glandular dose requirements.
Table 1 High contrast; default for various states, foreign countries, and individual sites that have
instituted the 3 mGy (300 mRad) maximum average glandular dose requirements.
2. If requested by the attending physicist or radiologist, adjust Master Density to achieve
lower dose, higher signal, etc. Refer to Section 10.5, p. 6-34.
MAN-00625
6-33
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Modifying the TEC Exposure Mode
10.3
Initializing the TEC Lookup Tables
Caution:
This operation overwrites all existing TEC cal data. Only perform if
necessary.
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
1. Set Rotary switch to position 0.
2. Set DIP S6-4 and S6-8 On.
3. Press push buttons S2 and S3 together. TEC INIT is displayed.
10.4
Setting the Active TEC Table
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
1. Set Rotary switch S4 to position 6.
2. Set DIP S6-4 and S6-8 On.
3. Press pushbutton S1 to select the TEC parameter, until “TECTab 0” is displayed, where 0
is the active TEC table.
4. Press pushbutton S2 to select the active table.
5. The Host Microprocessor Board displays “TECTab d”, where d is the active table.
10.5
Adjusting the TEC Master Density Setting
On the Host Microprocessor Board:
1. Set Rotary switch to position 6.
2. Set DIP S6-4 and S6-8 On.
3. Press push button S1 to select the TEC parameter, until tecMDddd is displayed, where
ddd is the master density value.
4. Press push button S2 to adjust the value (range 50 to 200, by 10) default = 100.
Note…
6-34
At the end of any calibration, return the Host Microprocessor Board
switches S6 and S7 back to Off.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Modifying the TEC Exposure Mode
10.6
TEC Tables
10.6.1 TEC Table Defaults:
Default Active Table:
Default Rh Crossover:
Default Rh factor:
Default Master Density setting:
0
32 kV
120
100
10.6.2 Table 0—Low Dose Table
** TEC TABLE 0: LARGE and SMALL FOCAL SPOT **
Fatty
TEC
Step
step 00
step 01
step 02
step 03
step 04
step 05
step 06
step 07
step 08
step 09
step 10
step 11
step 12
step 13
step 14
step 15
step 16
step 17
step 18
step 19
step 20
step 21
step 22
step 23
step 24
step 25
step 26
step 27
step 28
step 29
step 30
step 31
MAN-00625
Normal
Dense
Breast
kV mAsLO mAsHI
Thickness
kV
mAsLO mAsHI
kV
mAsLO mAsHI
0mm
5mm
10mm
15mm
20mm
25mm
30mm
35mm
40mm
45mm
50mm
55mm
60mm
65mm
70mm
75mm
80mm
85mm
90mm
95mm
100mm
105mm
110mm
115mm
120mm
125mm
130mm
135mm
140mm
145mm
150mm
155mm
22
23
24
24
24
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
32
32
32
32
34
34
35
35
37
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
12
12
12
20
30
40
45
60
60
65
60
65
65
85
110
140
170
220
180
220
200
240
200
190
170
190
210
230
250
270
290
310
22
23
24
24
24
25
25
28
29
30
31
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
34
34
36
36
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
12
12
12
25
35
50
50
65
60
65
60
65
85
110
130
170
220
250
220
270
200
250
200
170
190
210
230
250
270
290
310
330
22
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
32
32
32
34
34
35
35
36
37
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
12
12
12
20
25
30
35
70
60
65
60
65
65
65
85
110
140
180
150
180
150
190
200
190
190
170
190
210
230
250
270
290
12
12
20
25
30
45
50
90
80
85
80
85
85
85
110
140
180
220
180
220
190
230
240
230
230
190
210
230
250
270
290
310
12
12
20
30
40
60
65
80
80
85
80
85
85
110
130
180
220
270
220
270
240
290
250
240
190
210
230
250
270
290
310
330
12
12
25
35
50
70
80
85
80
85
80
85
110
130
170
200
250
590
270
320
250
310
250
190
210
230
250
270
290
310
330
330
6-35
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Modifying the TEC Exposure Mode
10.6.3 Table 1—High-Contrast Table
** TEC TABLE 1: LARGE and SMALL FOCAL SPOT **
Fatty
6-36
Normal
Dense
TEC
Step
Breast
kV
Thickness
mAsLO mAsHI kV mAsLO mAsHI kV mAsLO mAsHI
step 00
step 01
step 02
step 03
step 04
step 05
step 06
step 07
step 08
step 09
step 10
step 11
step 12
step 13
step 14
step 15
step 16
step 17
step 18
step 19
step 20
step 21
step 22
step 23
step 24
step 25
step 26
step 27
step 28
step 29
step 30
step 31
0mm
5mm
10mm
15mm
20mm
25mm
30mm
35mm
40mm
45mm
50mm
55mm
60mm
65mm
70mm
75mm
80mm
85mm
90mm
95mm
100mm
105mm
110mm
115mm
120mm
125mm
130mm
135mm
140mm
145mm
150mm
155mm
12
12
12
20
28
40
45
60
85
120
120
130
130
130
190
180
160
190
150
180
150
190
200
190
190
170
210
210
230
250
270
290
22
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
26
27
28
29
29
30
31
32
34
34
25
35
36
37
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
12
12
20
28
40
60
60
85
120
160
170
180
180
190
240
220
200
240
180
220
190
230
240
230
230
190
230
230
250
270
290
310
22
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
26
27
28
29
29
30
31
32
33
34
34
35
35
37
38
39
39
39
39
39
290
39
39
12
12
12
20
30
47.5
50
75
110
120
120
130
140
180
170
170
190
190
190
220
200
240
200
190
170
190
210
230
250
170
290
310
12
12
20
30
47.5
70
75
110
160
170
170
180
180
220
220
220
240
240
240
270
240
290
250
240
190
210
230
250
270
290
310
330
22
23
24
24
24
24
26
26
27
28
29
30
30
31
32
32
32
33
34
34
36
36
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
12
12
12
24
37.5
60
50
75
90
95
95
100
140
130
170
220
260
260
240
270
200
250
200
170
190
210
230
250
270
290
310
330
12
12
25
37.5
60
90
75
110
120
130
140
140
180
180
220
260
350
325
270
320
250
310
250
190
210
230
250
270
290
310
330
330
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.0 AEC Calibration
Required tools:
11.1
•
24 x 30 paddle, placed upside down and used to hold aluminium
•
Aluminium Filter Pack—Ultra-high purity type 1145 (99.99% pure)
•
Lead shield/Blocker
•
Radiation Meter with probe (calibrated in the mammographic ranges)
•
8.0 cm Set of BR-12 or PMMA
•
4.2 cm Acrylic Block
Enable AEC Function
Note…
AEC mode can be switched on and off by the adjustment of S7-5. S7-5 in
the ON position turns AEC off and removes the AEC from the user screen.
S7-5 in the OFF position turns AEC on, making all the AEC modes available
to the user.
1. Open the right Gantry door.
2. Locate Host Microprocessor Board, Figure 5-1, p. 5-2, and DIP Switch S7, Appendix B,
Section 1.1, p. B-1.
3. Set DIP Switch S7 Position 5 from ON (AEC disabled) to OFF (AEC Enabled).
4. Close the Gantry door.
5. Restart System.
Note…
11.2
System restart is required for switch setting changes to take effect.
Entering the AEC Calibration Tool
1. Log on as apps.
Note…
Ensure that there is a valid gain cal file in the opt/linx_mp/data
folder. If there isn’t, perform a Gain Calibration, Section 6.4, p. 6-16.
2. After the application starts, select Edit > Standard Setup.
3. Set Compression Release Mode to Manual.
4. Select Set Technique Defaults.
5. In Technique Setup, select Manual Exposure Mode.
6. Select mAs Table #0.
7. Select Close.
8. Select Close to exit Standard Setup.
9. Minimize the application.
10. Double-click the Task Launcher icon.
11. Click the KILL ALL button. See Figure 6-19, p. 6-38. Wait for all tasks to stop.
MAN-00625
6-37
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
Figure 6-19: Task Launcher Window
12. Right-click on the Desktop and select Tools >Terminal to open a Terminal Window.
13. In the Terminal Window enter cd/users/dr then press Return. In the same Terminal
Window, enter aeccal.sh then press Return.
Figure 6-20: Terminal Window
6-38
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
14. Position AEC Calibration Tool and Form1 (M4 Control Panel) as shown in Figure 6-21.
Figure 6-21: Positioning of Terminal, AEC Calibration Tool, and Form1 Windows
15. In the AEC Calibration Tool window, set units to R/mR or Gy/mGy and the Average
Glandular Dose (AGD) value to either 160 mrad or 1.6 mGy (Table 0) or 190 mrad or
1.9 MGy (Table 1) depending on the type of dosimeter you are using. See Figure 6-22.
Figure 6-22: AEC Calibration Tool Window, Set Units to R/mR and AGD
MAN-00625
6-39
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.3
Determine Half Value Layer (HVL)
11.3.1 Setup for the HVL test
1. In the AEC Calibration Tool Window click Determine HVL.
2. Remove the face shield.
3. Position a 10 cm mag paddle upside down in the compression device.
4. Raise the compression device to its highest position.
5. Ensure there is nothing on the paddle or image receptor.
6. Place the ionization chamber of the dosimeter exactly 4.2 cm above the image
receptor (using the 4.2 cm acrylic block), 4.0 cm from the chest wall edge,
centered left to right, and fully within the X-ray field.
7. Adjust the collimator to the smallest field size that fits the ionization chamber.
8. Use the M4 control in Form 1 to set:
•
•
•
•
mode = Normal
filter = Mo
kV = 28
mAs = 40
11.3.2 Determine HVL: First Exposure.
Note…
Do not click on the DRAPI status box as it may start flashing which will
require the Aeccal Tool application to be restarted.
The status occasionally may need to have the mouse move over it to update.
Record all values in a copy of spreadsheet Selenia_Calculations.xls on the
Detector Sub-System CD to speed up any repeat procedure executions.
Figure 6-23: AEC Calibration Tool Window, Enable Capture HVL
1. Wait until Status in the AEC Calibration Tool window reads “DRAPI Armed”.
2. Click Enable Capture in the AEC Calibration Tool window; see Figure 6-23.
3. Acquire an exposure by pressing the X-ray buttons.
6-40
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
Figure 6-24: AEC Calibration Tool Window, Entering the mR Value
4. Enter the dosimeter reading in the Reading box of the AEC Calibration Tool
Window, then click Submit, Figure 6-24.
11.3.3 Determine HVL: Second Exposure.
1.
Place a sheet of 0.3 mm of Aluminum on top of the compression paddle.
2. Use the light field to verify that the X-ray path to the ionization chamber is fully
blocked by the Aluminum.
3. Click Enable Capture. The STATUS should read "DRAPI Armed".
4. Acquire an exposure.
5. Enter the dosimeter reading into the Reading field of the AEC Calibration Tool
Window.
6. Click Submit.
11.3.4 Determine HVL: Third Exposure.
Repeat steps 1 to 6 in Section 11.3.3 using a sheet of 0.4 mm of aluminum.
11.3.5 Determine HVL: Last Exposure.
1. Remove all the aluminum from the compression paddle.
2. Use the light field to verify that the X-ray path fully illuminates the ionization
chamber.
3. Click Enable Capture. The STATUS should read "DRAPI Armed".
4. Acquire an exposure.
5. Enter the dosimeter reading into the Reading field of the AEC Calibration Tool
Window.
6. Click Submit.
MAN-00625
6-41
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.3.6 Determine the HVL Value.
Figure 6-25: AEC Calibration Tool Window, HVL Value Displayed
1. Wait until the screen displays the HVL integer value (x100).
2. Enter it in Selenia_Calculations.xls.
6-42
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.4
Determine Entrance Screen Exposure (ESE)
11.4.1 AEC Calibration step 2: Setup to Determine ESE
1. Place lead on top of the image receptor.
2. Place the ionization chamber of the radiation dosimeter exactly 4.2cm above
the image receptor cover, 4cm from the chest wall edge, centered left to right,
and fully within the x-ray field.
3. Place a 24x29cm screening paddle in the unit right side up.
4. Lower the compression device so that the paddle is just above the ionization
chamber.
5. Adjust the collimator to the smallest field size that fits the ionization chamber.
Figure 6-26: ESE Setup
6. In the AEC Calibration Tool Window, select Determine ESE.
7. Use the M4_Control to:
•
MAN-00625
set the mode = Normal
•
set the filter = Mo
•
set the kV = 28
•
set the mAs = 100
6-43
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.4.2 Determine ESE: First Exposure.
Figure 6-27: AEC Calibration Tool Window, Enable Capture ESE
1. Wait for the status to read "DRAPI Armed".
2. When ready for the first exposure, click Enable Capture.
3. Acquire the image.
4. Type the dosimeter reading value in the Reading box.
5. Click Submit.
11.4.3 Determine ESE: Second Exposure.
1. Click Enable Capture in the AEC Calibration Tool window. The STATUS should
read "DRAPI Armed".
2. Acquire an exposure.
3. Enter the dosimeter reading into the Reading box of the AEC Calibration Tool
window.
4. Click Submit.
11.4.4 Determine ESE: Third Exposure.
1. Click on the Enable Capture button in the AEC Calibration Tool window. The
STATUS should read "DRAPI Armed".
2. Acquire an exposure.
3. Enter the dosimeter reading into the Reading box of the AEC Calibration Tool
window.
4. Click Submit.
6-44
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
Figure 6-28: AEC Calibration Tool Window, ESE Value Displayed
5. When ESE is complete, the mAs required to generate the Goal Image is
displayed—Figure 6-28.
6. Record the "Average Entrance Skin Exposure" value in Selenia_Calculations.xls.
7. Record the "mAs required to generate the Goal Image" value in
Selenia_Calculations.xls.
8. Remove the dosimeter.
11.5
Generate Goal Image
11.5.1 Setup to Generate Goal
1. In the AEC Calibration Tool Window, select Generate Goal.
2. Remove the lead shielding covering the image receptor.
3. Place the 4 cm acrylic block so that it completely covers the image receptor.
4. Place a 24x29 cm screening paddle in the unit right side up.
5. Lower the compression device so that the paddle is just touching the acrylic
block.
6. Adjust the collimator to the largest field size.
7. Use the M4_Control to:
•
MAN-00625
set the mode to Normal
•
set the filter to Mo
•
set the kV to 28
•
set the mAs to as close to the value calculated in Section 11.4.4 step 7 as
possible.
6-45
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.5.2 Generate Goal: First Exposure
1. Click Enable Capture in the AEC Calibration Tool window. The STATUS should
read "DRAPI Armed".
2. Acquire an exposure.
Note…
For mAs, select the closest mAs to the one listed. See Section 11.4.4, p. 644, step 7.
Figure 6-29: Goal Image Setup
11.5.3 Generate Goal: Second Exposure
1. Click Enable Capture in the AEC Calibration Tool window. The STATUS should
read "DRAPI Armed".
2. Acquire an exposure.
11.5.4 Generate Goal: Third Exposure
1. Click Enable Capture in the AEC Calibration Tool window. The STATUS should
read "DRAPI Armed".
2. Acquire an exposure.
11.5.5 Generate Goal: Fourth Exposure.
1. Click Enable Capture in the AEC Calibration Tool window. The STATUS should
read "DRAPI Armed".
2. Acquire an exposure.
3. Wait until the message "Averaging 4 goal images into GOALIMAG.img" is
displayed.
6-46
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.6
Exiting AEC Calibration
1. Switch to the Terminal Window with the scrolling text and look for the following
message:
***** PLEASE REBOOT BRICK NOW *******
***************************************************************
AEC Calibration Procedure is complete.
***************************************************************
Figure 6-30: AEC Calibration Tool Window, Completion Message
2. Close both the AecCalTool and Selenia Console Window.
3. Exit the application by clicking on the Exit button on the bottom of the desktop.
4. Reboot the system by logging in as the reboot user.
MAN-00625
6-47
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.7
AEC Dark Offset Calibration
The Dark Offset value is used to make sure that the AEC Algorithm is working in the linear
response region of the detector.
1. Log in as apps.
2. Type from the Terminal Window cd /opt/users/dr then press Return.
3. Typing from the Terminal Window set_dark_offset.sh 10000 then press Return.
Note…
Setting the dark offset to 10 000 makes it easier to determine the actual dark
offset. The actual dark offset needs to be set in step 11.
4. Cover the detector with lead.
5. Open a new patient in the application.
6. Set the technique to Auto-Time.
7. Set the AEC sensor to Position 1.
8. Acquire the image. If Error 59 appears, reset the generator and continue.
9. Immediately switch to the Terminal Window you were using in step 3 (behind the
Application window).
a.
Type in the Terminal Window check_offset.sh then press Return.
This returns text similar to the following:
calculate mAs (M=0, G=0, V=1, Tp=50, Ip=2250, Region=0)
(62*100*50/100)*(100*854608/(46950-1950))/100/100=779
b. Record the value following “Ip=” in the Excel program on the laptop.
Note…
c.
If lp is zero, do not continue with the Dark Offset testing. Proceed to set the
Dark Offset to 0 with the Terminal Window command set_dark_offset
<space>0.
Reject the image.
d. Repeat steps a to c so that 2 exposures have been made for each AEC sensor position
1-7 (a total of 14 times).
10. Read the resulting dark offset (by taking the average Ip value of all collected values) in
the Excel spreadsheet.
11. Set the dark offset value by typing from the Terminal Window set_dark_offset.sh
xxxx, where xxxx is the dark offset computed above, then press Return. Typical values
for EHVPS detectors are expected between 0 and 6000.
6-48
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.8
AEC Dosage Scaling
Dose scaling can be used to set a target exposure index for the AEC algorithm:
1. To set the target exposure index, type from the Terminal Window
set_dose_scale.sh 100 then press Return.
2. If a specific target exposure has not been met:
a. Open a new patient in the application.
b. Set the technique to Auto-Time,18x24 cm paddle, 4 cm BR12 or Acrylic, Pos 2, Mo,
28 kV.
c. Acquire four images and record their exposure indexes.
d. Calculate the dose scaling value needed to get to the target exposure index. The
target exposure index should be between 400 and 420.
e. Type from the Terminal Window set_dose_scale.sh xxx where xxx is the
dose scale computed above, then press Return.
f. Repeat steps c through e until the target exposure index is reached.
11.8.1 AEC Mag Dose Offset
If the AEC Function Performance does not pass, then perform the following steps:
1. Type in the Terminal Window cd /opt/users/dr then press Return.
2. Type in the Terminal Window set_mag_offset.sh -5000 then press
Return.
Note…
The array_mag_offset applies only to exposures with the magnification
stand in place. The value of -5000 is used as a starting point only.
Adjustments will have to be made to find the value that will pass AEC
function performance.
Type from Terminal Window su then press Return.
Type from Terminal Window reboot -- -r then press Return.
Login as apps. Enter password when prompted.
Repeat the 4cm Mag exposure and recalculate AEC Function Performance
results.
7. Adjust the value of the array_mag_offset until the AEC Function Performance
passes.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Note…
Each time array_mag_offset is changed the computer needs to be rebooted.
8. Record final results.
11.9
Confirm AEC Calibration Settings
1. Type from the Terminal Window get_config.sh then press Return.
2. Wait for both the array_dark_offset and the low_dose_scale values to be returned.
3. The array dark offset should match the value computed in “AEC Dosage Scaling” on
p. 6-49 by taking the average of the lp values. While the value can change according to
the readout sequence and array, the expectation is that with the supplied readout
sequence that the array dark offset should be close to zero.
4. The low_dose_scale should match the value set in “AEC Dosage Scaling” on p. 6-49.
MAN-00625
6-49
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
AEC Calibration
11.10
AEC Verification
11.10.1 Auto-Filter Adjustment
The Auto-Filter can be adjusted from 28 kV to 35 kV.
1. On the Host Microprocessor Board, set rotary switch S4 to position 6.
2. Set S6-8 to ON.
3. Press S1 index button until “Rh_Kv” displays.
4. Press S2 value button until desired kV (28 kV to 35 kV).
5. Set S6-8 to OFF.
11.10.2 AEC Verification
1. Open a new patient in the application.
2. Cycle through the Exposure modes: Manual, TEC, Auto-Time, Auto-kV, and
Auto-Filter.
3. Select Auto-Filter mode.
4. Make the following exposures.
Table 6-15: AEC Verification settings
Mode
AEC Sensor
Auto-Filter
Sensor Position 2
Auto-Filter
Sensor Position 2
Auto-Filter
Sensor Position 2
Auto-Filter
Sensor Position 2
Auto-kV
Sensor Position 2
Paddle
Filter
Attenuation
18x24 paddle
2 cm of BR12
or PMMA
18x24 paddle
4 cm of BR12
or PMMA
18x24 paddle
18x24 paddle
10x10 mag
paddle
Mo
6 cm of BR12
or PMMA
8 cm of BR12
or PMMA
4 cm of BR12
or PMMA
5. Record the exposure index for each exposure on a copy of the AEC Function
Performance worksheet from Appendix C of the Installation Manual. Ensure that
none of the exposure indices exceed 10% of the mean exposure index
(selenia_calculations.xls may be used).
6-50
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Configure Array Auto-Power Control Time
12.0 Configure Array Auto-Power Control Time
Note…
Ensure that, after installation, the array config file is copied from the CD
provided with each detector into the “opt/linx_mp/data” directory.
1. Log In as Apps, and minimize the application as necessary.
2. Type from the Terminal window netscape http:/brick then press Return.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click on the Array link.
Click on the Array Auto-Power Control link.
Log in using user name root and password.
Select Change to change the shutdown settings.
Make sure Time Zone settings are correct and choose Values Match. If the values do not
match, try restarting the computer from the File>Exit menu entry.
8. Configure the Power On time, Power On Warning Delay, Power Off time, Power Off
Warning delay, Backup Power Off time, and Backup Power Off Warning delay as shown
in the following example:
Time
Warning Delay
Power On
Power Off
Backup Power Off
6:00
5:00
10
5:30
10
The system automatically turns on the array at the Power On time (6:00 am in the example).
The system automatically turns off the array after warning the user for Power Off Warning
Delay minutes from the Power Off time (5:10 pm in the example). The user can abort this
shutdown.
The system automatically turns off the array (if the first attempt was aborted) after warning the
user for Backup Power Off Warning Delay minutes from the Backup Power Off time (5:40
pm in the example). The user can abort this shutdown as well.
MAN-00625
6-51
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Configure Array Temperature
13.0 Configure Array Temperature
1. Connect serial Cable from the laptop to the array serial port.
Serial Port
Figure 6-31: Location of Array Serial Port
2. On the Laptop, open HyperTerminal.
3. Set the settings to:
•
38400 bits per second
•
8 data bits
•
None Parity
•
1 stop bit
•
None flow control
4. On the laptop, type at the HyperTerminal Window ServiceMode then press Return.
5. Type jumpToFloader then press Return. Wait for the Floader message.
6. On the HyperTerminal window, select Call menu, then click Disconnect. Leave
HyperTerminal open.
7. Start the Windows® Flash Array software on the laptop.
8. Click on the connect button, review the communication port and speed then click OK.
The communication status turns from red to yellow to green.
9. Click the View Custom Settings button.
10. If the detector cooling fans are installed on this array, verify that the Temperature settings
are set to:
Max Temperature = 37
Max Temp Tolerance = 1
Warning Temp = 2
11. If the detector cooling fans are not installed on this array, change the Temperature
settings to:
Max Temperature = 42
Max Temp Tolerance = 1
Warning Temp = 2
12. Click the Program Custom Settings button.
13. Leave program.
14. Disconnect cable and laptop.
15. Reboot the system.
6-52
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
C-arm Tests and Adjustments
14.0 C-arm Tests and Adjustments
14.1
Paddle Programming and Verification
There are 17 paddles available for use in Selenia. The Paddle Detect Board reads the paddle
identification codes which are programmed into each paddle. The paddle code consists of
four digits; a three-digit (hex code) Paddle ID, and a shift digit.
Paddle ID format: 001d—where “d” indicates the shift digit:
•
D=0—Center Position
•
D=1—Right Shift
•
D=2—Left Shift
Seventeen paddles are available. 12 are shiftable; 5 are not. An alert message is generated if
a paddle is not seated in one of the three discrete positions (left, center, or right).
Table 6-16 provides the Paddle Identification Codes and the X-ray Auto-Collimation field
size for each paddle used in the system.
Table 6-16: Compression Accessory Sensor Combinations
Paddle
No Paddle Installed
18 x 24 cm
10 cm Magnification
10 cm Perforated Localization
10 cm Rectangular Localization
10 cm Contact
15 cm Magnification
15 cm Perforated Localization
15 cm Rectangular OPEN
Compression 24 x 30 cm
15 cm Contact
7.5 cm Spot Magnification
7.5 cm Contact Spot
Small Breast
Frameless Spot
15 cm Ultrasound
FAST 18 x 24 cm
24 x 30 cm FAST
Paddle ID
000D
001D
002D
003D
004D
005D
006D
007D
008D
009D
011D
012D
014D
016D
017D
018D
019D
020D
Shifting
Auto-Collimation
N/A
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
24 x 29 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
24 x 29 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
18 x 24 cm
24 x 29 cm
To program a paddle:
1. Install the paddle to be programmed on the Compression Device.
2. On the Host Microprocessor Board set:
•
Rotary Switch to Position 3
•
DIP switch S6 position 4 to On
•
DIP switch S6 position 8 to On
3. To change the Paddle ID program code, push S2 to increase.
4. To program the new code in the paddle, push S3 and S5 simultaneously.
5. To verify the correct paddle ID, push S1 to read the ID of the installed paddle.
MAN-00625
6-53
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
C-arm Tests and Adjustments
14.2
C-arm Rotation Angle Calibration
The rotation angle calibration procedures require the use of a Digital Protractor and should
be performed in the order given.
14.2.1 Set the C-arm Rotation Display Potentiometer
1. Zero the Digital Protractor on the base of the Gantry.
2. Holding the protractor against the side of the C-arm, rotate the C-arm until the
protractor display reads +22.5° +0.1°.
3. Shut down the system and turn the Gantry circuit breaker off.
4. Open the right Gantry door.
5. Remove the Upper Rear Access Panel to the Gantry. See Section 3.1.4, p. 5-6.
6. Remove CJ16 from the Motor/Lamp Control Board—see Figure 5-1, p. 5-2 and
Figure 6-32 (#1) for location.
7. Adjust the rotation display
potentiometer to its center position
(measure 2.5 kΩ from the wiper to
one side of the potentiometer). See
#2 below for location.
8. Set backlash tension:
a. Advance backlash gear by 32
teeth.
b. Slide Angle Pot bracket to
mesh the backlash and main
gears (ensure the gears are
meshed to full depth of teeth)
c. Back off less than half a tooth
of the pot gear to make
clearance between the gears.
d. Tighten the angle pot bracket
screws.
9. Reconnect CJ16 on the board.
10. Turn the Gantry circuit breaker on.
11. Start the system.
Figure 6-32: CJ16 on Motor Lamp Control Board
6-54
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
C-arm Tests and Adjustments
14.2.2 Verify the C-arm Rotation Limit Switch
1. Holding the protractor against the side of the C-arm, rotate the C-arm to +15°
+0.1°.
2. Set the Host Microprocessor Board DIP switch S4 to position 5 and S6 switch 4
to On.
3. Press S2 on the Host Microprocessor Board until “ang####” is displayed on LED
Display Pad. Press S1 to zero the rotation angle display and save the C-arm
position to memory.
4. Rotate the C-arm clockwise until the angle display reads +180° (195°-15°).
5. Display the angle display and continue clockwise, the Rotation Limit Switch
should engage and shut the unit off before the angle display reads +183° (198°15°). If it does not, adjust the rotation limit switch:
a. Rotate C-arm to +182° (197°-15°).
b. Manually adjust the rotation limit switch until the detent arm on the side of
the switch is positioned within the detent slot on the side of the pivot tube
(it may be necessary to loosen the two screws on the face of the limit switch
and/or the top and bottom adjustment screws on the limit switch mounting
plate in order to adjust the switch).
c. The unit shuts off when the detent arm is positioned within the detent slot
on the pivot tube.
6. Manually close the rotation limit switch to return power to the unit. See Figure
5-4, p. 5-4 for location of switch.
7. Holding the protractor against the side of the C-arm, rotate the C-arm until the
protractor display reads 0°.
8. Press S1 on the Host Microprocessor Board to zero the rotation angle display
and save the C-arm position to memory.
9. Rotate the C-arm to +180° and verify the angle indication is correct.
10. Verify the C-arm can be moved through a minimum travel of -150° (+1°) to
+195° (+1°, -0°). At -90° and +90°, cycle through the collimator sizes to verify
no binding occurs.
11. Return C-arm to the 0° position.
14.2.3 Verify Rotation Memory
Warning:
Observe all safety procedures while making an X-ray exposure.
1. Rotate the C-arm to +45° and make a large focal spot, 20 kV, 3 mAs exposure.
2. Rotate the C-arm and verify the software-initiated detent pauses the C-arm at
-45°.
Note…
MAN-00625
45° is only an example. You could choose another angle, for example +60°.
Then rotate the C-arm and verify the detent pauses the C-arm at -60°.
6-55
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
C-arm Tests and Adjustments
14.3
C-arm Rotation, Vertical Speed, and Compression Control Test
The C-arm Rotation, Vertical Speed, and Compression Control should be set to 90% of their
maximum possible levels.
1. Set Selenia to calibration mode (Host Microprocessor Board, S6 switch 4 = On) if not
previously done.
2. Set the Host Microprocessor Board for the Rotation and Vertical Speed Controls mode
(Rotary switch S4 to position 5, S6 switch 8 = On).
3. On the Host Microprocessor Board:
•
press S2 until ROT = xx displays, then press S3 to decrease the speed or S5 to
increase the speed.
•
press S2 until VERT = xx displays, then press S3 to decrease the speed or S5 to
increase the speed.
•
press S2 until COMP = xx displays, then press S3 to decrease the speed or S5 to
increase the speed.
4. Set the Host Microprocessor Board for normal operations (S6 switch 4 = Off).
5. Shut down the Selenia, wait a few seconds, then turn on the system for changes to take
effect.
6-56
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
C-arm Tests and Adjustments
14.4
C-arm Vertical Travel Adjustment
This tests that all C-arm travel limit switches are functional and adjusted.
Caution:
Actuating the Shutdown Switch, Figure 6-33, #5 shuts down the system.
Figure 6-33: Location of C-arm Vertical Travel Limit Switches
Legend for Figure 6-33
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Upper Vertical Travel Limit
Lower Vertical Travel Limit
Upper Limit Switch
Lower Limit Switch
Shutdown Switch
1. Drive the C-arm to the full upper and lower limits to verify that all C-arm travel limit
switches are functional.
2. See Figure 6-33, #1. Raise the C-arm until the Image Receptor surface is 1.4 m to 1.42 m
(55 in. to 56 in.) above the floor.
3. Adjust the middle switch of the upper Vertical Travel Limit Switches to set this position as
the maximum C-arm height.
4. Lower the C-arm, then raise it again to verify the adjustment. Set the adjacent limit
switch 2.54 cm (1 in.) higher than the first switch.
5. See Figure 6-33, #2. Lower the C-arm until the Image Receptor surface is 0.635 m to
0.698 m (25 in. to 27.5 in.) above the floor.
6. Adjust the Left switch of the lower Vertical Travel Limit Switches to set this position as
the minimum C-arm height.
7. Raise the C-arm, then lower it again and verify the adjustment. Set the adjacent limit
switch 2.54 cm (1 in.) lower than the middle switch.
8. Raise the C-arm well above the lower limit, then rotate the C-arm to +180°.
9. Carefully lower C-arm to confirm that the Tube Head does not contact the floor before Limit
Switches are activated. Repeat the lower Vertical Travel Limit Switch adjustments if required.
MAN-00625
6-57
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compression System Calibration
15.0 Compression System Calibration
This section covers voltage tests, mechanical adjustments, and calibrations for the
components in the compression system.
15.1
Setting—Force Load Cell
This procedure sets the Host Microprocessor for the installed compression force load cell,
and is factory configured. Only change this setting after replacing the force load cell.
1. Set Selenia to calibration mode (Host Microprocessor Board, S6 switch 4 = On) if not
previously done.
2. Set the Host Microprocessor Board for the Force Load Cell selection mode (S4 = 5; S6
switch 8 = On).
3. Use S2 to select LC=xxx.
4. Use S5 to select LCC or REV (the Load Cell manufacturer is listed on the Load Cell).
15.2
Compression Chain Tension Adjustment
Perform this procedure after servicing or replacing the Compression Motor/Brake assembly
or the Compression Clutch/Brake assembly.
1. Remove the lower Compression Device cover. Use care not to damage the bellows.
2. Manually move the Compression Device completely UP.
See Figure 6-34:
3. Loosen the sprocket mount
hardware (#1) that secures the
lower compression chain
sprocket mount to the C-arm
frame.
4. Adjust the sprocket tension
screws (#2) appropriately so
that the chain deflection (near
the center) is approximately
1/2 inch. Adjust both tension
screws evenly.
5. Tighten the sprocket mount
hardware.
6.
Manually move the
Compression Device completely
down, then back up. Verify that
the travel is smooth, and that the
Figure 6-34: Compression Chain Tension Adjustment
chain does not bind.
7. Use motorized compression to
move the Compression Device completely down, then back up. Verify that the travel is
smooth, and that the chain does not bind.
8. When complete, reinstall the lower Compression Device cover.
15.3
Compression Speed Calibration
1. Set Host Microprocessor Board S4 to position 5 and S6-8 and S6-4 to On.
2. Use S2 to select COMP = 90%. Press S1 to send.
6-58
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Compression System Calibration
15.4
Compression Thickness Potentiometer Mechanical Adjustment
1. Ensure the timing belt is mounted on upper clamp block—Figure 5-48, p. 5-50.
2. Remove the Image Receptor—Chapter 5, Section 6.2, p. 5-15.
3. Bring the compression device to the bottom of its travel.
4. With clamp screw (Figure 5-45, p. 5-46, A) loosened, rotate the potentiometer in a
counterclockwise direction (when viewed from the right side of the C-Arm assembly)
until it bottoms out, then make one full turn of the pot in a clockwise direction.
5. Thread the timing belt through the pulleys, ensuring the potentiometer does not move
and the timing belt does not twist.
6. While holding on to the bottom of the timing belt, raise the compression device to the
top of its travel.
7. Insert the timing belt through the lower clamp on the bearing block assembly —Figure
5-44, p. 5-46), and tighten the screws enough to hold the belt in place.
8. Affix the Field Service Belt Adjustment Tool to the bottom of the timing belt and loosen
the screws securing the belt in the bottom clamp. Tighten screws.
9. Remove the adjustment tool.
10. Reinstall the Image Receptor.
11. Install the 7.5 cm Contact Spot Compression Paddle onto the compression device.
12. Center 1 cm of BR-12 or acrylic on the Image Receptor. Move the compression device
down until the paddle is touching the BR-12 (or acrylic).
13. Rotate the potentiometer fully clockwise.
14. Attach an Ohmmeter between the red and white wire connections on the potentiometer
posts.
15. Rotate potentiometer shaft counterclockwise until the Ohmmeter reads between 500
and 600 ohms.
16. Tighten clamp screw (Figure 5-45, p. 5-46, A).
15.5
Compression Thickness Potentiometer Calibration
Perform this procedure after servicing or replacing the Compression Thickness Potentiometer.
Note…
Compression thickness must be calibrated for magnification and contact
imaging.
1. If not already done, start up the system, then open the right side Gantry door. Set the
Host Microprocessor Board for Calibration Mode: S6 switch 4 = On.
2. Select Motor Control calibration by placing S6 switch 8 = Off, and turning the rotary
switch (S4) to position #5. On the Host Microprocessor Board, toggle switch (S2) until
the Host Microprocessor Board Display reads: Cht# ###.
3. If not already done, install the 7.5 cm Contact Spot Compression Paddle onto the
compression Device. Do not use a FAST paddle.
4. Center 5 cm of BR-12 on the Image Receptor, and orient it so that it is even with the
chest wall edge. Move the compression device down until the compression force display
indicates 30 pounds of force (133.5 N).
5. On the Host Microprocessor Board, press (S1) to calibrate the compression thickness for
the installed paddle/receptor combination.
6. Raise the compression device off of the BR-12, then lower it again until the force reading
indicates 30 lb (133.5 N). Verify that the thickness reading indicates 5 cm.
7. Install the Magnification Platform and a magnification paddle.
MAN-00625
6-59
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 6—System Adjustments and Calibration
Power Supply Interconnect Board Adjustment
8. Center 5 cm of BR-12 on the Magnification Platform and orient it so that it is even with
the chest wall edge of the image receptor.
9. Move the compression device down until the compression force display indicates 30
pounds of force (133.5 N). On the Host Microprocessor Board, press (S1) to calibrate the
compression thickness for the installed paddle/receptor combination.
10. Raise the compression device off of the BR-12, then lower it again until the force reading
indicates 30 lb (133.5 N). Verify that the thickness reading indicates 5 cm.
15.6
Compression Force Calibration
Perform this calibration procedure after servicing or replacing the Compression Clutch
Assembly or the Compression Drive Assembly.
1. Turn the system on.
2. Rotate the C-arm to 0 degrees.
3. Set the Host Microprocessor Board for the Compression Height and Force Calibration
(S4 = 5; S6 switch 8 = Off). Toggle Switch (S2) until the Host Microprocessor Board
Display reads: C20f####.
4. Place a force gauge in the approximate center of the Image Receptor and cover with a
folded terry cloth towel for absorption.
5. Install the 7.5 cm Contact Spot Compression Paddle on the Compression Device.
Manually apply compression until the gauge display indicates 20 pounds of force.
6. Press Switch (S1) on the Host Microprocessor Board to record the setting to memory.
7. Toggle Switch (S2) until the Host Microprocessor Board Display reads: C40f####.
8. Manually apply compression until the gauge display indicates 40 pounds of force.
9. Press Switch (S1) on the Host Microprocessor Board to save the setting to memory.
10. Set the system back for normal operation.
11. Evaluate the Compression Force at ± 90°and at 180° for consistency between the display
and the Compression Force Gauge (Display accuracy should be ± 5 lb).
16.0 Power Supply Interconnect Board Adjustment
See Figure 5-36, p. 5-36, for location of boards.
Adjust the Power Supply Interconnect board:
1. Set the AWS to Non-imaging Mode. See Chapter 6, Section 3.0, p. 6-3.
2. Open the left side Gantry door. See Chapter 5, Section 3.1.1, p. 5-5.
3. To change voltage threshold, on the Power Supply Interconnect board, connect a DMM
between TP4 (V+) and AYJ9 pin 7 (return).
4. Adjust R7 to 2.5 VDC.
5. Remove DMM leads.
6. Connect a 14 pin chipclip to U8. Connect an oscilloscope to U8 pin 1 with the return on
AYJ9 pin 7.
7. Take an exposure and display the waveform.
8. Adjust R11 so that the waveform goes high (+5 VDC) for 0.4 +0.1 seconds.
9. Repeat step 7 until the waveform is correct.
10. Remove scope leads and chipclip.
If the board cannot be adjusted, replace it.
6-60
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 7—Performance Testing
Introduction
Chapter 7—Performance Testing
1.0
Introduction
This chapter provides performance tests on the System.
2.0
Warning:
Service engineers must take appropriate radiation safety measures
when testing (or maintaining) the unit.
Caution:
Always observe Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) precautions when working
with electronics and electronic components.
Note…
When servicing Selenia, if a procedure instructs you to remove any covers
or panels, do not reinstall the covers until all required procedures (for
example, calibrations, adjustments, tests, remove and replace, etc.) are
completed.
Service Acceptance Tests Sign Off Sheet
Photocopy this page and the necessary forms. Staple and append to the end of the Service
Manual each time it is necessary to perform these tests.
Test
Signature
Date
Image Receptor Linearity
Spatial Resolution
ACR Phantom Evaluation
S-N-R Ration Measurements
Grid Line Artifacts
Ghosting
3.0
Standard System Test
1. Turn system on.
2. Confirm system boots up and application loads correctly.
3. Acquire image using the ACR Phantom.
4. Verify the image of the AWS meets the requirement of 5 Fibers, 4 Specs and 4 Masses.
5. Verify the SNR is above 40.
MAN-00625
7-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 7—Performance Testing
Digital Array Field Acceptance Tests
4.0
Digital Array Field Acceptance Tests
This section defines the FFDM Selenia digital array field tests used to assure the image
performance meets the Design Requirement.
4.1
Image Receptor Linearity
Equipment Required:
•
Laptop with Excel installed
•
4.0 cm Calibration Phantom
4.1.1
Procedure
1. Make sure the system has been on for at least one hour, and an Image Receptor
Calibration was performed before this test.
2. Create a patient file named Linearity Test.
3. Place the 4.0 cm thick calibration phantom on the image receptor. Ensure the
24cm x 30 cm compression paddle is attached and laying on top of the
calibration phantom.
4. Select Mo filter, 28 kV, large focal spot, grid in.
5. Acquire nine images using the mAs settings specified in the table below.
6. Visually evaluate the image to detect artifacts (Grid lines, white/black spots, etc.).
7. At the AWS, use the ROI tool in the preview window to measure the mean pixel
value of each image receptor quadrant. Use a ROI box size of 64 x 64. Record
the mean pixel value in the table below.
8. Plot mean vs. mAs on an Excel spreadsheet using data recorded in the table
below. Fit the curve to a straight line. Determine the system response linearity
by finding the R2 parameter in the linear fit. Record the R2 parameter below.
9. Compute the maximum percent variation in the four measured “mean pixel
values” for each mAs setting. Max % variation = (max-min) / mean x 100.
4.1.2
Performance Standard
1. Maximum % variation should not exceed 2.0% for each mAs setting. If
exceeded, inspect image to see if “checker board” appears (pass this test if there
is no checker board under clinically relevant contrast conditions).
2. A linear fit of the measured mean pixel value vs. mAs should have R2 greater
than 0.999.
7-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 7—Performance Testing
Digital Array Field Acceptance Tests
4.1.3
Form
Artifacts observed:
______________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Measured Mean Pixel Value for each Readout Quadrant
Quadrant 12 mAs 20 mAs 30 mAs 40 mAs 60 mAs
120
mAs
180
mas
240
mAs
300
mAs
1
2
3
4
mean
Max.%
Variation
R2 = _______________
4.2
Spatial Resolution
4.2.1
Procedure
Follow the section from the Selenia QC Manual Physicist’s test procedure to perform
this test.
4.2.2
Performance Standard
Refer to the Selenia QC Manual for Performance and Action Limits.
4.2.3
Forms
Use the appropriate forms from the QC Manual.
4.3
ACR Phantom Evaluation
4.3.1
Procedure
1. Make sure the system has been on for at least one hour, and an Image Receptor
Calibration was performed before this test.
2. Follow the section from the Selenia QC Manual Physicist’s test procedure to
perform this test.
4.3.2
Performance Standard
Refer to the Selenia QC Manual for Performance and Action Limits.
4.3.3
Forms
Use the appropriate forms from the QC Manual.
MAN-00625
7-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 7—Performance Testing
Glandular Dose and Radiation Output Rate
4.4
Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) Measurements
These tests should be performed as stated in the Selenia QC Manual, Chapter 2, and the
results recorded in the appropriate forms in Appendix A of that manual.
5.0
Glandular Dose and Radiation Output Rate
These tests should be performed as stated in the Selenia QC Manual, Chapter 2, and the
results recorded in the appropriate forms in Appendix A of that manual.
7-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Introduction
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
1.0
Introduction
This chapter of the manual provides procedures for maintaining the software and obtaining
files for technical support.
2.0
Note…
If Netscape doesn’t show the correct information, click Reload to refresh the
cache.
Note…
If you need to reinstall AWS software, refer to “Reinstalling the AWS
Software” on p. 8-10.
Getting Log Files
Sometimes it is necessary to get log files for technical support.
2.1
Burning Log Files on CD
1. Open the Terminal Window
2. Type from the Terminal Window cd /opt/users/dr then press Return.
3. Type from the Terminal Window getlogs.sh then press Return. Wait for at least 5
minutes for the message that the log files are in the /tmp/logs directory.
4. Insert a blank CD-R into the CD-R drive.
5. Type from the Terminal Window burncd.sh then press Return. The CD-R
automatically ejects when finished.
2.2
Accessing the System Log Files from the AWS
The Service Engineer can review status/alarm messages as seen from the Selenia software,
the operating system, and/or the Brick Assembly. Access these status/alarm logs from the
desktop of the AWS computer. Note that all entries are case sensitive.
For detailed information on the Alarm Codes, see Appendix B, Section , p. B-20.
2.3
Selenia Software Status/Alarm Logs
1. Right click on the desktop.
2. Select Files.
3. Select File Manager.
4. Select the directory /linx_mp/logs.
5. Scroll all the way down to the bottom of the list. Then slowly scroll back up until you see
the last file titled: xxxxxxxx.o.log (example: 3CF7653c.o.log).
6. Open this file to view status messages and alarms by date and time of occurrence.
7. To close file: select Files, then select Close.
MAN-00625
8-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Set AWS IP Address
2.4
Operating System Status/Alarm Logs
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Right click on the desktop.
Select Files.
Select File Manager.
Select the directory /var/adm.
Open file titled messages to view status messages and alarms by date and time of
occurrence.
6. To close file: select Files, then select Close.
2.5
Brick Assembly Status/Alarm Logs
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.0
Right click on the desktop.
Select Tools.
Select Terminal Window.
Type telnet brick; press Return.
At the user logon, type root.
Enter password.
At brick prompt, type log xx (where xx = number of log entries you wish to see).
When done, type exit and press Return.
Set AWS IP Address
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Log in to the AWS operating system as an apps user.
When the Selenia application displays, minimize it.
Double-click the Netscape Icon.
Enter the service user name and password.
Select DROC.
Select Network Configuration.
Update the Interface Address and the Interface Netmask using the information you
recorded (or was recorded during system installation in Appendix C—Configuration
Worksheet in the Installation Manual).
8. Click the Update button.
9. Minimize the Netscape application.
10. Maximize the Selenia application.
11. Select File > Exit.
12. Select Restart the computer.
13. Click Yes.
4.0
Updating the Default Router
Log in to the AWS operating system as a root user.
Right-click the desktop and select Files from the drop-down list.
Select File Manager.
Using the File manager, select the /etc directory.
Using the scroll bar, locate the defaultrouter file and double-click to open it.
Update the router address using the information you recorded (or was recorded during
system installation in Appendix C—Configuration Worksheet in the Installation Manual).
7. From the Edit menu select File > Save (necessary).
8. Close the Edit window.
9. Select Files, then select Close.
10. If applicable, log out of the application.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Host Name and Aliases
5.0
Host Name and Aliases
You cannot change the host name of the AWS, but you can add additional aliases if the Site's
PACS department requires a specific Host name. Alias, a substitute for changing host name,
is changed in the “siteconfig.cfg” file.
1. If not open, open Netscape Service Tools select Droc.
2. Select Software Configuration.
3. Select ./installed/Apps.
4. Click Edit DirectRay Operator Console Applications.
5. Scroll to Site Config File.
6. Click Edit siteconfig file.
7. Edit the field station name to whatever the PACS requires.
Return to Service Tools and minimize Netscape.
6.0
Setting Time, Date, and Time Zone
Verify the time, date, and time zone. If needed, perform the following procedures.
6.1
Setting Time and Date
Verify the time, date, and time zone.
1. From a Terminal Window, type date then press Return. The date and time set on the
system are displayed.
2. Verify the date and time zone.
3. If the date and/or time need to be set then use the following format:
date 061316271995.
4. If only setting the time, for example, to 2:32 PM, the command would be date 1432.
6.2
Setting the Time Zone
Note…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.3
All non-US time zones should be specified as an offset of GMT (Greenwich
Mean Time). For example, Paris would be GMT+1.
Open a Terminal Window, type su and press Return.
Log on as root when prompted.
Navigate to the directory /etc/default.
Navigate to the line that reads TZ=.
For non-US time zones, change to an offset of GMT. For example, Paris would be GMT+1.
Brick Time Zone
The brick time zone can be set from the brick telnet command line. For example, the
following command sets the Brick time zone to EST5EDT in normal boot mode. Change
takes effect after rebooting the Brick.
brick# config-system timezone EST5EDT normal
MAN-00625
8-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Changing the Brick and Array IP Addresses (Optional)
7.0
Changing the Brick and Array IP Addresses (Optional)
Some sites use IP addresses that directly conflict with the default Brick and Array IP
addresses. Custom IP addresses should have been recorded during system installation in
Appendix C—Configuration Worksheet in the Installation Manual. To change IP addresses:
1. Open a Terminal Window, type su then press Return.
2. Edit /etc/hosts
a.
Change the brick and array IP addresses.
3. Edit /etc/ppp/ip-down
a.
Change the line with 192.168.1.2 to the new brick IP address.
b. Change the line with /usr/sbin/route delete 192.168.1.0 brick
to: /usr/sbin/route delete array brick
4. Edit /etc/ppp/ip-up
a.
Change the line with 192.168.1.2 to the new brick IP address
b. Change the line with /usr/sbin/route add 192.168.1.0 brick
to: /usr/sbin/route add array brick
5. Edit /etc/rc3.d/S99drppp
6. Change the HOST_IP and BRICK_IP lines to have the new host and brick IP addresses.
8.0
Back Up Files
8.1
Back Up Configuration
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Log in as apps and minimize the application.
Launch the Netscape Service Tools.
Under Maintenance column, click the Backups link.
Click on the Backup DROC link.
Select Standard Backups + Logos from dropdown menu.
a. Click on Start Backup button and type the password if prompted.
b. Click on Service Tools link on the top to go back.
6. FTP the current “.mpb” file to your service laptop.
8.2
Back Up the Calibration and Map Files
1. Log in as apps (if not already logged in).
2. Insert CD1 into the CD-RW drive. Wait for the read light to stay on.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8-4
Type in a Terminal window su dr and press Return.
Enter password when prompted.
Type in a Terminal window cd /cdrom/cdrom1/5.10 and press Return.
Type in a Terminal window ./usave then press Return.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Burning Anonymous CDs
9.0
Burning Anonymous CDs
9.1
Add Service CD-RW Output Device
Type from Terminal Window netscape http://selenia:8080 and press Return.
Type user Name service, and Password.
Click Logon to System button.
Under Service Shortcuts, click Add New Output Device.
Click Browse Directory/Installable/vdevices/Output/cdrw. The Configuration Window
opens.
6. Click Install Client side interface for CDRW SERVICE devices (for service use only). The
System should reply with “Resources Were Installed.”
7. Click Service Tools.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
9.2
Configure Service CD-RW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
9.3
Add Output
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.4
Under Service Shortcuts Click Configure Output Devices.
Click Browse Directory/installed/vdevices/output/cdrw.
Edit Client side interface for CDRW SERVICE devices (for service use only).
Fill in Alias Name with ANON CDRW.
Click Update button.
Restart the application by logging out and logging back into the operating systems.
Launch the Selenia application.
Select Edit>Outputs from the main menu.
Highlight No Outputs and click the Copy button.
Enter Anon CDRW as the name.
Highlight Anon CDRW and click the Edit button.
Select CDRW.
Select the cdrw alias ANON CDRW.
Select Add to add the CD-RW to the output devices.
Write Patient Files
Write patients’ files to the ANON CDRW output device using Image/Spool Management.
9.5
Remove Output
The Selenia application cannot import anonymous patients so this output device should be
removed when finished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
MAN-00625
Launch the Selenia application.
Select Edit>Outputs.
Highlight Anon CDRW and click on the Delete button.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
8-5
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Bad Pixel Mapping
10.0 Bad Pixel Mapping
A new version of DR Viewer is required to handle cropped calibration images. This software
is on the “Detector Sub-System CD” in the DrViewer subdirectory. This software is loaded
onto your notebook computer by executing the setup.exe found on the CD.
Steps to map bad pixels:
1. Make a network connection between the notebook computer and the Acquisition
Station. This can be done with a crossover cable or adding a hub on the network.
2. Acquire a calibration image on the Acquisition Station but do not hit the Accept button.
3. Transfer the calibration .DCM file from the /images subdirectory on the Acquisition
Station to a folder on the laptop using FTP software. You need the last 28 megabyte file.
4. Transfer the MPxxxx.map file and MPxxxx.cfg file (or MMxxxx.map file and MMxxxx.cfg
file) from /opt/linx_mp/data subdirectory on the Acquisition Station to the same folder on
your notebook computer using FTP software.
5. Start the DRViewer software.
6. Open the calibration .DCM file.
7. Pull down the MAP and Load the Pixel Map, which brings up a new dialog box, and
loads the MPxxxx.map or MMxxxx file.
a.
On the next dialog box click the Load MPxxxx.cfg (or MMxxxx.cfg) file button and
load the MPxxxx.cfg (or MMxxxx.cfg) file.
b. Click the OK button.
8. Map out the bad pixels. You can list the new keyboard shortcuts by clicking on the ‘h’ key.
9. Rename the old map file on the AWS to another name.
10. Save the new MPxxxx.map or MMxxxx.map file and transfer this file to the /opt/linx_mp/
data subdirectory on the Acquisition Station using FTP software.
11. Restart the application for the pixel map to take effect.
10.1
Turning on Automatic Bad Pixel Mapping in the Calibrate Screen
1. Go to Service Tools in Netscape.
2. Under Configuration click DROC.
3. Click Software Configuration.
4. Click Browse Directory ./installed/apps.
5. Click Edit DirectRay Operator console application.
6. Under Site Config File click Edit configuration file: /linx_mp/resources/./installed/raw/
droc_lorad_001/siteconfig.cfg.
7. Find the “allow bad pix map creation” field.
a.
Set the value to true.
b. Click Update button.
8. Click Service Tools to go back to the main screen.
10.2
Calibration
•
The application still has to be restarted after gain calibration.
•
The Bad Pixel Map button has been restored. Reboot the machine immediately if this
process fails.
Note…
8-6
The right mouse button no longer does window/leveling. Use the Window/
Level preview tool and the left mouse button instead.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Repeat Management
11.0 Repeat Management
11.1
Change Review Management to Reject and Add Repreview Tab
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Log on to the operating system as apps.
Minimize the application window.
Double click the Netscape Icon.
Log on with service name and password.
Select DROC.
Select Software Configuration.
Select /installed/apps.
Select Edit Direct Ray Operator console application.
Scroll until you locate Reject Management Config and then click on Edit Configuration
File for rejectmgmt.cfg.
10. In User_Mgr and User_Apps sections:
a.
Change frameTitle to Reject Management.
b. Change f_Show Repreview to true.
11. Click Update to save changes.
11.2
Repeat Analysis Report—Turning Off Secondarily Accepted Images
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
11.3
Go to Service Tools.
Click Repeat/Reject.
Click Configuration.
Click NO.
Click Update at bottom of screen.
Click Service Tools to go back to the main screen.
Turning off Repeat/Reject Management
Caution:
Review of Rejected Images is required in the United States. Performing this
procedure removes the ability to review repeated or rejected images.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Go to Service Tools.
Click DROC under Configuration column.
Click Software Configuration.
Click Browse Directory ./installed/services.
Click Edit Reclamation agent for Rados server.
Click
Edit configuration file: /linx_mp/resources/./installed/raw/reclaim_001/reclaim.cfg.
7. Go to the Agent group.
8. Add the line RES_REJECTED_IMAGES to the RESOURCES setting so that it reads:
RES_PATIENT_SPACE
RES_IMAGE_SPACE
RES_ORPHANED_IMAGES
RES_REJECTED_IMAGES
9. Click Update at the bottom of the page.
10. Restart the application for the changes to take effect.
MAN-00625
8-7
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Reducing the Printed Contrast of the Laser Cameras
11.4
Spool Full Alarm
Some sites, especially new ones, have a lot of rejected images. Normally, rejected images
are protected for 14 days but for these sites this is too long and the reject bin gets full. A
message appears saying: Spool is full. Please clean your reject bin.
The solution is to reduce the hold time for the reject bin by following these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Go to Service Tools.
Click DROC under Configuration column.
Click Software Configuration.
Click Browse Directory ./installed/services.
Click Edit Reclamation agent for Rados server.
Click
Edit configuration file: /linx_mp/resources/./installed/raw/reclaim_001/reclaim.cfg.
7. Go to the STR_REJECTED_IMAGES group.
8. Change to HOLDTIME setting to 07.00.00:
9. Click Update at the bottom of the page.
10. Restart the application for the changes to take effect.
12.0 Reducing the Printed Contrast of the Laser Cameras
1. Bring up Service Tools.
2. Under Configuration click DROC.
3. Click Software Configuration.
4. Click Browse Directory ./installed/apps.
5. Click Edit DirectRay Operator console application.
6. Under Extra image processing config click Edit configuration file: /linx_mp/resources/./
installed/raw/droc_lorad_001/img_proc.cfg.
7. For default contrast, find the Print group.
a.
Set the FILMDENSITY field to -0.15.
b. Set the FILMCONTRAST field to 0.9.
c.
Click Update button.
8. For reduced contrast (-1), find the Print group.
a.
Set the FILMDENSITY field to -0.15.
b. Set the FILMCONTRAST field to 0.75.
c.
Click Update button.
9. For reduced contrast (-2), find the Print group.
a.
Set the FILMDENSITY field to -0.1.
b. Set the FILMCONTRAST field to 0.6.
c.
Click Update button.
10. Click Service Tools to go back to the main screen.
8-8
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Reducing the Display Contrast on the For Presentation Images
13.0 Reducing the Display Contrast on the For Presentation Images
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Bring up Service Tools.
Under Configuration click DROC.
Click Software Configuration.
Click Browse Directory ./installed/apps.
Click Edit DirectRay Operator console application.
Under Extra image processing config click Edit configuration file: /linx_mp/resources/./
installed/raw/droc_lorad_001/img_proc.cfg.
7. For default contrast, find the Display group.
a. Set the DISPLAYDENSITY field to -0.10.
b. Set the DISPLAYCONTRAST field to 1.1.
c. Click Update button.
8. For reduced contrast (-1), find the Display group.
a. Set the DISPLAYDENSITY field to -0.10.
b. Set the DISPLAYCONTRAST field to 0.9.
c. Click Update button.
9. For reduced contrast (-2), find the Display group.
a. Set the DISPLAYDENSITY field to -0.05.
b. Set the DISPLAYCONTRAST field to 0.7.
c. Click Update button.
10. Click on Service Tools to go back to the main screen.
13.1
Test Output Device Connectivity
1. Test Output Device (if connected to network).
a. Under Diagnostics, select DROC computer.
b. Select Dicom Diagnostics.
c. Select the newly added output device from the Dicom Node List and click on
Dicom Node Echo Test.
2. Select Service Tools, minimize Netscape and maximize the application.
3. Select File>Exit to restart the application.
4. Select Restart the computer and click Yes.
14.0 R2 Service Utility
14.1
Viewing the R2 Logs
Applications can view the STU (R2 Service Tool Utility) by opening a web page.
1. Type from Terminal Window netscape http://cad01 &
2. Enter the password h0spital instead of "service". (that is a zero in place of the "o")
14.2
Image Checker Reboot
Customers can open a "customer-version" of the STU (R2 Service Tool Utility) by opening a
web page.
1. Type from Terminal Window netscape http://cad01 &
2. Enter the password h0spital instead of "service". (that is a zero in place of the "o")
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
MAN-00625
8-9
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Reinstalling the AWS Software
15.0 Reinstalling the AWS Software
If necessary, the AWS software can be reinstalled using the disk set that is included with the
system.
Note…
15.1
After you reinstall the AWS software, to reconfigure the system, refer to
“Chapter 6—Configuring the Components” in the Installation Manual.
AWS Driver Installation
1. Log in to the system as root.
2. Insert CD1 into the CDROM drive. Wait for the read light to go on and then go off.
3. Open a terminal window:
a.
Right-click on the desktop.
b. In the Programs menu, select Terminal . . .
4. Type in the terminal window cd /cdrom/cdrom1
5. Press Return.
6. Type ./mpinstall1 -force
7. Press Return.
8. Wait about 10 minutes for all drivers to load, watching carefully for errors.
9. When you see the message mpinstall1 complete, type: cd / and press Return.
10. Type eject and press Return.
11. Remove the CD from the drive.
15.2
AWS Application Software Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insert CD2 into the CDROM drive. Wait for the read light to go on and then go off.
Within the same terminal window, type cd /cdrom/cdrom1
Press Return.
Type ./mpinstall2 -force -keepuselog
Press Return.
Wait about 20 minutes for software installation to complete, watching carefully for
errors.
7. When you see the message mpinstall1 complete, type: cd / and press Return.
8. Type eject cdrom
9. Remove the CD from the drive.
10. Type:
fbconfig -res 1600x1200x60
fbconfig -depth 8
11. Press Return.
8-10
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.0 Configuring the Output Devices
This section describes the configuration details for the connection of the AWS to the
supported printers, DICOM archives, physician displays, CAD servers, and AWS peripherals.
The available peripheral devices supported by Selenia are:
•
AWS CD-RW
•
AWS Bar Code Reader
Pre-configured vdevice models with the "For Presentation" outputs option are installed by
default in the AWS software for relevant devices. Those devices are physicians displays,
CDRW, and Archives.
Note…
16.1
If the Netscape page appears to show incorrect information, click Reload to
refresh its cache.
Add and Configure Available Printers
16.1.1 Add an Available Printer
1. Start the system and log in to the AWS as apps user if necessary.
2. Minimize the application and open Netscape.
3. Log in as a service user.
4. Under the Service Shortcuts column, select Add New Output Device.
5. Select Browse Dir. laser_cameras.
6. Select one of the following:
•
Install Agfa 4500M.
•
Install Kodak DryView 8610 laser imager connected via Kodak PACS Link
Medical Image Manager 200.
•
Install Fuji FM-DP L (High Resolution) imager connected via FN-PS551
DICOM Print Server.
•
Install Fuji Drypix 4000, 5000, or 7000 High Resolution Printers.
•
Install Kodak DryView 8900.
•
Install Konica 793.
•
Install Agfa LR 5200 or 3300 connected via MG3000 DICOM Print Server.
7. Return to Service Tools.
MAN-00625
8-11
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.1.2 Configure the Printer
1. Select Configure Output Devices.
2. Select Browse Dir...laser_cameras.
3. To edit the newly added printer device:
a.
In the ALIAS NAME field, type or update the default Alias Name (for
example, LR5200, DS4500M, Kodak8600, FujiDPL) if provided.
b. Click the Update button.
Note…
The Alias Name is used by the Application user interface to identify this
printer. Choose a meaningful, compact name.
4. Click Edit Configuration File: /linx ... /.cfg. (Choose the first one listed.)
5. In the Group: Print Job Description section, edit the device name and address:
•
Device Name—Called AE Title of the laser printer recorded in Appendix
C—Configuration Worksheet in the Installation Manual (for example,
AGFADICOM)
•
Device Address—Enter the laser printer Network IP address and its
listening port number separated by a colon (:)
6. Confirm the parameter settings for the specified printer as listed in Appendix
A—Output Device Factory Configurations in the Installation Manual.
7. Select the Update button to save the changes.
8. Select Service Tools.
16.1.3 AWS Print SCU Setup
Note…
If there is more than one printer, this step needs to be performed only once.
1. Select DROC.
2. Select Software Configuration.
3. Select Browse Directory ./installed/devices.
4. Select Edit Physical device interface for DICOM print scu.
5. For Calling AE Title confirm DIRECT_DIGXRAY (or enter AE title assigned by
DICOM archive administrator recorded in Appendix C in the Installation
manual).
6. Select Update.
16.1.4 Test Output Device Connectivity
Note…
It may be necessary to configure the printer with the IP Address and Calling
AE Title of the Selenia AWS prior to performing this test.
1. Select Service Tools.
2. Test Output Device (if connected to network).
a.
Under Diagnostics select DROC computer.
b. Select Dicom Diagnostics.
c.
8-12
Select the newly added output device from the Dicom Node List and click
Dicom Node Echo Test.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.1.5 Add the New Printer to the List of Outputs
1. Minimize the Netscape window and maximize the application window.
2. In the Selenia application, select Edit>Outputs.
3. Highlight No Outputs.
4. Select Copy and enter a New Name (for example, LR5200) in the dialog box.
5. Click OK. The new name is added to the list in Edit Outputs.
6. Select the new name.
7. Click Edit.
8. Select laser_camera tab.
9. Select the printer alias name just added in the printer configuration in Netscape
(for example, LR5200).
10. Click Add to add the new printer to the output devices.
11. Click Accept to close Edit Outputs:<name>.
12. Click OK to close Edit Outputs.
16.1.6 Test the New Printer
To send a test pattern to the printer:
1. Select Admin>Test Patterns. Test Patterns can only be printed from the Admin >
Test Patterns menu.
Note…
When Test Patterns is selected, the dialog box defaults to an installed device.
2. From the Pattern drop-down menu, select SMPTE.
3. Select the printer you just configured.
4. From the Size drop-down menu, select the output size.
5. Click Send to send the SMPTE test pattern to the printer. A dialog box informs
you the image is being sent.
6. Click OK.
7. Examine the printed film for correct output.
8. Click Close to exit.
Note…
MAN-00625
Printing the SMPTE pattern is not intended to produce a film that evaluates
the SMPTE pattern for image quality. It only offers a means of printing
different density patches for the technologists to measure and follow through
time. No image quality evaluation is derived from the SMPTE pattern. It is
not intended to be a diagnostic test even when the setup is correct (linear
LUT). You cannot see the black-on-black and white-on-white correctly.
8-13
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.2
Add and Configure DICOM Archives
DICOM Archives may be added and configured as a new output device at the AWS and then
added to the output devices.
16.2.1 Add an Archive Device Setup
1. Start the system and log in to the AWS as apps user if necessary.
2. Minimize the application and open Netscape.
3. Log in as a service user.
4. Select Service Tools.
5. Select Add new output device.
6. Select Browse Directory ./installable/vdevices/output/archives.
7. If "For Presentation" images are to be archived, select Install DICOM Archive MG FOR PRESENTATION (preferred). If "For Processing" images are to be
archived, then select Install DICOM Archive - MG FOR PROCESSING.
16.2.2 Configure the Archive Device
1. Select Service Tools.
2. Select Configure output devices.
3. Select Browse Directory ./installed/vdevices/output/archives.
4. Edit the newly added device.
5. For ALIAS NAME enter the Called AE title of the DICOM archive Storage
Provider recorded in Appendix C—Configuration Worksheet in the Installation
Manual.
6. Select Update.
7. Under Server Active, Select Edit configuration file...
8. Under Store Job Creation, confirm the following parameter values:
a. Send under one association = N
b. Delay dicom store until study closed = N
c. Always store all images for study = N
Note…
It is recommended that “Delay DICOM store until study closed” be set to N
for SCW and PACS devices, but Y for CAD devices. The Connectivity group
must ensure that these values are set correctly for all installed devices.
9. Under Store Job Description, for the device name enter the Called AE Title of
the Storage Provider of the DICOM archive.
10. Under Store Job Description, for the device address enter the IP address and
Port number of the Storage Provider of the DICOM archive, separated by a
colon (:).
11. Under Commit Job Description, if Storage Commitment is to be used with this
DICOM archive:
a. for enable enter true.
b. for device name enter the Called AE title of the Storage Commitment
Provider of the DICOM archive.
c. for the device address enter the IP address and Port number of the Storage
Commitment Provider of the DICOM archive, separated by a colon (:).
12. Select Update.
8-14
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.2.3 AWS Store SCU Setup
Note…
If there is more than one DICOM Archive, perform Setup only once.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select DROC.
Select Software Configuration.
Select Browse Directory ./installed/devices.
Select Edit Physical device interface for DICOM store scu.
For Calling AE Title confirm DIRECT_DIGXRAY (or enter AE title assigned by
DICOM archive administrator during Selenia installation).
6. Select Update.
16.2.4 Test Output Device Connectivity
Note…
It may be necessary to configure the DICOM Archive with the IP Address
and Calling AE Title of the Selenia AWS prior to performing this test.
1. Select Service Tools.
2. Test Output Device (if connected to network).
a. Under Diagnostics select DROC computer.
b. Select Dicom Diagnostics.
c. Select the newly added output device from the Dicom Node List and click
on Dicom Node Echo Test.
16.2.5 Add the New Archive to the List of Outputs
1.
2.
3.
4.
Minimize the Netscape window and maximize the application window.
In the Selenia application, select Edit>Outputs.
Highlight No Outputs.
Select Copy and enter a New Name (for example, Called AE Title of DICOM
Archive) in the dialog box.
5. Click OK. The new name is added to the list in Edit Outputs.
6. Select the new name.
7. Click Edit.
8. Select archives tab.
9. Select the archive alias name just added in the archive configuration in
Netscape (for example, Called AE Title of DICOM Archive).
10. Click Add to add the new archive to the output devices.
11. Click Accept to close Edit Outputs:<name>.
12. Click OK to close Edit Outputs.
16.2.6 Storage Commit Setup
If Storage Commitment is to be used with a DICOM archive:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select DROC.
Select Software Configuration.
Select Browse Directory ./installed/services.
Select Edit Storage Commit Server.
For Calling AE Title confirm DIRECT_DIGXRAY (or enter the AE title for the
Selenia provided by the PACS administrator)
6. For Report Port, enter 2400.
7. Select Update.
8. Select Service Tools.
MAN-00625
8-15
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.2.7 Retrieve Priors
1. Select DROC.
2. Select Retrieve Priors Configuration.
3. Select Add New QueryRetrieve Device.
4. Select one of the following:
a.
Install DR Systems PACS Gateway
b. Install GE Centricity 1.0
c.
Install GE Centricity 2.0
d. Install GE PathSpeed
e.
Install Agfa IMPAX
f.
Install eRad Practice Builder
g.
Install FUJI SYNAPSE (3.0)
h. Install Insite One
i.
Install Kodak Archive Server
j.
Install Kodak DirectView
k.
Install McKesson Horizon
l.
Install Merge Fusion Server
m. Install Mammography Information Management System (MIMS)
n. Install NeuroStar MediStar PACS
o. Install Phillips EasyAccess Enterprise
p. Install Generic Retrieve Priors-hierarchical model only
q. Install Generic Retrieve Priors-relational model
r.
Install Siemens Mondo PACS
s.
Install Siemens Sienet
t.
Install Stentor iSite Server (3.2)
5. Return to Service Tools.
6. Select DROC.
7. Select Retrieve Priors Configuration.
8. Select Configure QueryRetrieve Devices.
9. Select Edit for the newly added QueryRetrieve Device.
10. Enter an Alias Name (for example, QRSCP) in the ALIAS NAME field. Note that
the Alias Name is used to identify the QueryRetrieve Device in the Application
user interface, so choose a value that is compact, but meaningful.
11. Record the Alias Name.
12. Select Update.
13. Click Edit configuration file.
8-16
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
14. In Group: config, enter the AE Title and port information for the AWS and the
QueryRetrieve Device:
•
For aws_ae_title, confirm DIRECT_DIGXRAY (or enter QueryRetrieve client
AE Title for the Selenia provided by the PACS administrator).
•
For destination_ae_title, confirm DIRECT_DIGXRAY (or enter Storage
Provider AE Title for the Selenia provided by the PACS administrator).
•
For c_store_port, enter 7400.
•
For query_address, enter the IP Address, Port number, and AE Title of the
Query Provider of the QueryRetrieve Device separated by colons (for
example, 172.16.2.73:104:QRSCP).
•
For retrieve_address, enter the IP Address, Port number, and AE Title of the
Retrieve Provider of the QueryRetrieve Device separated by colons (for
example, 172.16.2.73:104:QRSCP).
15. At the end of Group: gui, confirm that Post Alarm on successful import is false,
and delete retrieved image is true.
16. In Group: import, set procedure match to true or false. If they want to make
sure that any images match an existing procedure, they can set this to true.
Otherwise, leave it false.
17. Select Update.
16.2.8 Test Output Device Connectivity
1. Select Service Tools.
2. Test Output Device (if connected to network):
a. Under Diagnostics select DROC computer.
b. Select Dicom Diagnostics.
c. Select the newly added output device from the Dicom Node List and click
on Dicom Node Echo Test.
MAN-00625
8-17
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.3
Add and Configure a CAD Server
This section describes setting up a mammography CAD Server as a Selenia output device.
In a configuration that includes a MIMS or a facility PACS, images should be
sent directly to the CAD Server, rather than routed through the MIMS or PACS.
Note…
16.3.1 R2 ImageChecker D Configuration
1. Follow the instructions in the R2 ImageChecker D service manual regarding
installation, access to the Service Tool Utility, and configuration.
2. Within the Service Tool Utility, make sure that the following configuration
parameter values are set:
a.
STU: Config: Input: DICOM page: Consult with the connectivity specialist
for the Max End of Case Timeout setting that should be used for each
Selenia AWS digital input for this site.
Max End of Case Timeout (sec) ______________________
Note…
The Hologic preferred configuration is to send images to CAD from Selenia
AWS at the close of study. Given that configuration, choose this value based
on the site's network transfer performance. If the customer is using a LAN (for
example, 100BaseT or faster) that is not overloaded with network traffic, the
value could be set as low as 30 seconds. If the customer is using a slower
WAN (for example, T1, T3) to transfer images from Selenia AWS to CAD, this
value should be higher, at 180 seconds or more. The maximum value is 900
seconds.
b. STU: Config: Secondary Tasks: Misc page:
•
Mass Algorithm Thresholds Set: Algorithm 2004 - Balanced Sensitivity
& False Positives (B)
•
Microcalcification Algorithm Thresholds Set: Algorithm 2004 Balanced Sensitivity & False Positives (B)
•
Variable Sized Markers: OFF
•
Malc Markers: OFF
•
Mammography CAD SR Output Mode: 5.x
16.3.2 iCAD Second Look Digital Configuration
1. Follow the instructions in the iCAD/Hologic Second Look Digital service
manual regarding installation, access to the CAD System Configuration screen,
and configuration.
2. Within the System Configuration table screen, make sure that the following
configuration parameter values are set:
a.
purge_value: 72
b. send_sr_retries: 10
c.
sr_retries_delay: 3
d. process_mag_views: No
e.
8-18
process_spot_compression: No
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
3. Within the Remote Device table screen, consult with the connectivity specialist
for the timeout_value setting that should be used for each Selenia AWS remote
input device for this site.
timeout_value (sec) ______________________
Note…
The Hologic preferred configuration is to send images to CAD from Selenia
AWS at the close of study. Given that configuration, choose this value based on
the site's network transfer performance. If the customer is using a LAN (for
example, 100BaseT or faster) that is not overloaded with network traffic, the
value could be set as low as 30 seconds. If the customer is using a slower WAN
(for example, T1, T3) to transfer images from Selenia AWS to CAD, this value
should be higher, at 180 seconds or more. The maximum value is 900 seconds.
Note…
When more than one image for the same patient and study is received under
one DICOM association, the iCAD Second Look Digital closes the CAD case
immediately after the DICOM association is closed. The timeout_value is
applied only when one image is received per DICOM association.
16.3.3 Add a CAD device to the host files
1. Minimize the application.
2. Type from a Terminal Window su then press Return. Enter the root password.
3. Type from a Terminal Window dtpad /etc/hosts then press Return.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the hosts file and add the following line:
CAD01 <tab><CAD server IP>
Note…
CAD01 is a local alias and need not correspond to the AE title of the CAD
server.
5. Click on File>Save as (needed).
6. Type from the Terminal Window exit then press Return.
16.3.4 Add the CAD device
1. Log into Netscape as service and select Service Tools.
2. Click Add New Output Device.
3. Click Browse to directory: .../output/physician_displays.
4. Select one of the following:
a.
Install CAD Server - send at close of study (preferred)
b. Install CAD Server - send immediate
Note…
Selection “a” is preferred. Contact a Connectivity Specialist before choosing
“b”.
5. Click the Service Tools link on the top left of the screen.
MAN-00625
8-19
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.3.5 Configure the CAD Device
1. Click Configure Output Devices.
2. Click Browse to directory: .../output/physician_displays.
3. Click the selection to edit the device which you just added.
4. Set the "ALIAS NAME" field to CAD01.
5. Click Update at the bottom of the screen.
6. Click Edit configuration file to edit cad.cfg (under SERVER ACTIVE).
7. Under the Store Job Creation Group, confirm “Y” for all three parameters
(assuming “a” in step 4 was selected).
8. Under the Store Job Description Group:
a.
Set device name to the CAD Server AE title recorded in
Appendix C—Configuration Worksheet in the Installation Manual.
b. Set device address to the CAD Server IP Address:Port number recorded in
Appendix C—Configuration Worksheet in the Installation Manual.
c.
Confirm that the Storage Class field is set to "MG FOR PROCESSING".
9. Click Update.
16.3.6 Test Output Device Connectivity
1. Select Service Tools.
2. Test Output Device (if connected to network).
a.
Under Diagnostics select DROC computer.
b. Select Dicom Diagnostics.
c.
Select the newly added output device from the Dicom Node List and click
on Dicom Node Echo Test.
16.3.7 Add the New CAD to the List of Outputs
1. Minimize the Netscape window and maximize the application window.
2. In the Selenia application, select Edit>Outputs.
3. Highlight No Outputs.
4. Click Copy and enter a New Name (for example, CAD) in the dialog box.
5. Click OK. The new name is added to the list in Edit Outputs.
6. Select the new name.
7. Click Edit.
8. Select physician_displays tab.
9. Select the CAD alias name just added in the physician_displays configuration in
Netscape (for example, CAD01).
10. Click Add to add the new CAD to the output devices.
11. Click Accept to close Edit Outputs:<name>.
12. Click OK to close Edit Outputs.
8-20
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.4
Add and Configure a Workstation
This section describes setting up a diagnostic review workstation as a Selenia output device.
16.4.1 Add a new Physician Display
1. Start the system and log in to the AWS as apps user if necessary.
2. Minimize the application and maximize Netscape. Log into Netscape as service
and select Service Tools.
3. Click Add New Output Device.
4. Click Browse to directory: .../output/physician_displays.
5. Select one of the following:
a. Generic Workstation Interface - MG FOR PRESENTATION (preferred).
b. Generic Workstation Interface - MG FOR PROCESSING.
6. Click Service Tools link on the top left of the screen.
16.4.2 Configure the Physician Display
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click Configure Output Devices.
Click Browse to directory: .../output/physician_displays.
Click the selection to edit the device which you just added.
Set the “ALIAS NAME” field to the called AE Title of the Workstation Storage
Provider or another value meaningful to technologists.
Click Update at the bottom of the screen.
Click Edit configuration file to edit “wkstn.cfg” (there are two links that both
point to the workstation.cfg file - it doesn’t matter which one you select).
Under the Store Job Creation Group, confirm N for all three parameters.
Under the Store Job Description Group:
a. Set "device name" to the Storage Provider Workstation AE title recorded in
Appendix C—Configuration Worksheet in the Installation Manual.
b. Set "device address" to the Storage Provider Workstation IP address:Port
number, recorded in Appendix C—in the Installation Manual.
Click Update.
16.4.3 Test Output Device Connectivity
1. Select Service Tools.
2. Test Output Device (if connected to network).
a. Under Diagnostics Select DROC computer.
b. Select Dicom Diagnostics.
c. Select the newly added output device from the Dicom Node List and click
on Dicom Node Echo Test.
MAN-00625
8-21
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.4.4 Add Workstation to the List of Outputs
1. Minimize the Netscape window and maximize the application window.
2. Select Edit>Outputs in the Selenia application to add the workstation to the
outputs.
3. Highlight No Outputs.
4. Click Copy and enter a New Name (for example, SVDXxx or SVRTxx) in the
dialog box.
5. Click OK. The new name is added to the list in Edit Outputs.
6. Select the new name.
7. Click Edit.
8. Select physician_displays tab.
9. Select the alias name just added in the physician_displays configuration in
Netscape (for example, the called AE Title of the Workstation Storage Provider
or another value meaningful to technologists.
10. Select Add to add the new device to the output devices.
11. Click Accept to close EditOutput<name>.
12. Click OK to close Edit Outputs.
16.5
Modality Worklist Configuration
The Modality Worklist Service allows the Selenia AWS to obtain patient and study
information electronically from another system, reducing and potentially eliminating manual
data entry of patient and study information by the operator. If the Modality Worklist software
option is installed, and there is a Modality Worklist Provider available at the site, follow
these instructions to configure the Selenia AWS to communicate with it.
16.5.1 Configure the IP Address and Host Name of the Modality Worklist Provider
1. Start the system and log in to the AWS as apps user if necessary.
2. Minimize the application.
3. Type from a Terminal Window su then Press Return.
4. Enter the root password.
5. Type from a Terminal Window dtpad /etc/hosts then press Return.
6. Enter a new line at the end of the file, or update the existing BROKER line in the
file: IP Address <tab> Hostname <tab> #Comment (for example, 172.16.2.117
<tab> BROKER <tab> #Modality Worklist Provider).
7. Save the changes to the file (File > Save) and close the text editor (File > Exit).
8. Type from the Terminal window exit then press Return.
8-22
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.5.2 Worklist Configuration
1.
Determine if the Modality Worklist Service is running by double-clicking the
Operator AWS icon and looking for MWLquery_001 in the Task Launcher window.
2. Select the Kill Task button next to the MWLquery_001 server.
3. Log in as service user to Netscape.
4. Select DROC.
5. Select Worklist Configuration.
6. The Service Tools window displays the message:
Successfully launched Worklist Configurator...it should appear shortly.
If this fails, try running mprun worklist_configuration.launch from
an AWS terminal window.
7. The Modality Worklist Configuration GUI window is displayed containing two
buttons, Edit and Quit.
8. Select Edit.
9. The MWL Configuration Tool window is displayed. The configuration tool is
composed of the following tabs:
• Communications
• Polling
• Requested Fields
• Queries
• UI Configuration
• Database Mappings
10. In the Communications tab window, enter the Calling AE Title of the Selenia
MWL Client, or leave the default value DIRECT_DIGXRAY.
11. Enter the Called AE Title of the Modality Worklist Provider from Appendix C—
Configuration Worksheet in the Installation Manual.
12. Select the Hostname of the Modality Worklist Provider from the drop-down list
box (for example, BROKER).
13. Enter the Port number of the Modality Worklist Provider.
14. Select File > Save.
15. Select File > Quit.
Note…
MAN-00625
Consult with a Connectivity Specialist regarding configuration of the
remaining tabs.
8-23
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.6
Add and Configure the AWS CD-RW
During installation, the CD Read Write Drive (CD-RW) was added and configured as a new
output and then added to the output devices.
16.6.1 Add CD-RW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start the system and log in to the AWS as apps user if necessary.
Minimize the application and open Netscape.
Log in as a service user.
Select Add New Output Device.
Select Browse dir... cdrw.
Select Install CDRW - MG FOR PROCESSING.
Return to Service Tools.
Repeat steps 4 through 7 but select Install CDRW - MG FOR PRESENTATION
instead.
16.6.2 Configure the CD-RW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Configure Output Devices.
Select Browse Dir...cdrw.
Select Edit for the newly added CDRW FOR PROCESSING device.
Enter an Alias Name of CDRW 4PROC then click Update.
Repeat steps 1 to 4, but enter CDRW 4PRES and click Update.
16.6.3 Add CDRW 4Pres to the List of Outputs
1.
2.
3.
4.
Minimize Netscape and maximize the Selenia application.
Select Edit >Outputs.
Highlight No Outputs.
Select Copy and enter a New Name (for example, CD-RW 4Pres) in the dialog
box.
5. Click OK. The new name is added to the Edit Outputs list.
6. Select the new name and click Edit. the Edit Output.<name> appears.
7. Select cdrw tab.
8. Select alias name CDRW 4PRES.
9. Click Add to add the new CD-RW to the output devices.
10. Click Accept to close Edit Output<name>.
11. Add the other CDRW by repeating steps 3 to 10, using CDRW 4PROC.
12. Click OK to close Edit Outputs.
8-24
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.7
Optionally, Set Up Output Devices to use Alternate Queues
If the site needs to have jobs going to workstations, a CAD device, and an archive, use this
procedure to move an existing archive to the alternate queue.
16.7.1 Create Alternate spooler
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Start the system and log in to the AWS as apps user if necessary.
Minimize the application and open Netscape.
Select Service Tools.
Under Configuration click DROC.
Click Software Configuration.
Click Browse Directory ./installed/services.
Click Edit Job Support Services (JSS) Server.
Click Edit configuration file: /linx_mp/resources/./installed/raw/…/jss.cfg.
a. Change the turn_on_alternate_spooler value to yes.
b. Click on the Update button on the bottom of the screen.
16.7.2 Configure the Alternate Spooler
1. Click the Service Tools link at the top of the page.
2. Under Configuration click DROC.
3. Click Software Configuration.
4. Click Add Software Resources.
5. Click Install Directory ./installed/raw.
6. Click Install Physical Device interface for Dicom Store SCU.
7. Click on Service Tools link at the top of the page.
8. Click Configure Output Devices.
9. Click on the edit link for the archive.
10. Click Edit configuration file: /linx_mp/resources/./installed/raw/…/
archive.cfg.
a.
Find the Group: Server.
b. Change the spooler name value to DicomStoreAlternateSpooler.
c.
Note…
Click on the Update button on the bottom of the screen.
These steps can be performed upon installing the archive if desired. These
steps may also be applied to a workstation or CAD device by editing the
appropriate configuration file and changing the spooler name.
11. Select Service Tools, minimize Netscape and maximize the application.
12. Select File>Exit to restart the application.
13. Select Restart the computer and click Yes.
MAN-00625
8-25
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.8
AWS Bar Code Reader
The Bar Code Reader must be configured to the appropriate system if the system is
connected to a workflow manager.
16.8.1 Configure the Bar Code Reader
1. Start the system and log in as Apps if necessary.
2. Minimize the application and maximize Netscape as necessary.
3. Select DROC.
4. Select Bar Code Scanner Configuration.
5. Select Launch Bar Code Configurator.
6. Select Configure Bar Code Scanner.
7. Review the following fields:
Key Data Base Field----Visit, Admission ID
Strip Code 39 Start/Stop Codes----YES
Window Width----0
Window Justification----LEFT
Window Offset----0
Serial Port Number-----/dev/cua/3
Baud Rate----9600
Parity----odd
Data Bits----7
Stop Bits----1
8. Click Accept. The dialog box closes and the Bar Code Client dialog box
displays.
8-26
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
16.8.2 Set up the Bar Code Reader
With the Bar Code Client Dialog Box displayed, scan these bar codes:
1. Set the Bar Code Reader back to factory defaults:
2. Do not have the Bar Code reader send the Label ID.
MAN-00625
8-27
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
3. Enable the Bar Code Reader to read full ASCII.
4. Set the minimum length that can be read to 1 character.
5. Verification—See Section 16.8.3, p. 8-29, to verify the bar code reader setup.
6. Click Exit.
7. Minimize Netscape.
8-28
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
Note…
The Bar Code Reader cannot be used to fill in new patient entry fields. It is
intended only to be used for searching for patients in the system.
16.8.3 Verify the Bar Code Reader
Verify the Bar Code Reader
Operation:
1. At the AWS, start
Netscape by clicking on
the desktop icon.
2. At the Login window,
type your login and
password.
3. Under Service Tools,
click Configuration/
DROC.
4. Under configuration,
click Barcode Scanner
Configurator.
5. In the Barcode Client
Dialog box that follows,
select Launch Barcode
Configurator.
6. Using the bar codes
shown in Figure 8-1, test
the operation of the bar
code reader by scanning
one of the barcodes.
7. Verify that the number to
the left of the bar code
appears in the Bar Code
Client window.
8. Repeat for each number.
9. Click Exit.
10. Minimize Netscape.
Figure 8-1: Handheld Laser Scanner Programming Guide
MAN-00625
8-29
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 8—Software Maintenance
Configuring the Output Devices
8-30
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 9—Parts List
Introduction
Chapter 9—Parts List
1.0
Introduction
This chapter of the manual provides tabular listings of the serviceable components in
Selenia. Part numbers and descriptions are provided for component identification.
2.0
The Replacement Parts Lists
The Parts Lists are:
•
“Gantry Power Distribution Functions Parts List” on p. 9-1
•
“System Control and X-ray Functions Parts List” on p. 9-2
•
“C-arm Functions Parts List” on p. 9-2
•
“Image Acquisition Sub-system Parts List” on p. 9-3
•
“Selenia Paddles” on p. 9-4
•
“TechMate Parts List” on p. 9-6
•
“Miscellaneous Parts List” on p. 9-6
The replacement parts lists are divided into four parts:
•
Part Number: This is the order number for the Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)/part. The
Hologic Service Department requires this number when placing an order.
•
Description: Identifies the FRU/part by name.
•
Refer To: Identifies the Chapter and Section within the Service Manual to go to for
installation or remove and replace procedures for that FRU/part.
•
Comments: Contains additional information. Also identifies components which make up
the FRU. If any of these components fail, replace the FRU.
Table 9-1: Gantry Power Distribution Functions Parts List
Part
Number
Description
Refer To
1-003-0341 Power Distribution
Board
1-003-0354 Mains Power Board
Chapter 5, Section 8.1, p. 5-37
1-003-0483 Power Supply
Interconnect Board
Chapter 5, Section 8.6, p. 5-41
Chapter 5, Section 8.2, p. 5-38
4-000-0135 Emergency Off Switch Chapter 5, Section 8.3, p. 5-38
1-070-0025 Circuit Breaker
Chapter 5, Section 8.4, p. 5-39
Various
Fuses
4-000-0207 Power Distribution
Assembly
MAN-00625
Comments
Adjustment and Replacement Procedures
Qty 2, 1 each on Left and Right Gantry doors
Appendix B—Technical References Refer to Appendix B for Fuse Identification
and Location
Chapter 5, Section 8.5, p. 5-40
If the Isolation Transformer fails, replace the
Power Distribution Assembly.
9-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 9—Parts List
The Replacement Parts Lists
Table 9-2: System Control and X-ray Functions Parts List
Part Number
Description
Refer To
1-003-0481
1-003-0288
Host Microprocessor Board
Motor / Lamp Control Board
Chapter 5, Section 7.2, p. 5-23
Chapter 5, Section 7.3, p. 5-24
4-000-0014
HV Generator Assembly
Chapter 5, Section , p. 5-16
1-003-0335
Generator Microprocessor
Board
Chapter 5, Section 7.4, p. 5-25
1-003-0333
1-003-0336
Filament Control Board
Rotor Control Board
Chapter 5, Section 7.5, p. 5-25
Chapter 5, Section 7.6, p. 5-26
4-000-0029
Beam Limiting Assembly
Chapter 5, Section 6.7, p. 5-19 Contains collimator blades,
collimator Drive Motor,
collimator Lamp Assembly,
Mirror Assembly, Lamp /
Mirror Drive Motor, Dual Filter
Motor, Filter Drive Motor,
Beam Limiting Assembly
Chassis, Fan Assembly
Varian M113R 2-425-0037 X-Ray Tube
2-200-0010
Tubehead Cooling Fan
Chapter 5, Section 6.8, p. 5-20
Chapter 5, Section 9.1, p. 5-42
1-003-0308 (right)
1-003-0324 (left)
1-003-0289
Tubehead Switch Boards
Chapter 5, Section 7.7, p. 5-27
Tubehead Filament Protect
Board
Tubehead Microprocessor
Board
Chapter 5, Section 7.8, p. 5-27
1-003-0300
1-003-0474
Comments
Contains the HV Inverter, HV
Multiplier and HV Control
Board.
Chapter 5, Section 7.9, p. 5-28
Tubehead Motor Driver Board Chapter 5, Section 7.9, p. 5-28
Table 9-3: C-arm Functions Parts List
Part Number
Description
Refer To
Comments
1-003-0307 (right)
1-003-0328 (left)
1-003-0095
C-arm Switch Board
Chapter 5, Section 7.13, p. 5-30
Mag Tray Detector Board
Chapter 5, Section 7.14, p. 5-31
1-003-0301
C-arm Rotation Display Board
1-003-0303
VTA Motor Driver Board
Chapter 5, Section 7.15, p. 5-33 Qty 2, 1 each on Left and
Chapter 5, Section 7.16, p. 5-33 Right Gantry doors
Chapter 5, Section 7.17, p. 5-34
1-195-3058
2-320-0028
C-arm Rotation Potentiometer
Chapter 5, Section 9.2, p. 5-43
C-arm Rotation Drive Motor and Gear Box Chapter 5, Section 9.3, p. 5-44
2-320-0037
9-200-0472
C-arm Vertical Drive Motor and Gear Box Chapter 5, Section 9.4, p. 5-45
Compression Thickness Potentiometer Chapter 5, Section 9.5, p. 5-46
1-003-0465 (right)
1-003-0466 (left)
Compression/AEC Position Display
Board
Chapter 5, Section 7.18, p. 5-34
1-003-0501
2-155-0006
Paddle Detect Board
Compression Device Slip Clutch
Chapter 5, Section 7.20, p. 5-35
Chapter 5, Section 9.6, p. 5-47
4-000-0132
4-000-0209
Compression Device Brake Assembly
Compression Motor and Motor Brake
Assembly
Timing Belt
Chapter 5, Section 9.7, p. 5-49
Chapter 5, Section 9.7, p. 5-49
2-230-4001
9-2
Chapter 5, Section 9.8, p. 5-50
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 9—Parts List
The Replacement Parts Lists
Table 9-4: Image Acquisition Sub-system Parts List
Part Number
Description
Refer To
ASY-00457
FAB-02401
MEL-00061
1-040-1275
1-096-0102
Digital Image Receptor
Image Receptor Dust Filter
Brick Assembly
Fiber Optic Cable
Display
Chapter 5, Section 6.2, p. 5-15
Chapter 5, Section 6.5, p. 5-16
Chapter 5, Section 6.9, p. 5-21
Chapter 5, Section 6.1, p. 5-13
Chapter 4, Section 5.1, p. 4-8
1-096-0128
1-096-0104
1-096-0107
1-096-0123
CMP-00308
1-096-0105
ASY-01403
1-003-0503
1-003-0505
1-095-0049
1-003-0506 (right)
1-003-0504 (left)
2-200-0024
5-000-0057
1-070-0022
PWR-00052
Trackball
Keyboard
Bar Code Reader
Bar Code Reader Power Supply
Sun Ultra™ 45 Computer
CD-RW Drive
Power Distribution Assembly
Power Control Board
Power Distribution Board
Low Voltage Power Supply
LED Board
Chapter 4, Section 6.0, p. 4-10
Chapter 4, Section 7.0, p. 4-11
Chapter 4, Section 9.0, p. 4-13
Chapter 4, Section 9.0, p. 4-13
Chapter 4, Section 10.0, p. 4-14
Chapter 4, Section 8.2, p. 4-13
Chapter 4, Section 13.0, p. 4-20
Chapter 4, Section 15.0, p. 4-21
Chapter 4, Section 14.0, p. 4-21
Chapter 4, Section 22.0, p. 4-24
Chapter 4, Section 17.0, p. 4-22
Chapter 4, Section 18.0, p. 4-22
Chapter 4, Section 20.0, p. 4-23
Chapter 4, Section 22.0, p. 4-24
Chapter 4, Section 21.0, p. 4-23
Chapter 4, Section 23.1, p. 4-25
Various
MAN-00625
Fan, 115 VAC
Assembly, Stop Switch
Circuit Breaker
Power Supply, UPS 1100 VA 700
Watts
UPS Battery
Fuses
Comments
Includes display power
supply.
AWS Computer
Qty 4
AWS Emergency Stop Switch
Domestic units only.
Selenia UPS
Chapter 4, Section 23.4, p. 4-28
Appendix B, Section 9.0, p. B-38 Fuse Identification and
Location
9-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 9—Parts List
The Replacement Parts Lists
Table 9-5: Selenia Paddles
Paddle P/N
Description
Plastic P/N
Paddle P/N
Description
Plastic P/N
ASY-00596
7.5 cm Spot Magnification 3-535-0012
ASY-00600
7.5 cm Spot Contact
3-535-0012
ASY-00601
10 cm Contact
FAB-00608
ASY-00602
10 cm Perf. Localization
3-000-4617
ASY-00603
10 cm Open Localization
3-000-1528
ASY-00604
15 cm Contact
FAB-00609
ASY-00605
15 cm Perf. Localization
3-535-0063
(Perf. Plastic)
ASY-00606
15 cm Magnification
FAB-00752
1-002-0325
(Detail Grid
Locator)
9-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 9—Parts List
The Replacement Parts Lists
Table 9-5: Selenia Paddles (Continued)
Paddle P/N
Description
Plastic P/N
Paddle P/N
Description
ASY-00607
15 cm Open Localization
4-000-0144
ASY-00608
18X24 Standard w/shift
5-000-0072
ASY-00609
24X30 Standard
5-000-0073
ASY-00610
18X24 Frameless Spot
FAB-00757
4-000-0293
ASY-00611
18X24 Ultrasound
3-535-0087
ASY-00612
18X24 Fast w/shift
5-000-0072
ASY-00613
24X30 Fast Paddle
5-000-0073
ASY-00614
Small Breast Paddle
FAB-00610
ASY-00615
10 cm Magnification
FAB-00754
MAN-00625
Plastic P/N
9-5
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 9—Parts List
The Replacement Parts Lists
Table 9-6: TechMate Parts List
Part Number
Description
Refer To
CMP-00212
Computer, TechMate
CMP-00236
CMP-00213
MONITOR, BARCO, 3MP PAINTED
Chapter 4, Section 5.2, p. 4-9
KEYBOARD, MINI 88 KEY, USB, WHITE Chapter 4, Section 7.2, p. 4-11
1-096-0128
PWR-00033
TRACKBALL, DT-225/USB
Chapter 4, Section 6.2, p. 4-10
Power Supply, Back-up UPS 120V 60Hz Chapter 4, Section 23.3, p. 4-27
Comments
Chapter 4, Section 11.0, p. 4-18
UPS Battery
Chapter 4, Section 23.4, p. 4-28
Table 9-7: Miscellaneous Parts List
Part Number
2-580-0207
9-6
Description
Synthetic Lubricant
Refer To
Comments
Chapter 4, Section 3.0, p. 4-5
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration
Introduction
Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration
1.0
Introduction
This chapter provides information and instructions for reconfiguring the Selenia Display Arm.
Note…
2.0
In a standard installation, the Selenia Display Arm is on the right side of the
Acquisition Workstation (AWS). The TechMate Swivel Arm, if present, is on
the left side of the AWS.
Identification
AWS without TechMate
AWS with TechMate
Figure 10-1: AWS—Front View
MAN-00625
10-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration
Reconfiguring the Selenia Display Arm Assembly
3.0
Reconfiguring the Selenia Display Arm Assembly
The rear cover and radiation shield must be removed when the display arm is reconfigured.
Refer to Chapter 4, Accessing Internal Components—Selenia AWS, p. 4-3, and “Radiation
Shield Replacement” on p. 4-19.
3.1
Removing the Selenia Display
1. Remove the cable cover from the
display, and disconnect all cables.
2. Disconnect the cable clamp.
3. Remove the display by removing the
four screws from the display bracket.
Cable
clamp
Display
bracket
screws (4)
Figure 10-2: Removing the Selenia Display
3.2
Removing the Arm
1. Remove the Selenia Display Arm (Figure 10-3).
2. Flip to expose the harness.
3. Cut the cable ties and remove the harness.
Figure 10-3: Removing the Display Arm
10-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration
Reconfiguring the Selenia Display Arm Assembly
3.3
Removing the Base
Note…
If your system includes TechMate, before removing the base, perform the
following procedures (Sections 3.3.1, 3.3.2, and 3.3.3) to remove the
TechMate Display and Swivel Arm from the base.
If the system does not have TechMate, proceed to Section 3.3.4.
3.3.1
Removing the TechMate Display Cables
Figure 10-4: Standard Cable Routing
1. Remove the cable cover from the display, and disconnect all cables.
2. Disconnect the cable clamps, #1.
3. Cut cable ties, #2.
4. Remove all cable wrap. Note the lengths of the service loops.
5. Carefully pull the cables down through the left side of the AWS.
6. Reverse the direction of the Display Power Module, #3.
3.3.2
Removing the TechMate Display
1. Remove the Display mounting
bracket cover screw.
Cover screw
Bracket bolt
2. Remove the Display mounting
bracket bolt.
3. Remove the Display.
Figure 10-5: Removing the TechMate Display
MAN-00625
10-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration
Reconfiguring the Selenia Display Arm Assembly
3.3.3
Removing the Arm
Remove the TechMate Swivel
Arm Assembly (Figure 10-6).
Figure 10-6: Removing the TechMate Swivel Arm
3.3.4
Remove and Flip the Base
1. Remove the label and the four screws in the center of the base.
Figure 10-7: Removing the Base
2. Remove both display arm base clamps.
3. Flip to expose the harness under the base.
4. Reverse the harness direction.
3.4
Reconfigure the Base Wiring
Determine the location (right or left) for the trackball (not shown):
1. Cut the cable ties.
2. Reroute the harness for left side configuration. See Figure 10-8 and Figure 10-9.
10-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration
Reconfiguring the Selenia Display Arm Assembly
Figure 10-8: Standard Harness Routing (right-side configuration)
Figure 10-9: Optional Harness Routing (left-side configuration)
3. Secure the harness and trackball cable with cable ties.
4. Reinstall the swivel base.
3.5
Modify the Selenia Display Arm for Left-Side Articulation
3.5.1
Realigning the Cover on the Arm’s Post
1. With the cover fastened to the arm as
shown in A, move the cover
counterclockwise to the position shown
by the dotted line B.
late
A
2. Remove the four button-head screws
holding the cover to the post.
B
post
3. Turn the cover back to position A (being
sure the elongated holes in the cover are
facing the outside end) and reinstall using
the original hardware.
Figure 10-10: Aligning the Cover Plate
MAN-00625
10-5
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 10—Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration
TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration
3.5.2
Realigning the Shaft
1. Remove the two
locking set screws,
and the two conical
set screws. It is not
necessary to
remove the shaft.
2.
Rotate only the
shaft
counterclockwise
approximately
180°.
Shaft
Handle
Right-side
Left-side
180
Set screws(4)
Shaft support
collar
Figure 10-11: Aligning the Shaft
3. Align the holes in the shaft with the holes in the collar and handle as shown.
Notice the holes are slightly staggered in this position.
4. Reinstall the two set screws.
5. Ensure the screws are securely set.
3.5.3
Repositioning the Display Bracket
1. Remove the display bracket by removing
the two screws.
2. Rotate the bracket 180° and reinstall the
screws.
Figure 10-12: Repositioning the Display Bracket
3.6
Modify the Display Arm from Left Side to Right Side
Install the display arm on the left side of the base using the original hardware.
3.6.1
Install the Selenia Display Arm Harness
1. Route the harness from
underneath, and secure with
cable ties.
spiral
wrap (10 in.)
2. Add spiral wraps as shown.
spiral
wrap (16 in.)
Figure 10-13: Harness Routing Through the Display Arm
3.6.2
Install the Display and Cables
Refer to Section 3.1, p. 10-2.
4.0
TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration
If the system has TechMate, follow the procedures in “Chapter 11—TechMate Swivel Arm
Reconfiguration” on p. 11-1.
10-6
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 11—TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration
Introduction
Chapter 11—TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration
1.0
Introduction
This chapter provides information and instructions for reconfiguring the TechMate Swivel
Arm. For information on reconfiguring the Selenia Display Arm, refer to “Chapter 10—
Selenia Display Arm Reconfiguration” on p. 10-1.
Note…
2.0
The AWS is shipped with the TechMate Swivel Arm on the left side and the
Selenia Display Arm on the right side.
Reconfiguring the TechMate Swivel Arm Assembly
2.1
Modify the Swivel Arm for Right-Side Articulation
1. With the cover fastened to the arm as shown in A,
move the cover counterclockwise to the position
shown by the dotted line B.
late
A
B
2. Remove the four button-head screws holding the
cover to the post.
3.
Continue turning the cover to position A (ensuring the post
elongated holes in the cover are facing the outside
end) and reinstall using the original hardware.
4. Remount the arm assembly to the base; see Figure
11-2.
Figure 11-1: Aligning the Cover Plate
Figure 11-2: Reinstalling the Swivel Arm to the Base
MAN-00625
11-1
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 11—TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration
Reconfiguring the TechMate Swivel Arm Assembly
2.2
Route the TechMate Swivel Arm Harness
1. Route the cables up through the right
side of the AWS as shown.
2. Reinstall cable wrap.
3. Install new cable ties as needed.
20 in.
minimum
Figure 11-3: AWS Right-Side Cable Routing
4. Route the harness under the arm,
and secure with cable ties.
Figure 11-4: Harness Routing Through the Swivel Arm
11-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 11—TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration
Reconfiguring the TechMate Swivel Arm Assembly
2.3
Reinstall The Display and Cables
1. Reinstall the Display.
2. Reconnect the DVI and power cable.
3. Position the cables as they were originally so the cover may be easily closed.
4. Reinstall the cable clamp.
5. Reinstall the cover on the Display’s rear compartment.
Legend for Figure 11-5
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power cable
DVI Cable
Spiral Wrap
Cable Clamp
25 in.
minimum
12 in.
Figure 11-5: TechMate Display Connections
.
MAN-00625
11-3
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 11—TechMate Swivel Arm Reconfiguration
Reconfiguring the TechMate Swivel Arm Assembly
11-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Dimensional Information
Appendix A—Specifications
1.0
Dimensional Information
1.1
Tubestand (Gantry with C-arm)
Figure A-1: Tubestand Dimensions
MAN-00625
Height
190.0 cm (74.8 in.)±1.0 cm (0.4 in.); 213.0 cm
(84.0 in.) ±1.0 cm (0.4 in.) at highest C-arm travel
Width
65.0 cm (25.6 in.) ±1.0 cm (0.4 in.) (C-arm at 0°
position)
Depth
110.0 cm (43.3 in.)±1.0 cm(0.4 in.)
Weight
300 kg (661.4 lb) ±20 kg (44.0 lb)
A-1
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Dimensional Information
1.2
Acquisition Workstation
Figure A-2: Acquisition Workstation Dimensions
1.3
Overall Dimensions
189.2 cm (74.5 in.) (H) x 107 cm (42.1 in.) (W) x
76 cm (30.0 in.) (D) (Max.)
Weight
154 kg (340 lb) (Max.)
Acquisition Workstation with Dual Swivel Arms
Figure A-3: Acquisition Workstation with Dual Swivel Arms
A-2
Overall Dimensions
195.6 cm (77.0 in.) (H) x 107 cm (42.1 in.) (W) x
76 cm (30.0 in.) (D) (Max.)
Weight
218 kg (480 lb)
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Operating Environment
2.0
Operating Environment
2.1
3.0
General Operating Conditions
Temperature Range
20° C (68° F) to 30° C (86° F)
Maximum rate of temperature change
<10º C/hr
Relative Humidity Range
10% to 80% non-condensing
BTU output
Typical Range 1700–2500 BTU/hr
Storage Environment
3.1
3.2
Tubestand
Temperature Range
-25° C (-13° F) to +60° C (140° F)
Humidity
Zero to 95% humidity—non-condensing (not
packaged for outdoor storage)
Image Receptor
Storage Temperature Range
10 ºC (50° F) to 40 ºC (104° F
Maximum rate of temperature change
<15º C/hr
Storage Humidity Range
10% to 80% humidity— non-condensing (not
packaged for outdoor storage)
MAN-00625
A-3
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Electrical Input
4.0
Electrical Input
4.1
4.2
A-4
Tubestand
Mains Voltage
200/208/220/230/240 VAC nominal (tap
selectable at installation) ±10%, Single Phase, 50/
60 Hz ± 5%, permanently wired
Mains Impedance
Maximum line impedance not to exceed 0.20
ohms for 220/230/240 VAC, 0.16 ohms for 200/
208 VAC
Maximum Power Consumption
6.5 kVA for 5 second duration
Standby Current
2.0 A (Max.)
Maximum Line Current
35 Amps for 5 seconds
Circuit Breaker Rating
25 Amps—time delay curve to allow for inrush
currents, 200% overload for 7 seconds. (Requires
35 A in-house fuse for ROW installation.)
Acquisition Workstation
Input Line Voltage
100/120/200/208/220/230/240 VAC nominal (tap
selectable at installation), ± 10%
Input Current
8.0 Amps max. @ 100/120 VAC
3.5 Amps max. @ 200/208/220/230/240 VAC
Frequency
50/60 Hz ±5%
Number of Phases
Single
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Acquisition Workstation Technical Information
5.0
Acquisition Workstation Technical Information
MAN-00625
Operating System
Sun™ Solaris OS
Computer Memory
2 GB RAM minimum
Disk capacity
> 60 GB Image Storage
Storage Media
CD-RW Disks
Display Adapter
1600 x 1200 matrix minimum 8 bit gray scale
display
Display
1600 x 1200 matrix minimum 600 cd/m2
nominal brightness
Network Interface
10/100 Base-T Ethernet
Remote Diagnostics
Internet
Graphical User Interface
X-ray exposure control
Configurable mammographic Workflow
Patient demographics
Brightness and contrast control
Magnification screen
Pixel value readout
QC test tools
System Status Monitoring
Error reporting
Unattended archiving and printing
Radiation Shield Pb equivalence
rated for a 0.5 mm Pb (lead) equivalence
A-5
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Tubestand Technical Information
6.0
Tubestand Technical Information
6.1
C-arm
Motorized C-arm Rotation Speed
Variable speed (18° per second maximum).
Rotation speed is service selectable: 50% to
100% in 5% increments. Motor Control provides
soft start and dynamic braking.
C-arm Rotation Range
+195° +2° /-0° to 0° ±0.5° to -150° +0° /-2°
(detent at 0°, ±90°). Rotation angle is displayed
on both sides of Gantry.
Vertical Travel
74.5 cm (29.5 in) total travel.
Source-to-Image Distance (SID)
66.0 cm (26.0 inches) ± 1.0 cm (0.4 inches
Source-to-Image Receptor Support Device Distance
64.0 cm (25.2 inches) ± 1.0 cm (0.4 inches
Magnification Ratio
6.2
A-6
1.8 x for objects 22.5 mm above the
magnification platform breast support surface
Compression
Manual Compression Force
Limited to a maximum of 300 N +0/-89 N (67.4
lb +0/-20 lb) from 0° to +/-90° C-arm rotation.
Not less than 169 N (38 lb) for a C-arm angle
range greater than +150° and an angle less than
-150°.
Motorized Compression
Functions in three operating modes, Precompression, Full-Range, Dual Compression,
user selectable through software.
Pre-Compression Force
70 N +0/-22.3 N to 133.5 N ±22.3 N (15.7 lb +0/
-5 lb to 30 lb ±5 lb)
Full-Range Compression Force
89 N ±22.3 N to 178 N ±22.3 N (20 lb ± 5.0 lb to
40.0 lb ± 5.0 lb)
Dual Mode Compression
Provides Pre-Compression force upon first
activation of compression switch; then, if switch
is activated within 2 seconds, the force is
increased incrementally for each additional
switch activation, up to the user selected FULL
compression force.
Compression Controls
Up/Down controls on both sides of C-arm and on
2-position footswitch (Motorized). Handwheel on
both sides of Compression Device (Manual).
Compression Release
Manual or Automatic. Motorized Release mode
controlled by push-buttons on both sides of the
C-arm. User selectable automatic release mode
raises Compression Device upon exposure
termination. All release functions are disabled if a
Localization paddle is detected.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Tubestand Technical Information
Automatic Compression Release
Moves the compression device upward a
predetermined distance (10 cm). For
Magnification Mode this may be less.
Compression Down Motion Variable Speed Service Selectable between approximately 10%
through 100% of full speed.
6.3
MAN-00625
Compression Force Display
Two LED Displays on the Compression Device
show the compression force through the range of
10 lb to 67.4 lb (44.5 N to 300 N) in 1 lb (4.4 N)
increments.
Compression Force Display Accuracy
±4.5 lb (±20 N)
Compression Thickness Display
Two LED Displays on Compression Device
measures between 0 and 15 cm above image
receptor in 0.1 cm increments. The display is
visible from both sides of the patient.
Compression Thickness Accuracy
±0.5 cm for thicknesses between 0.5 cm and 15
cm
Compression Paddles
Compression paddles are transparent. The
paddles are composed of polycarbonate. The
paddles provide a parallel plane to the image
receptor and do not deflect by more than 1 cm
difference from any surface providing
compression under 25 lb (111.1 N) of
compression force (except for F.A.S.T. paddles.).
The paddles are adjustable to provide the focal
spot, compression device and image receptor
alignment requirement.
X-ray Tube
Focal Spot (NEMA / IEC)
Large (0.3 mm) Nominal
Small (0.1 mm) Nominal
Tube Voltage
20 kV to 39 kV
Tube Current
Large Focal Spot = 100 mA between 25 and 32
kV
Small Focal Spot = 30 mA between 25 and 32 kV
Anode Rotation
180 Hz (9600 RPM minimum)
Anode Angle
Bi-angular: Large focal spot at 16°, Small focal
spot at 10°. X-ray tube angle at 6° to provide 22°
(Large FS) and 16° (Small FS) anode to Image
Receptor plane angle.
Anode Material
Molybdenum
X-ray Window
Beryllium 0.8 mm thickness (maximum)
A-7
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Tubestand Technical Information
6.3.1
X-ray Tube Housing
Over Temperature Protection Sensor
Internally connected in series with the stator
common lead.
Max. Temperature, Tube Housing Surface
55°C (151° F)
Max. Temperature, Tube Head Cover Surface 41°C (105.8° F)
Safety Class
6.4
6.5
IEC 60601-1, Class I, IEC 60601-2-28
X-ray Beam Filtration and Output
Inherent Tube Filtration
0.0 mm Al equivalent
Added Filtration
Two-position filter changer mechanism to carry a
30-micron (0.03 mm) Molybdenum foil filter and
a 30-micron (0.03 mm) Rhodium foil Filter. Type
of filter is user selectable.
Beam Quality HVL for Mo/Mo Operation
At a given kilovolts, the measured HVL with the
compression paddle in the x-ray beam is equal to
or greater than the value of kV /100 +0.03 (in
units of mm of aluminum) but less than the value
of kV /100 +0.12 (in units of mm of aluminum).
Beam Quality HVL for Mo/Rh operation
At a given kilovolts, the measured HVL with the
compression paddle in the x-ray beam is equal to
or greater than the value of kV /100+0.03 mm Al
(in units of mm of aluminum) but less than the
value of kV /100+0.19 mm Al (in units of mm of
aluminum).
Radiation Output
Equal to or greater than 800 mR/second for at
least 3 seconds. Output is measured through the
Compression Paddle, 4.5 cm above the breast
support, 4.0 cm from the chest wall edge, using
exposure techniques of Mo/Mo target/filter, large
focal spot, 28 kV.
X-ray Collimation
Available Collimated X-ray fields
Predefined Collimation Settings
24 x 29 cm
18 x 24 cm
15 x 15 cm
10 x 10 cm
7.0 x 8.5 cm
A-8
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Tubestand Technical Information
6.6
6.7
Light Field Indication
Light Field Lamp
Illuminates for 30 seconds, ±5 seconds, upon
pressing a Light Field switch on either side of the
X-ray tubehead or by pressing a Compression
Down switch. Extinguishes automatically upon
exposure initiation. A shatter shield is provided.
Light Field Illuminance
160 lux (minimum)—meets 21 CFR 1020.31
requirements. Lamp is adjustable to provide
alignment of the light field to the X-ray field.
Light Field-to-X-ray Field Congruency
Within 2% of SID
X-ray Generator
6.7.1
Output Rating
3.2 kilowatt, maximum (isowatt), 100 mA @ 32
kV
Ripple
2% or less (typical), maximum 4%
Topology
Pulse width modulated High Frequency, active
servo controlled
kV /mA Range
mA setting as a function of kV
Large Focal Spot
kV
mA
75 mA
80 mA
85 mA
90 mA
95 mA
100 mA
85 mA
80 mA
75 mA
70 mA
20
21
22
23
24
25-32
33
34-35
36-37
38-39
Note…
kV
20
21
22
23
24
25-32
33-34
35-37
38-39
mA
20 mA
22 mA
24 mA
26 mA
28 mA
30 mA
28 mA
26 mA
24 mA
All above values are for mAs values ≥40 mAs. For mAs values < 40 mAs, the
mA value is adjusted by the mA Factor listed in the table below as a
function of mAs.
mAs
4-6
8-10
12-22
24-38
≥40
MAN-00625
Small Focal Spot
mA Factor
10%
20%
30%
60%
100%
A-9
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Tubestand Technical Information
Large Focal Spot Manual mAs Range:
TABLE 1 (default):
Note…
3 mAs through 400 mAs, 22 steps: 3, 4, 5, 6.4, 8,
10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 64, 80, 100,
125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400.
Lower limit is 4 mAs when grid is in field.
TABLE 2 (user selected):
3 mAs through 400 mAs, 55 steps: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30,
32.5, 35, 37.5, 40, 42.5, 45, 47.5, 50, 55, 60, 65,
70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140,
150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 220, 240, 260,
280, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400.
Note…
Lower limit is 4 mAs when grid is in field.
Note…
In AEC modes, in Large Focal spot, the mA setting adjusts downward, if
necessary, to achieve the calculated mAs. mA can be adjusted as low as 10
mA.
Small Focal Spot Mag Manual mAs Range:
6.7.2
A-10
TABLE 1:
3 mAs through 100 mAs, 16 steps: 3, 4, 5, 6.4, 8,
10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 64, 80, 100
TABLE 2:
3 mAs through 120 mAs, 38 steps: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30,
32.5, 35, 37.5, 40, 42.5, 45, 47.5, 50, 55, 60, 65,
70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120
Accuracy, Reproducibility, and Linearity
Reproducibility
< 0.05 coefficient of variation for 10 consecutive
exposures (21 CFR).
Linearity
< 0.10 for adjacent mAs selections per the
following:
(X1-X2) is less than or equal to 0.10 (X1+X2)
where X1 and X2 are average mR/mAs values for
consecutive exposures (21 CFR).
mAs Accuracy
±5% or ±2 mAs, whichever is greater, from
indicated, measured from the ground side of the
tube circuit.
kV Accuracy
Within 1 kV of the indicated kV
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Imaging System Technical Information
7.0
Imaging System Technical Information
7.1
Image Receptor
Fluid ingress
No fluid from incidental spillage on the top
surface of the Image Receptor seeps inside
Deflection
Does not exceed 1.0 mm at max. compression
Active Imaging Area
24 cm x 29 cm Nominal. The active image area is
marked on the digital image receptor/breast
platform cover.
Image Size, Screening and Diagnostic Exams18 x 24 cm nominal; locations: center, left, right
24 x 29 cm nominal; center location only
Image Size, Diagnostic-Spot Compression 18 x 24 cm nominal; locations: center, left, right
Image Size, Diagnostic-Magnification
18 x 24 cm nominal; center location only
Image Pixel Size
70 µm
Digital Image Receptor MTF -Nyquist frequency> 0.40
MAN-00625
DQE at 0 c/mm
50% or greater at 7.0 mR -0.0/+0.7 mR X-ray
exposure
DQE at Nyquist frequency
15% or greater at 7 mR -0.0/+0.7 mR X-ray
exposure
Saturation
X-ray exposure level at which image pixels are
saturated is not less than 1000 mR
Dynamic Range
Linear response over at least 400:1 in X-ray
exposure
Output Image
14 bit image data
Scatter Rejection
Lorad HTC™ high transmission cellular grid
Chest Wall Access
The distance from the outside edge of the
detector enclosure to the Active Detector Image
Area along the Chest Wall is less than 4 mm. The
chest wall access, i.e., the distance from the
outside edge of the Image Receptor enclosure to
the Active Image Area along the chest wall is less
than 5 mm.
Lateral Wall Access
The distance from the outside edge of the
detector enclosure to the active detector area
along the edges perpendicular to the chest wall is
less than 40 mm.
ACR Phantom Score at MGD = 200 mrad
At least 5 fibers, 4 specks, 4 mass
Image Preview Time
The time between completion of an X-ray
exposure and availability of the Preview image:
less than 20 seconds.
Image non-uniformity
Less than 2% at X-ray exposure of 10 mR
Transmission Limit
Within Federal Regulatory limit for screen-film
mammography systems (21CFR 1020): 0.1 mR/h.
A-11
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Imaging System Technical Information
7.2
A-12
Tissue Exposure Control (TEC) Mode—Enhanced Manual mode
The Breast Density default setting
Selectable via the Generator default screen on
the Acquisition Workstation. Breast density
defaults to the default setting at the beginning of
each new study and when the exposure mode is
first changed to TEC.
Breast Density panel
Update rate once every 2 second Max.
X-ray exposure in TEC mode
Table 1 is consistent with MQSA average
glandular dose requirement not to exceed 300
mrad per exposure to an average (4.2 cm thick
compressed) breast. Table 1 is set by default for
US sites.
Table 0 is configurable by field service to meet
local standards (e.g., max 200 mrad) as required
by a number of states in U.S., Canada, and other
regions of the world.
Mammography Unit Status polling
Between image capture cycles, Acquisition
Workstation requests and displays current
technique at a rate not slower than once every 2
seconds. In TEC mode, the rate increases to no
slower than once per second, but not faster than
once per 0.75 seconds. System response time for
a single Generator Technique command is 1
second or less.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Imaging System Technical Information
7.3
MAN-00625
Automatic Exposure Control (AEC)
AEC Sensor
Positionable in seven locations, centered laterally
in the image receptor support device. Position #1
is located 1 cm from the chest wall. Positions are
spaced in 1.7 cm increments.
The AEC region can be selected automatically by
processing the pre-exposure image data to find
the corresponding dense portion of the breast.
When the AEC region auto-selection is enabled,
the detector area that is scanned is dependent on
the default X-ray collimation that is linked to the
compression paddle ID. Change of collimation by
the operator is ignored for AEC region autoselection.
LEDs for each AEC sensor position on the
compression gantry indicate the selected
position. The selected AEC region can be viewed
after selecting the checkbox.
The size and available position of the manual
AEC regions are indicated at the X-ray input
surface of the compression paddle.
AEC Auto-Filter Mode
The filter and kV are selected using the
recommended table based exposure technique
based on compressed breast thickness.
Table 1 is consistent with MQSA average
glandular dose requirement not to exceed 300
mrad per exposure to an average (4.2 cm thick
compressed) breast. Table 1 is set by default for
US sites.
Table 0 is configurable by field service to meet
local standards (e.g., max 200 mrad) as required
by a number of states in U.S., Canada, and other
regions of the world.
The exposure is terminated at an mAs value as
determined by the AEC system to yield a pixel
count to which the unit has been calibrated.
AEC Auto-kV Mode
The filter is user selectable and the kV is selected
using the recommended table based exposure
technique based on compressed breast thickness.
The exposure is terminated at a mAs value as
determined by the AEC system to yield a pixel
count to which the unit has been calibrated.
AEC Auto-Time Mode
The kV and filter are both user selectable.
The exposure is terminated at a mAs value as
determined by the AEC system to yield a pixel
count to which the unit has been calibrated.
A-13
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Imaging System Technical Information
A-14
Exposure Termination
An exposure is aborted or prevented if:
The predicted exposure time exceeds the X-ray
tube limits.
The predicted exposure time exceeds the safety
backup timer setting.
The predicted exposure time is less than 400
msec when the grid is in the X-ray field or less
than 30 msec when the grid is out of the X-ray
field.
The user releases the exposure button
prematurely.
There is an error within the Selenia FFDM system.
AEC Reproducibility
AEC exposure reproducibility meets MQSA
requirements as follows:
For a 4 cm thick average breast phantom,
coefficients of variation in mAs and digital values
shall be less than 0.05 for four consecutive
exposures of this phantom under each of the
three AEC modes.
Exposure Adjustment
There is a “user-adjustable” scale factor that can
be used to increase/decrease the final X-ray
exposure (mAs) by 15% for each step from the
default setting. A total of seven settings are
available on the Acquisition Workstation, which
allows the user to change the exposure from 25%
of the default value to 175% of the default value.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
Hardcopy Film Printing Devices
8.0
Hardcopy Film Printing Devices
This section lists the relevant technical characteristics for the hardcopy film printing device.
8.1
8.2
8.3
9.0
Image Engine
Film sizes
20 cm x 25 cm (8 in. x 10 in.)
25 cm x 30 cm (10 in. x 12 in.), optional
Pixel size
≤70 µm
Grey level resolution
≥ 8 bits
Maximum Film Optical Density
≥ 3.5
Interface
Connectivity
DICOM 3.0 compatible
Data port
Ethernet
Transfer rate
Minimum: 10 Mbits/sec
Look up Tables (LUT)
Field programmable; Linear
Printed Film
Print to fit
If a 24 x 29 cm image is printed on a 20 x 25 cm
(8 x 10 in.) film, the printer prints the image to fit
onto a 20 x 25 cm (8 x 10 in.) film without
cropping the image or without dropping rows
and columns of data
Patient Information
Film meets ACR/MQSA requirements for patient
demographics. Printed Information Is User
Configurable.
CPU
Dual Intel® Xeon® Processors
Operating System
Microsoft Windows®
Computer Memory
2 GB RAM minimum
Disk capacity
400 GB SATA minimum
Display
3 Mega Pixel, 21 in. LCD, 2048 x 1536 resolution
User Interface
Keyboard, Trackball
TechMate
MAN-00625
A-15
Maintenance Manual
Appendix A—Specifications
TechMate
A-16
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Service Mode—Switches and Connections
Appendix B—Technical References
This Appendix provides additional technical references to be used as aids in troubleshooting
Selenia. The information covered is:
1.0
•
Service Mode—Switches and Connections
•
Alarms, Error Codes, and Messages
•
Test Point Tables
•
LED Indication Tables
•
Jumper Tables
•
Fuse Identification
Service Mode—Switches and Connections
This section describes switch settings and connections used when servicing Selenia.
1.1
Host Microprocessor Board Switch Settings
The Host Microprocessor Board contains a Rotary Selection switch (S4), four push-button
switches (S1, S2, S3, and S5), DIP Switch (S6), DIP Switch (S7), and an alpha-numeric
display. The tables that follow detail the Gantry switch and jumper configurations—Figure
B-1, for switch identification and location on the Host Microprocessor Board.
Legend for Figure B-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Alpha-numeric Display
Push-button Switch (S3)
Push-button Switch (S5)
DIP Switch (S7)
DIP Switch (S6)
Rotary Switch (S4)
DIP Switch (SW1)
Push-button Switch (S1)
Push-button Switch (S2)
Figure B-1: Host Microprocessor Board Switches
MAN-00625
B-1
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Service Mode—Switches and Connections
1.1.1
Host Microprocessor Board Push-Buttons S1, S2, S3, S5
Use the four push-buttons, S1, S2, S3, S5—Figure B-1, below the LCD Display to
switch among the variables for the selected calibration, to increase or decrease the
displayed variables, and to save the changed information.
1.1.2
Calibration Mode DIP Switch S6 Settings
Prior to calibrating any system parameter, it is necessary to first set the appropriate
switches on the DIP Switch, S6—Figure B-1, as shown below:
Note…
All S6 switch settings should be Off for normal operation.
Table B-1: DIP Switch S6
Position
Status
Function
1
see below
Peripheral Monitor (KJ26) Select
2
see below
On
Off
Peripheral Monitor (KJ26) Select
Load TOSHIBA defaults
Load VARIAN defaults
4
On
Off*
Calibration Mode
Run Mode
5
On
Off
Field Upgrade Mode
Normal Mode
On
Off*
On
Off*
On
Off*
NOT USED
Normal Operation
NOT USED
Normal Operation
Changes function of the Rotary Switch
—Table B-2
SwitchS6-1/S6-2 Setting
Peripheral (Monitored at KJ26)
3
6
7
8
Off/Off
Tubehead
Off/On
On/Off
Motor
Generator
On/On
X-ray Status Monitor, Logs
* Normal Operating Position
B-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Service Mode—Switches and Connections
1.1.3
Rotary Switch S4 Settings
The Rotary switch, S4—Figure B-1, is a 16 position switch numbered 0 through 9,
and A through F. Each switch position selects a calibration parameter—Table B-2.
The LCD display—Figure B-1, shows the selected calibration parameter.
Table B-2: Rotary Switch S4
S4
Set S6-8
Position
To
On
Off
Exposure Counter
kV and Mode Display
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Tube Type Select (Varian 0, Varian 1, Toshiba)
mAs (manual); mAs Window (auto modes)
HTC Thickness Threshold
Filament Preheat Calibration
Compression Paddle Test Functions
Filter, Spot Size Display
HTC AKV Filament Calibration - 2nd Sample Exposure
Tube Grid Bias Calibration
5
On
Off
Rotation and Vertical Speed Control and Force Load Cell Select
Calibration - Compression Height and Force, C-arm Angle
6
On
Off
Auto Filter kV Threshold and Offset
Not Used
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Compression Release Distance
Compression Force and Release Mode Display
Not Used
Small Focal Spot Collimator Calibration
Software Version Display
Error Log/Exposure Log Download
A
On
Off
Bucky Calibration
Host Status - Error Codes
B
On
Off
Image Receptor Detector Ready
Paddle Accessory Display
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Not Used
Mirror Position Calibration
Not Used
Filter Position Calibration
Brick Communications Test
Normal Operation
Not Used
Collimator Position Calibration (aperture, blade, position)
0
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
C
D
E
F
MAN-00625
Function/Calibration
B-3
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Service Mode—Switches and Connections
1.1.4
DIP Switch S7 Settings
The DIP Switch S7 provides the operational modes for field upgrade and service
functions. All S7 switch settings should be Off for normal operation.
Note…
System restart is required for switch setting changes to take effect.
Table B-3: DIP Switch S7
Position
Status
Function
On
Off
On*
Off
On*
Off
NOT USED
Normal Operation
Disable Brick Timing Functions
Normal Operation
Disable Brick Comm Functions
Normal Operation
4
On
Off
Set Brick Comm to 9600 Baud
Normal Operation (38,400 Baud)
5
On
Off
AEC Disabled
Normal Operation (AEC Enabled)
On
Off
On**
Off
On*
Off
Disable Bucky
Normal Operation
Disable Compression Paddle Standby
Normal Operation
Disable Brick Logic Functions
Normal Operation
1
2
3
6
7
8
* Brick Functions—Switch 2, 3 and 8 allow the unit to take an exposure
without Brick control.
** Compression Paddle Standby—Unit enters the standby state if an incorrect
paddle or paddle shift position is detected.
B-4
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Service Mode—Switches and Connections
1.2
Peripheral Monitor Port
Selenia permits the user to connect a computer, via serial port, to the Host Microprocessor
Board. This permits the user to monitor various subsystem serial communication transfers.
Note…
The computer used to monitor the serial communication transfers must have
terminal emulation (for example, VTERM, ANSI, VT100, etc.). Set the
computer’s serial port:
Table B-4: Computer Serial Port Settings
Port
Setting
Baud
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
Flow Control
9600
8
NONE
1
NONE
To monitor peripheral communications, connect the serial cable to debug port KJ26 on the
Host Microprocessor Board. (A 10-pin 5x2 header to 9-pin Dsub adapter is needed.)
Figure B-2: Debug Port KJ26 on Host Microprocessor Board
Table B-5: Serial Port Cable Connections
Host Microprocessor
Board KJ26
Pin 3
Pin 9
Serial Port Cable DB9
Connector
Pin 2
Pin 5
Use to connect KJ26 to serial port on the PC without the adapter.
DIP switch S6 is used to select which peripheral to monitor.
Table B-6: Monitoring Host Peripheral Ports
Switch Setting
MAN-00625
Peripheral/Port
S6 (1=Off, 2=Off)
Tubehead Motors/KJ22
S6 (1=On, 2=Off)
S6 (1=Off, 2=On)
Generator/KJ23
Motor Controls (C-arm up, down, rotation)/KJ24
S6 (1=On, 2=On)
Cal Data Download/Exposure Log
B-5
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Service Mode—Switches and Connections
1.3
Array Monitor Port
Selenia permits service access to the array via a serial port. This port is used for software
upgrades and readouts sequences.
Table B-7: Laptop HyperTerminal Communication Settings
Port
Setting
Baud
38400
Data Bits
Parity
8
N
Stop Bits
1
Flow Control
N
Serial Port Location
Serial Port
1. Connect the laptop to the Array Serial Port using a serial cable.
2. Connect first with HyperTerminal to monitor Power-On Self Test and Cycling Status.
3. Type Service Mode and press Enter to stop cycling.
4. Type jumpToFloader and press Enter to go to Software Upgrades.
5. Now Windows Flash Array can be used to perform upgrades.
B-6
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Alarm Types and System Messages
2.0
Alarm Types and System Messages
There are four basic categories of alarms/messages:
1. A condition in which the AWS cannot continue (Category One).
2. A condition in which the operation of the AWS can continue (Category Two—normally
associated with a warning or a failure in an output device).
3. A condition in which the image processing has failed, displayed on the Preview screen
(Category Three).
4. A condition in which the system produces messages explaining why the system is not
going into Ready Mode (System Messages).
Figure B-3: Placement of Alarms by Type
Legend Figure B-3
1.
2.
3.
4.
Category Two Alarm Icon
Category One Alarm Message
Reset Generator button
System Information and Messages
For Category One alarms, a dialog box appears immediately to indicate a problem that you
are required to acknowledge. Depending on the specific condition, a dialog box asks
whether to continue or to abort the current action. Some image receptor, generator, and
internal alarms are Category One.
Category Two alarms are generally output type problems. Most output queue related alarms,
viewed by clicking on the box, fall into this second category. This Alarm function allows you
to manage alarms from failed jobs to destination devices. The number in the Alarm box
indicates how many alarms are current.
Category Three alarms are image processing alarms. An error code in the Exposure Index
box on the Preview Screen informs you of problems that have occurred.
MAN-00625
B-7
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Alarm Types and System Messages
System Messages appear in the lower right System Message box. They indicate why the
system is not going into the Ready Mode. Table B-41: on p. 21 lists required user responses
to these messages. The dashboard panel displays text and changes color (to white) when a
system problem occurs. Loss of PXCM to Generator link, receptor power loss, and “Paddle
not locked”, are examples of messages that appear in the area.
2.1
Category One Alarm Functions
Category One Alarms appear on the screen in the Alarm Message box. A dialog box appears
for Alarms requiring your immediate input.
Figure B-4: Category One Dialog Box
2.1.1
Digital Image Receptor Related Alarms
There are four basic classes of alarms associated with the Digital Image Receptor
Interface. All four are Category One alarms and use a dialog box on the Procedure
screen, not via the Alarm Icon.
2.1.2
2.2
Start-Up:
The array is not responding at start-up.
Communication:
Communications were lost or incorrect midoperation.
Image Receptor Error:
Error reported from Image Receptor
Scan ID Error:
The Scan ID does not match the one returned
from the array.
Generator Related Alarms
If the Gantry generator sends a message classified as an alarm, it displays as a
Category One alarm. See Figure B-5.
Category Two Alarm Functions
The AWS Category Two Alarm provides the following functions:
1. The Alarm dialog box becomes active
when you click the Alarm icon.
2. The Alarm dialog box allows you to:
•
View alarms
•
Acknowledge alarms
•
Erase alarms
Figure B-5: Alarm Icon
B-8
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Alarm Dialog Box
When you click the Alarm icon, information about the alarms, and the Alarm messages
appear in the displayed dialog box.
Legend for Figure B-6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Alarm Information
Message Display Area
Scrolling List of Alarms
List Navigation Buttons
Erase and OK Buttons
Figure B-6: Alarm Dialog Box
3.0
Alarm Dialog Box
The Alarm dialog box (Figure B-6) contains the following:
1. Information about the alarm condition:
•
From: Name of the device with the alarm
•
Type: Warning, Notice
•
Subject: Additional system information
•
Time Sent: Time the alarm was posted to the spooler
2. An area that displays the message contents.
3. A scrolling list that shows all of the current alarms sorted in reverse chronological order.
4. Forward/Backward button set that allows you to quickly navigate the alarm list.
5. An Erase button that allows you to erase the alarm.
When a new Category Two alarm occurs, the Alarm icon indicates that an alarm is present.
Viewing the new alarm automatically acknowledges the alarm condition. The Alarm icon
indication remains if alarms are still present.
MAN-00625
B-9
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
An alarm condition is either a warning or a notice. When a message such as a low-film
condition is received, an alarm of type “warning” is posted to indicate this. However, this
alarm does not get automatically removed when the low-film condition no longer exists;
instead, another alarm of type “notice” is posted indicating that the printer status is now
normal. The “From” column is not the name of the device posting the alarm, but the name of
the spooler to which the alarm was sent.
Erase an alarm by selecting the alarm and then clicking Erase. Clicking Erase All returns the
Alarm icon to normal. Erased alarms are completely deleted. Therefore, they may recur, in
which case they are treated as new alarms.
4.0
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
4.1
Critical Errors
Table B-8: Critical Errors
Code
4.2
Title
Description
0x01
AB_LCP_TASK_FAILED
Task Spawn Failed for LCP
0x02
0x03
AB_OVER_TEMPERATURE
AB_POST_FAILED
Array Temperature is Over Limit
Array PowerOn SelfTest Failed
0x04
0x05
AB_START_MAVERICK_FAILED
AB_JAM_PLAYER_FAILED
Starting Readout Sequence Task Failed
JAM Player Failed
0x06
AB_LOG_TASK_FAILED
Array Logging Task failed
JAM Failure
Table B-9: JAM Failure-Major
Code
0x10
Title
Description
AB_PLAY_JAM_ERR
Jam Player Error
Table B-10: JAM Failure-Minor
Code
B-10
Title
Description
0x01
AB_JAM_CRC_ERR
Jam CRC Error
0x02
0x03
AB_JAM_UNEXPECTED_END_ERR
AB_JAM_CRC_DEFAULT_ERR
Unexpected End of File for JAM File
Jam CRC Default Error
0x04
0x05
AB_JBI_EXECUTE_ERR
AB_JBI_EXECUTE_UNKNOWN_ERR
JBI Execute Error
JBI Execute Unknown Error
0x06
0x07
AB_JAM_NO_ACTION_ERR
AB_JAM_ACTION_NOT_SUPPORTED_ERR
JAM No Action
Action not supported
0x08
AB_JBI_ADDRESS_ERR
JAM Address Error
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
4.3
Power/Boot-up Failure
Table B-11: Power/Boot-up Failure-Major
Code
0x11
Title
AB_BOOTUP_ERR
Description
BOOT_UP ERRORS
Table B-12: Power/Boot-up Failure-Minor
Code
MAN-00625
Title
Description
0x01
0x02
AB_NET_SETUP_ERR
AB_LOG_PRIORITY_ERR
Network Setup Failed
Log Task Priority Change Failed
0x03
0x04
AB_NET_PRIORITY_ERR
AB_TELNET_PRIORITY_ERR
Net Task Priority Change Failed
Telnet Task Priority Change Failed
0x05
0x06
AB_PORTMAP_PRIORITY_ERR
AB_JAM_LENGTH_ERR
Portmapper Deamon Task Priority Change Failed
Invalid or Zero JBC File Length
0x07
0x08
AB_JAM_PLAYER_ERR
AB_START_LCP_ERR
Programing JTAG Failed
Starting LCP Task Failed
0x09
0x0A
AB_LOAD_TABLE_ERR
AB_START_RFS_ERR
Loading Readout Sequence Failed
Starting RFS Task Failed
0x0B
0x0C
AB_POST_FAIL_ERR
AB_START_MAVERICK_ERR
PowerOn SelfTest Failed
Readout Sequence Task Failed
0x0D
0x0E
AB_START_TEMP_ERR
AB_ROUTE_ADD_ERR
Temperature Monitoring Task Failed
Route to Host Failed
0x0F
0x10
AB_PPP_INIT_ERR
AB_SOCKET_ERR
Initialization of PPP Failed
Log Socket Failed
0x11
0x12
AB_CONNECT_ERR
AB_LOG_SETUP_ERR
Log Connect to Socket Failed
Log Setup Failed
0x13
0x14
AB_NFS_MOUNT_ERR
AB_PPP_CONNECT_TIMEOUT_ERR
NFS Mount to Brick Failed
PPP Connect Timed Out
0x15
0x16
AB_START_CHK_SOCK_ERR
AB_AEC_INIT_ERR
Starting chkConnection Failed
InitAEC Failed
0x17
0x18
AB_FILE_SIZE_ERR
AB_CYCLE_TABLE_SIZE_ERR
Incorrect file length in LoadTable
Cycle Table is Smaller than # of Entries
0x19
0x1A
AB_SAVE_CYCLE_TABLE_ERR
AB_PHASE_TABLE_SIZE_ERR
Save Cycle Table Error
Phase Table is Smaller than # of Entries
0x1B
0x1C
AB_SAVE_PHASE_TABLE_ERR
AB_CONFIG_TABLE_SIZE_ERR
Save Phase Table Error
Config Table is Smaller than # of Entries
0x1D
0x1E
AB_SAVE_CONFIG_TABLE_ERR
AB_AEC_CONFIG_STAT_ERR
Save Config Table Error
Open AEC Config File Stat Failed
0x1F
0x20
AB_AEC_CONFIG_OPEN_ERR
AB_AEC_CONFIG_READ_ERR
Open AEC Config File Open Failed
Open AEC Config File Read Failed
0x21
AB_START_SAFEMODE_WATCHDOG_ERR Starting of the Safe Mode Watchdog Task Failed
B-11
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
4.4
Power On Self Test (POST) Failure-Major
Table B-13: Power On Self Test (POST) Failure-Major
Code
0x12
Title
Description
AB_POST_ERR
P.O.S.T Failure
Table B-14: Power On Self Test (POST) Failure-Minor
Code
B-12
Title
Description
0x01
AB_VXMAIN_CHKSUM_ERR
Vxmain Checksum mismatch
0x02
0x03
AB_CONFIG_CHKSUM_ERR
AB_REF_VOLT_ERR
Manuf. Configuration Checksum mismatch
Reference Voltage Reading Error
0x04
0x05
AB_ZERO_OFFSET_ERR
AB_GAIN_ADJUSTMENT_ERR
Zero Offset Error
Gain Adjustment Error
0x06
0x07
AB_GAIN_LIMIT_ERR
AB_HV0_FB_ERR
Gain Limit Error
HV Feedback Test FAILED
0x08
0x09
AB_POWER_RELAY_ERR
AB_GATE_CURRENT6_ERR
Power Relay Error
Gate Current 6 Error
0x0A
0x0B
AB_GATE_CURRENT7_ERR
AB_GATE_LOOP_ERR
Gate Current 7 Error
Gate Loop Error
0x0C
0x0D
AB_CHRG_AMP_LOOP_ERR
AB_AEC_MEM_ERR
Charge Amp Loop Error
AEC Memory Error
0x0E
AB_READ_PANEL_TIMEOUT_ERR
Read Panel Timeout Error
0x0F
0x10
AB_EL_ERR
AB_HIGH_TEMP_ERR
Erase Light or Erase Light Sensor Error
High Temperature WARNING
0x11
0x12
AB_ZERO_OFFSET_STABILITY_ERR
AB_GAIN_CTRL_STABILITY_ERR
Zero Offset Stability FAILED
Ctrl Count Stability for GAIN FAILED
0x13
0x14
AB_GAIN_CTRL_ERR
AB_GAIN_MON_STABILITY_ERR
Ctrl Count Calculation for GAIN FAILED
Monitor Count Stability GAIN FAILED
0x15
0x16
AB_GAIN_MON_ERR
AB_AEC_MEM_MISMATCH_ERR
Monitor Count for Gain FAILED
AEC Memory Selftest FAILED
0x17
0x18
AB_SEQUENCE_CHKSUM_ERR
AB_FIRMWARE_CHKSUM_ERR
Sequence Checksum Error
Firmware Checksum Error
0x19
0x1A
AB_EL_STUCK_ERR
AB_LOW_TEMP_ERR
EL is Stuck Error
Low Temperature WARNING
0x1B
0x1C
AB_VXFLASH_CHKSUM_ERR
AB_FLOADER_CHKSUM_ERR
VxFlash Checksum Error
Floader Checksum Error
0x1D
AB_HIGH_VOLTAGE_CTRL_LOOP_ERR High Voltage Control Loop Error
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
4.5
Readout Sequence Failure
Table B-15: Readout Sequence Failure-Major
Code
0x13
Title
AB_READOUT_SEQ_ERR
Description
Readout Sequence Failure
Table B-16: Readout Sequence Failure-Minor
Code
MAN-00625
Title
Description
0x01
AB_RUN_TASK_ERR
RunCycle Task Spawn Failed
0x02
0x03
AB_GET_IMG_TASK_ERR
AB_VERIFY_HV_TASK_ERR
GetImageCtrl Task Spawn Failed
VerifyHV Task Spawn Failed
0x04
0x05
AB_UNSUPPORTED_VAR_ERR
AB_NEGATIVE_VALUE_ERR
Unsupported Format for Var Name
DoMath subtraction is Negative
0x06
0x07
AB_EXP_REQ_SEMA_TIMEOUT_ERR Exposure Request Message Timeout
AB_INCORRECT_FORMAT_ERR
Incorrect String for Method
0x08
0x09
AB_INVALID_CAL_ERR
AB_INVALID_DTOA_ERR
Invalid Cal Mode
Invalid DtoA Count Value
0x0A
0x0B
AB_INVALID_SET_PHASE_ERR
AB_INVALID_BIN_MODE_ERR
Invalid Set Phase Value
Invalid Binning Mode
0x0C
0x0D
AB_UNKNOWN_TASK_ERR
AB_INVALID_VAR_STRING_ERR
Incorrect task name
Illegal Variable String - getVariableValue
0x0F
AB_VAR_NOT_DEFINED_ERR
Variable not defined in Table-get Variable Value
0x10
0x11
AB_ARRAY_OVERRUN_ERR
AB_UNKNOWN_VAR_ERR
Array Overrun - setVariableValue
Unknown Variable Name - set Variable Value
0x12
0x13
AB_GATE_ERR
AB_CHARG_AMP_ERR
Gate loop Error - WaitForReadDone
Charge Amp Error - WaitForReadDone
0x14
0x15
AB_READ_PANEL_ERR
AB_WALK_DONE_ERR
Read Panel Timeout - WaitForReadDone
Walk Done Timeout - WalkAllGates
0x16
0x17
AB_HV_ABOVE_3KV_ERR
AB_HV_RAMP_RATE_ERR
HV is above 3.0 kv limit
Ramp rate above 50 or less than 0
0x18
AB_AEC_REQ_SEMA_TIMEOUT_ERR AEC Request Timeout Error
B-13
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
4.6
Message Communication Failure
Table B-17: Message Communication Failure-Major
Code
0x14
Title
Description
AB_COMM_ERR
Communication Failure
Table B-18: Message Communication Failure-Minor
Code
4.7
Title
Description
0x01
AB_COMM_WRITE_ERR
0x02
0x03
AB_COMM_READ_ERR
Comm Read Error
AB_IMG_UNKNOWN_CMD_ERR Unknown Command on Image Ctrl
Comm Write Error
0x04
0x05
AB_CHECKSUM_ERR
AB_LCP_WRITE_ERR
0x06
0x07
AB_LCP_UNKNOWN_CMD_ERR Unknown command on LCP channel
AB_CHK_REPLY_ERR
See if ACK/NAK failed
0x08
0x09
AB_MSGQ_SEND_ERR
AB_INVALID_EXPOSE_MODE
0x0A
0x0B
AB_INVALID_EXPOSE_REGION Invalid Expose Region Setting
AB_VALIDATE_MSG_ERR
Validate Message Failed in getBAImgControl
Checksum mismatch
LCP write Failure
msgQSend Error in sendMsgToBH
Invalid Array Expose Mode
HV Monitoring Failure
Table B-19: HV Monitoring Failure-Major
Code
0x15
Title
AB_HV_MONITOR_ERR
Description
HV Monitoring Failure
Table B-20: HV Monitoring Failure-Minor
Code
B-14
Title
Description
0x01
AB_HV_INTERLOCK_ERR
High Voltage Interlock Triggered
0x02
0x03
AB_HV_OUT_RANGE_15_ERR
AB_HV_OUT_RANGE_3_ERR
High Voltage Out of ±15% Range
High Voltage Out of ±3% Range
0x04
AB_HV_RAMP_TO_ZERO
High Voltage Ramp Down to Zero-Out of Range
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
4.8
Temperature Monitoring Failure
Table B-21: Temperature Monitoring Failure-Major
Code
0x16
Title
Description
AB_TEMP_MONITOR_ERR
Temperature Error
Table B-22: Temperature Monitoring Failure-Minor
Code
4.9
Title
Description
0x01
0x02
AB_TEMP_HIGH
AB_TEMP_HIGH_FATAL
Warning - Array is becoming over temperature
FATAL ERROR - ARRAY IS OVER TEMPERATURE
0x03
0x04
AB_TEMP_LOW
AB_TEMP_SENSOR_FAILED
Warning - Array is below operating temperature
Warning - Possible Temperature sensor failure
EL Monitoring Failure
Table B-23: EL Monitoring Failure-Major
Code
0x17
Title
Description
AB_EL_MONITOR_ERR
EL System Failure
Table B-24: EL Monitoring Failure-Minor
Code
4.10
Title
Description
0x01
0x02
AB_EL_FAILED_ON_ERR
AB_EL_FAILED_OFF_ERR
EL Failed to turn on
EL Failed to turn off
0x03
0x04
AB_EL_FAILED_BOTH_ERR
AB_EL_BAD_FLASH_ERR
EL Failed to turn on and off
EL Flag is Invalid - Bad Flash
RFS Failure
Table B-25: RFS Failure-Major
Code
0x18
Title
Description
AB_RFS_ERR
RFS Failure
Table B-26: RFS Failure-Minor
Code
MAN-00625
Title
Description
0x01
AB_RPC_TASK_INIT_ERR
rpcTaskInit Failed
0x02
0x03
AB_SVCTCP_ERR
AB_SVC_REGISTER_ERR
svctcp_create Failed
svc_register Failed
0x04
0x05
AB_DO_UI_TASK_ERR
AB_SVC_RUN_EXIT_ERR
doUI task spawn Failed
myRSS svcRun exits--this should never happen
0x06
AB_UNABLE_FREE_ARGS_ERR Unable to free Arguments in rfs_prog_2
B-15
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
4.11
Software Upgrade Failure
Table B-27: Software Upgrade Failure-Major
Code
0x19
Title
Description
AB_SW_UPGRADE_ERR
SW Upgrade Failure
Table B-28: Software Upgrade Failure-Minor
Code
4.12
Title
Description
0x01
0x02
AB_UPDATE_JBC_ERR
AB_UPDATE_SEQ_ERR
Updating JBC File Failed
Updating Readout Sequence File Failed
0x03
0x04
AB_UPDATE_VXMAIN_ERR
AB_UPDATE_FLOADER_ERR
Updating VxMain Image File Failed
Updating Flash Loader File Failed
0x05
0x06
AB_UPDATE_VXSERVICE_ERR Updating VxService Image File Failed
AB_UNKNOWN_TYPE_ERR
Unknown File Type for updateFlash
Flash Failures
Table B-29: Flash Failures-Major
Code
0x1A
Title
Description
AB_FLASH_ERR
Programming Flash Failure
Table B-30: Flash Failures-Minor
Code
B-16
Title
Description
0x01
AB_VERIFY_FLASH_ERR
Verifying Flash Erase Failed
0x02
0x03
AB_VERIFY_SECTOR_ERR
AB_SIGN_ERASE_ERR
Verifying Sector Erase Failed
Erase Signature Failed
0x04
0x05
AB_SIGN_VERIFY_ERR
AB_NFS_MALLOC_ERR
Verify Signature Failed
Malloc Failed for progNFS
0x06
0x07
AB_NFS_READ_ERR
AB_NFS_PROG_ERR
NFS Read Error
NFS Read Retry Failure-->NFS Prog Failure
0x08
0x09
AB_NFS_VERIFY_ERR
AB_NFS_OPEN_ERR
NFS Prog Verify Failed
NFS Open Failed
0x0A
0x0B
AB_NFS_FILE_LENGTH_ERR
AB_NFS_JBC_ERASE_ERR
Invalid File Length
Verify JBC Erase Failed
0x0C
0x0D
AB_NFS_SEQ_ERASE_ERR
AB_NFS_VXMAIN_ERASE_ERR
Verify SEQ Erase Failed
Verify VXMAIN Erase Failed
0x0E
0x0F
AB_NFS_UNKNOWN_TYPE_ERR Unknown file type
AB_NFS_UPDATE_FLASH_ERR
Update Flash Failed
0x10
0x11
AB_NFS_PROG_LENGTH_ERR
AB_NFS_PROG_CHKSUM_ERR
0x12
0x13
AB_NFS_PROG_SIGN_ERR
Programming Signature Failed
AB_NFS_FLOADER_ERASE_ERR Verify Floader Erase Failed
0x14
AB_NFS_VXFLASH_ERASE_ERR Verify VxFlash Erase Failed
Programming File Length Failed
Programming Checksum Failed
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
4.13
General Runtime Failures
Table B-31: General Runtime Failures-Major
Code
0x1B
Title
Description
AB_RUN_TIME_ERR
Run-time Errors
Table B-32: General Runtime Failures-Minor
Code
4.14
Title
Description
0x01
AB_LOG_SOCKET_ERR
Connection to Array Log Deamon on Brick Failed
0x02
AB_ADC_SPI_TIMEOUT_ERR
Timeout on ADC SPI Read
AEC Failure
Table B-33: AEC Failure-Major
Code
0x1C
Title
Description
AB_AEC_ERR
AEC Failures
Table B-34: AEC Failures-Minor
Code
MAN-00625
Title
Description
0x01
AB_AEC_INITIALIZATION_ERR
Initialization Errors for AEC
0x02
0x03
AB_AEC_UNINITIALIZED_ERR
AB_INVALID_SENSOR_ERR
AEC is NOT Initialized
Invalid AEC Sensor Selection
0x04
0x05
AB_INVALID_AEC_MODE_ERR
AB_INVALID_BG_SENSOR_ERR
Invalid AEC MODE for GetAECCompleteData
Invalid AEC Sensor for Manual Background AEC
0x06
0x07
AB_INVALID_FG_SENSOR_ERR
AB_NEGATIVE_AEC_VALUE
Invalid AEC Sensor for Manual Exposure AEC
Calculated AEC Value is Negative
0x08
0x09
AB_INVALID_AUTO_REGION_ERR
AB_NEGATIVE_SMP_ERR
Invalid Auto AEC Region
Negative SMP Calculation
0x0A
0x0B
AB_BG_MALLOC_ERR
AB_FG_MALLOC_ERR
Background Malloc FAILED
Foreground Malloc FAILED
0x0C
0x0D
AB_REGION_MALLOC_ERR
AB_FG_REGION_MISMATCH
Region Value Malloc FAILED
Region Mismatch for AEC FG Auto S
0x0E
0x0F
AB_NEGATIVE_SENSOR_ERR
AB_ALG_FILE_OPEN_ERR
Negative Sensor Calculation
AEC Alogrithm File (aec_alg.conf) open FAILED
B-17
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Critical, Major, and Minor Error Codes
4.15
Software Upgrade Success Messages
(for upgrade over Brick Web Interface)
Table B-35: Software Upgrade Success Message-Major
Code
0x1D
Title
AB_RFS_SW_UPGRADE
Description
RFS Software Upgrade Success
Table B-36: Software Upgrade Success Messages-Minor
Code
4.16
Title
Description
0x01
AB_JBC_UPGRADE_SUCCESS
Array Firmware Upgraded Successfully
0x02
0x03
AB_SEQ_UPGRADE_SUCCESS
AB_VXMAIN_UPGRADE_SUCCESS
Array Readout Upgraded Successfully
Array Vx Main Upgraded Successfully
0x04
0x05
AB_FLOADER_UPGRADE_SUCCESS Array Floader (Manuf.) Upgraded Successfully
AB_VXFLASH_UPGRADE_SUCCESS Array Vx Flash Upgraded Successfully
High Voltage Ramp Task Failures
Table B-37: High Voltage Ramp Task Failure-Major
Code
0x1E
Title
AB_HVRAMP_ERR
Description
High Voltage Ramp task
Table B-38: High Voltage Ramp Task Failures-Minor
Code
B-18
Title
Description
0x01
0x02
AB_MSG_QUE_CREATE_ERR
AB_SEM_CREATE_ERR
Failed Creating Msg Que for RampHV Task
Failed Creating Semaphore for RampHV Task
0x03
0x04
AB_TASK_CREATE_ERR
AB_SEND_MSG_ERR
Failed Spawning RampHV Task
Failed Sending a Msg to RampHV Task
0x05
0x06
AB_SYNC_SEM_TAKE_ERR
AB_REC_MSG_ERR
Failed Taking a Semaphore from RampHV Task
Failed Receiving a Msg to RampHV Task
0x07
0x08
AB_SET_WAVEFORM_ERR
AB_SYNC_SEM_GIVE_ERR
SetWaveform failed in RampHV Task
Failed Giving a Semaphore from RampHV Task
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
DRAPI Errors
5.0
DRAPI Errors
Table B-39: Error Communicating with the Detector
Error
Title Bar
Error communicating with the detector
There was a problem communicating with the detector. If this continues, please call support. The
Message
application will now restart.
Reason
The default behavior for the AWS is to assume a communication error if it gets an error it doesn’t
understand. If this happens during DRAPI Open, the only remedy is to restart.
No environment variable $DRAPI_DIR
DRAPI not initialized
Duplicate device open attempted
The link to the PXCM is not active.
Error starting the image reader channels.
Causes
Error configuring state machine:
Could not contact array to get readout sequence version.
Invalid “special” name entry in readout configuration file.
Invalid diff type entry in readout configuration file.
Invalid preview diff type entry in readout configuration file.
Invalid state name entry in readout configuration file.
Invalid message name entry in configuration file.
Failed to open a useable State configuration file.
Failed to obtain a State configuration file name.
Error returned from VerifyImagePath( ) function:
Array Wedge Command Failure
VerifyingImagePath: ref1 frame ptr is null.
VerifyingImagePath: Wedge failed verification.
No validRef1 frame was received from the array.
Array Wedge Disable Command Failure.
“Could not read SMJ file for panel—MPxxxx” is not a fatal error.
“Could not read LC4 file for panel—MPxxxx” is not a fatal error.
“Could not read WEAK file for panel—MPxxxx” is not a fatal error.
“Could not read LLC file for panel—MPxxxx” is not a fatal error.
“Could not read PWL file for panel—MPxxxx” is not a fatal error.
Note…
MAN-00625
MPxxxx may be MMxxxx.
B-19
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
DRAPI Errors
Table B-40: Error Initializing the DRAPI
Error
Title Bar
Error initializing the drapi
There was a problem initializing the drapi. There seems to be an invalid or missing configuration
Message
entry. Please call support. The application will now restart.
Reason There is a problem with the DrApi.cfg file.
GetDrapiConfigFile failure:
Causes
Out-of-Bounds value set in DrApi.cfg (API_ERR_INVALID_CONFIG_ENTRY)
a. array_info_timeout <0
b. badpix_filter_method <0 or >3
c. badpix_thresh_percent <0 or >100
d. badpix_max_thresh <0 or >100
e. gain_median_lower_limit <0 or >16383
f. gain_median_upper_limit <gain_median_lower_limit or >16383
Missing keyword/value pair in DrApi.cfg (API_ERR_MISSING_CONFIG_ENTRY)
There was a problem initializing the drapi. Look for:
1. a missing configuration file for the detector
Message
2. a corrupt gain
The application will now restart.
Reason
Failed to open DrApi.cfg file (API_ERR_FILE_ERR)
The first log entry in drapi.log after a restart is:
Opening DRAPI config file:
/opt/linx_mp/opt/DRUL_1.0.X.X/data/DrApi.cfg
GetDrapiConfigFile( ) done
If you see these messages and also DO, see the following line:
Causes
DRUTIL_Open( )
That means the error occurred during the DRAPI device open or there is a corrupted Gain Map file.
Prev_diff_type is STATIC_REF2 but could not load MPxxxx.sr2 file after loading gain file. If the
MPxxxx.sr2 file is not found but there is also no gain file, this is not a problem since the gain
calibration is required and the sr2 file is created during gain calibration. But if there is no sr2 file, but
there is a gain file, there is no way to force the sr2 to be created, so the DRAPI cannot start.
Note…
B-20
MPxxxx may be MMxxxx.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
6.0
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
6.1
System Message Information
An example of a System Message is:
•
“Incorrect Paddle Position.”
Figure B-7: System Messages
Table B-41: System Messages
Message
Meaning
Action
Incorrect paddle
position
This indicates that the paddle position
is not valid for the selected patient
view.
Correct the paddle position. The Selenia system only
allows the use of certain paddles with specific views.
If this message appears, you may need to change
the position of the paddle or use a different paddle.
Paddle not locked
This indicates that the paddle is
between positions (left, center, right).
Shift the paddle until it clicks into position.
Remove paddle for
calibration
This indicates that a paddle is present
and a calibration scan is being
requested.
Remove the paddle for calibration.
Detector power
The PXCM is reporting that the power
to the detector has been removed.
Reboot the system. If condition persists, contact
Service.
Detector service mode This indicates that the detector is in
service mode.
Calibration needed
This indicates that a calibration is
needed and could be the result of a
calibration file that is beyond the
calibration life span.
Reboot the system. If condition persists, contact
Service.
Perform a calibration.
Generator problem
The PXCM has lost its link with the
generator.
Reboot the system. If condition persists, contact
Service.
Detector problem
The PXCM has lost its link with the
detector.
The imaging subsystem has reported that it lost the
link with the detector. Reboot the system. If
condition persists, contact Service.
Detector hi temp
The PXCM is reporting that the detector The detector reached the high temperature.
hi temperature has been reached and Shut down the system. Contact Service.
is in danger of being turned off.
This is a reminder that the AWS was
Not Applicable
started without a detector present.
Detector not present
Non Acquisition Mode
Detector shutdown in
(n minutes)
MAN-00625
This is displayed during review and
Not Applicable
test pattern generation and indicates
that the system cannot be used to take
patient exposures.
This indicates that the detector is
Not Applicable
about to be shutdown in n minutes.
B-21
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
6.2
Sample Category One Alarm Messages
The Operator Message for each alarm contains the alarm number, the associated message as
listed below, and the action required (for example, “Press Reset to continue”). If Reset is
required, click Reset Generator.
Note…
Some conditions, such as Incorrect Paddle Position, remain active until the
condition is corrected. The Reset command is not required; the AWS
message clears automatically once you correct the condition.
Sample Alarm Messages
Table B-42 describes Category One Alarm messages.
6.3
•
“Calculated exposure time exceeds max. Exposure Aborted. Press Reset to Continue.”
•
“Premature release of X-ray switch. Exposure Aborted. Press Reset to Continue.”
Category One Alarms
Table B-42: Alarm Messages
Error #
B-22
Cause
Action
2
Calculated exposure time exceeds max
reset / retake in
AutoTime mode
3
4
X-ray switch not released after exposure
Stuck X-ray switch on start-up
reset required
reset required
5
Calculated exposure time less than min
6
Premature release of X-ray switch
reset / retake in
AutoTime mode
reset/ re-expose
9
20
Invalid Cal Data (service call required)
Rotor error
”non-resetable error”
reset / re-expose
21
22
No X-ray switch after start from host
ARC-kV control error
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
23
24
TUBE OVERCURRENT
TUBE OVERVOLTAGE
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
25
26
INVERTER OVERCURRENT
X-RAY INTERLOCK FAULT
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
27
28
FILAMENT OVERCURRENT
FILAMENT OVERVOLTAGE
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
29
30
FILAMENT GRID FAULT
HOST TO GEN COMM FAULT
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
31
32
HARDWARE BACKUP TIMER TIMEOUT
FIRMWARE BACKUP TIMER TIMEOUT
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
33
34
HV GENERATOR TIMING FAULT
Spot relay error (unable to switch focal spot)
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
35
51
Tube Undercurrent Fault
Bucky error: Bucky not responding
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
52
Brick communication error during exposure
(message block 1 request not received)
reset / re-expose
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
Table B-42: Alarm Messages (Continued)
Error #
Cause
Action
53
No DETECTOR_READY
reset / re-expose
(at start of start exposure, or premature de-activation during X-ray)
54
READY signal error
(premature de-activation during X-ray)
reset / re-expose
55
56
Invalid parameter field received in Block 2 or 3 command
Invalid value field received in Block 2 or 3 command
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
57
Post Exposure Data Error
(Selenia did not successfully process post exposure data)
reset / re-expose
58
59
ERROR signal activation
(premature activation during X-ray)
No mAs received from Brick
reset / re-expose
reset / re-expose
60
CCW C-ARM Rotation Switch Stuck
(stuck switch detected on start-up)
inspect switch
61
CW C-ARM Rotation Switch Stuck
(stuck switch detected on start-up)
inspect switch
62
63
64
65
66
Lamp Switch Stuck
(stuck switch detected on start-up)
Comp Up Switch stuck
(stuck switch detected on start-up)
Comp Dn Switch Stuck
(stuck switch detected on start-up)
Comp Rel Switch Stuck
(stuck switch detected on start-up)
C-Arm Up Switch Stuck
(stuck switch detected on start-up)
inspect switch
inspect switch
inspect switch
inspect switch
inspect switch
70
C-Arm Dn Switch Stuck
(stuck switch detected on start-up)
No comm from Tubehead
reset
71
72
filter/mirror error
filter error (AF mode)
reset
reset
75
Incorrect Paddle Position/Paddle not locked
(Compression Paddle shifted to an “in-between” position.)
*self-correcting
67
inspect switch
* Self correcting errors: Error #75 remains active until the error condition is corrected, and
clears once the error condition is corrected—it does not require a “reset.” The alarm
message on the screen clears once the error clears.
** Undefined error codes: If any error codes not defined above are reported, the alarm
message displays “Generator Error#” where # is the error code. Assume that a reset is
required.
MAN-00625
B-23
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
6.4
Sample Category Two Alarm Messages
These are examples of the kind of messages that may appear in a dialog box when you click
the Alarms icon on the screen. (These are not the entire message.)
“The reject bin is nearly full! There is only enough space for ___ more rejected images.”
“Enter Reject Management through the toolbar Admin function to delete rejected images
and create more space.”
“Failed to communicate with printer [output device name] will retry.”
“Error happened when trying to initialize CDRW.”
6.5
Category Two Alarms
Only the key part of the message is included in this table.
Table B-43: Category Two Alarms
Message
From
Message
Action Required
Print to … has failed and will be retried. Failed to communicate
No
with the printer [device name]; will retry
Failed to communicate with store device [device name] will
No
retry
Failed to communicate with remstore pdev [device name]; will
Printer or
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Storage Task retry
Error happened when trying to initialize CDRW
Yes. Try another CD.
CD-R space full, and user selected not to replace with a new
Yes. Resend the image later if you want
CD-R
it on a CD.
CD-R was not recordable, unknown error happened
Yes. Try another CD.
Messages generated from the outputs or workstation and
passed through to the user (for example, printer low on film)
The reject bin is nearly full!
There is only enough space for 5 more images.
Generated by Enter Reject Management through the toolbar ADMIN
Output
function to delete rejected images and create more space.
devices
The reject bin is full!
Enter Reject Management through the toolbar ADMIN function
to delete rejected images and create more space.
Database
Peer
Manager
MWL
Updater
B-24
No. See device documentation for
action.
No. Delete rejected images in spool.
Yes. Delete rejected images in spool.
Reject Spool Full Warning
Version mismatch detected: Local (xxx) Remote (yyy)
Yes. Delete rejected images in spool.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Unable to connect to peer - please consult log file
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Error updating local worklist
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
MWL updater query received too many results. Not updating
local worklist.
Yes. Refine query.
MWL periodic updater timed out querying SCP
Worklist updater encountered error querying SCP
Yes. Refine query.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Worklist updater: Unexpected error encountered.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
Table B-43: Category Two Alarms (Continued)
Message
From
Message
Reading or processing data (image, lut, or marker) failed
locally.
Action Required
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
A DICOM dimse error was returned in a response
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Cannot open socket to specified host/port, a network error has
occurred or received abort from remote system. Please check Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
destination host setup.
The remote device did not accept an association. Please check
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
destination host setup.
The remote device is currently unable to accept an association. Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Print job was not completed in the allotted time, or time-out
waiting for response. Status of print job is unknown.
DICOM Print
alarms
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Requested DICOM SOP class rejected, or an unspecified error
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
occurred.
(unknown error)
<Print Job error listed in DICOM spec>
see DICOM spec for printer/print job messages
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. See printer documentation.
Device address not in form <hostname-or-ipaddr>:<port>
Please check destination host setup.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Unable to ping destination host: hostname
Please check network connections and destination host
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
An unspecified error occurred.
Print failed and will not be retried
Unexpected CORBA error.
Print failed and will not be retried
Unexpected local processing error.
Print failed and will not be retried
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Reading or processing image data failed locally.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
A DICOM dimse error was returned in a response:<msg from
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
DCF>
Cannot open socket to specified host/port, a network error has
occurred or received abort from remote system. Please check Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
destination host setup.
DICOM Store The remote device did not accept an association. Please check Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
destination host setup.
Commit
The remote device is currently unable to accept an association. Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Commit job was not acknowledged in the allotted time. Status
of commit job is unknown.
An unspecified error occurred. Store failed and will not be
retried.
(unknown error)
MAN-00625
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. Call for service.
B-25
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
Table B-43: Category Two Alarms (Continued)
Message
From
Message
Reading or processing data (image, lut, or marker) failed
locally.
Action Required
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
A DICOM dimse error was returned in a response
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Cannot open socket to specified host/port, a network error has
occurred or received abort from remote system. Please check Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
destination host setup.
The remote device did not accept an association. Please check
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
destination host setup.
The remote device is currently unable to accept an association. Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Print job was not completed in the allotted time, or time-out
waiting for response. Status of print job is unknown.
DICOM Print
alarms
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Requested DICOM SOP class rejected, or an unspecified error
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
occurred.
(unknown error)
<Print Job error listed in DICOM spec>
see DICOM spec for printer/print job messages
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. See printer documentation.
Device address not in form <hostname-or-ipaddr>:<port>
Please check destination host setup.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Unable to ping destination host: hostname
Please check network connections and destination host
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
An unspecified error occurred.
Print failed and will not be retried
Unexpected CORBA error.
Print failed and will not be retried
Unexpected local processing error.
Print failed and will not be retried
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Reading or processing image data failed locally.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
A DICOM dimse error was returned in a response:<msg from
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
DCF>
Cannot open socket to specified host/port, a network error has
occurred or received abort from remote system. Please check Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
destination host setup.
DICOM Store The remote device did not accept an association. Please check Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
destination host setup.
Commit
The remote device is currently unable to accept an association. Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Commit job was not acknowledged in the allotted time. Status
of commit job is unknown.
An unspecified error occurred. Store failed and will not be
retried.
(unknown error)
B-26
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. Call for service.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
Table B-43: Category Two Alarms (Continued)
Message
From
Message
Action Required
Unable to ping destination host: hostname
Please check network connections and destination host
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Device address not in form <hostname-or-ipaddr>:<port>
Please check destination host setup
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
StorageCommit failed and will not be retried.
<error message from database or from DCF>
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
StorageCommit failed and will not be retried.
Unexpected CORBA error.
StorageCommit failed and will not be retried.
Unexpected local processing error.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
DICOM Store
The remote device is currently unable to accept an association. Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Alarms
The remote device did not accept an association. Please check
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
destination host setup.
A DICOM dimse error was returned in a response: <msg from
DCF>
Time-out waiting for response
Unable to connect to destination host/port. Please check
destination host setup and network connections.
A network error has occurred. Please check network
connections.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Reading or processing image data (image, lut or marker) failed
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
locally. Please also check local device configuration files.
Error creating a store job. Please check local device
configuration files.
Unable to ping destination host: hostname
Please check network connections and destination host
Device address not in form <hostname-or-ipaddr>:<port>
Please check destination host setup
An unspecified error occurred.
Store failed and will not be retried
MAN-00625
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Unexpected CORBA error.
Store failed and will not be retried
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
Unexpected local processing error.
Store failed and will not be retried
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
<Error message from DCF>
Yes. Call Hologic for service.
B-27
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
Table B-43: Category Two Alarms (Continued)
Message
From
Message
Part10Maker:checkDiskCompliant().
CD-RW Drive was busy, will retry later.
Part10Maker:checkDiskCompliant().
Exception caught when trying to check file system ISO 9660
Level 1 conformance with <disk_status.mount_point>.
Part10Maker:checkDiskCompliant().
Exception caught when trying to guess filename from
<disk_status.mount_point>.
Part10Maker:checkDiskCompliant().
Error happened when trying to initialize
CdrwSpaceFullDialogObject
Part10Maker:checkDiskCompliant().
CD-R does not conform to ISO 9660 level 1 Standard, and user
selected not to replace with a new one.
CD-RW
Alarms
Action Required
No.
Yes. User will have to resend the image
at a later time if they want it on a CD.
Yes. Resend the image later if you want
it on a CD.
Yes. Resend the image later if you want
it on a CD.
Yes. Try another CD-R. Resend the
image later if you want it on a CD.
Part10Maker:checkDiskCompliant().
CD-R does not conform to ISO 9660 level 1 Standard,
unknown error happened in CdrwSpaceFullDialog Object.
Yes. Try another CD-R. Resend the
image later if you want it on a CD.
Part10Maker:checkDiskCompliant().
Failed to find any valid media from CD-RW drive. and user
selected not to insert with a valid one.
Yes. Try another CD-R. Resend the
image later if you want it on a CD.
Part10Maker:checkDiskCompliant().
Failed to find any valid media from CD-RW Drive. unknown
error happed in CDrwSpaceFullDialog Object.
Yes. Try another CD-R. Resend the
image later if you want it on a CD.
Part10Maker:doit().
Contact Hologic Service.
Exception caught when trying to reset the temp dir:<TMPDIR>
Part10Maker:doit().
Exception caught when trying to decrypt image file or convert
image to part-10 format.
Yes. Resend the image later if you want
it on a CD.
Part10Maker:doit().
A matching image record already exists under that series.
No. The image already exists in the
current CD-R.
Part10Maker:doit().
Exception caught when trying to create DICOMDIR file.
Yes. Resend the image later if you want
it on a CD.
Part10Maker:doit().
Failed to create temp dicomdir hide file:<dirHideFile>.
CdrwJob_i failed to created CdrwOutput Object to handle
output task.
device resource name=<m_description.resource_name>
Yes. Resend the image later if you want
it on a CD.
CD-RW Fail: error detecting burning speed.
Check CD-RW device path, and make sure the CD is
recordable.
B-28
Yes. Resend the image later if you want
it on a CD.
Retry. If condition persists with different
media, contact Hologic service.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
Table B-43: Category Two Alarms (Continued)
Message
From
Message
Action Required
CD-RW Fail: error detecting burning speed,
CD-RW or CD-R not compatible.
Yes. Try another CD-R. Be sure you are
using approved CDs.
CD-RW Fail: error reading CD-RW or CD-R, make sure the
CD-R is recordable.
Yes. Try another CD-R. Be sure you are
using approved CDs.
CD-RW Fail: error finding session address, make sure the CD- Yes. Try another CD-R. Be sure you are
R is recordable.
using approved CDs.
CD-RW Fail: unable to detect the next available recordable
address, CD-R probably unrecordable.
20
21
22
CD-RW Fail: unable to decide the space needed of the CD-R
CD-RW Fail: not enough space on the CD-R.
CD-R space full, and user selected not to replace with a new
CD-R.
CD-RW Fail: not enough space on the CD-R.
Error happened when trying to initialize
CdrwSpaceFullDialogObject.
Yes. Try another CD-R. Be sure you are
using approved CDs.
Retry. If condition persists with different
media, contact Hologic service.
Yes. Resend the image later if you want
it on a CD.
Yes. Try another CD-R. Resend the
image later if you want it on a CD.
23
CD-RW Fail: error reading Cd-RW or CD-R, make sure the CD- Yes. Try another CD-R. Be sure you are
R recordable. Error happened when trying to initialize
using approved CDs. Resend the image
CdrwSpaceFullDialogObject
later if you want it on a CD.
24
CD-RW Fail: error reading Cd-RW or CD-R, make sure the CD- Yes. Try another CD-R. Be sure you are
R recordable. CD-R was not recordable, and user selected not using approved CDs. Resend the image
to replace with a recordable CD-R.
later if you want it on a CD.
25
CD-R Partition being used by other applications (usually
means File Manager or terminals are using CD-R). cannot
continue, before retry, please exit those applications first.
26
27
CD-RW Drive busy, will retry later.
CD-R Warning: After the record process, CD-R could not be
successfully remounted,
Please unmount and mount CD-R manually to access the
image on CD-R.
Yes. Exit any other applications and
retry.
No
Yes. Remount CD-R manually.
28
CD-RW Fail: error Stopping Volume Management.
Reboot the system. If condition persists,
contact Hologic Service.
29
CD-RW Fail: error Restarting Volume Management. Please
start it manually.
Reboot the system. If condition persists,
contact Hologic Service.
Reclamation
Alarms
The system is unable to reclaim space for new patient records.
Yes. Delete unnecessary protected
Please ensure that there are not an excessive number of
patients.
protected patients. Call service if problem persists.
MAN-00625
B-29
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
Table B-43: Category Two Alarms (Continued)
Message
From
Message
Action Required
The repeat bin is full!
Please have a manager enter Repeat Management
through the toolbar ADMIN function to delete repeated images Yes. Delete rejected images in spool.
and create more space.
Note: The above alarm is for tech logins only.
The repeat bin is full!
Enter Repeat Management through the toolbar ADMIN
function to delete repeated images and create more space.
Note: The above alarm is for all logins but tech logins.
Yes. Delete rejected images in spool.
The repeat bin is nearly full!
Repeat Spool There is only enough space for <space> more repeated
Alarms
image(s).
No. Delete rejected images in spool.
Please have a manager enter Repeat Management
through the toolbar ADMIN function to delete repeated images
and create more space.
Note: The above alarm is for tech logins only
The repeat bin is nearly full!
There is only enough space for <space> more repeated
image(s).
Enter Repeat Management through the toolbar ADMIN
function to delete repeated images and create more space.
Note: The above alarm is for all logins but tech logins.
No. Delete rejected images in spool.
Sheet Alarms <print job description>
Setup Alarms Error constructing setup:<setup>
Review device documentation.
Yes. Contact Hologic Service.
DICOM
Query/
Retrieve
There were error(s) when pulling back the image(s).
Yes. Contact Network Administrator.
(number) image(s) moved successfully. There were error(s)
when importing the image(s).
Yes. If the message in alarm body
doesn't help. Contact Hologic Service.
unknown error encountered when pulling back the image(s).
(number) image(s) moved and imported successfully.
Yes. Contact Hologic Service.
No.
B-30
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
System Messages, Alarm Messages, and User Actions
6.6
Category Three Alarms
These alarms appear on the Preview Screen when image processing fails.
Table B-44: Image Processing Error Messages
Error #
MAN-00625
Message
1000
Image processing is not licensed.
1001
1002
Image is not FOR PROCESSING.
Image orientation flag is missing or not supported.
1003
1004
Configuration error.
Internal configuration does not allow for any outputs!
1005
1006
Out of range pixel values.
Calling application did not allocate memory for one or more image outputs.
1007
1008
Invalid data in input image. Data may not be of a mammographic breast image.
Memory allocation error.
1009
1010
Error opening configuration file.
Error opening log data file.
1011
1012
Data bit depth not supported.
Missing required input parameter.
1013
1014
Collimation configuration error.
Laterality error.
2000
2001
Density/contrast input parameters out of range
Pixel manipulation input parameter out of range
2002
Histogram input parameter out of range
2003
2004
Unsharp mask input parameters out of range
PCE input parameters out of range.
2005
2006
P-Value input parameters out of range
Print boundary parameters out of range
2007
2008
Diagnostic density/contrast parameters out of range
Implant parameters out of range
2009
2010
Image DC Offset out of range
MCE parameters out of range
2011
Diagnostic logistic parameters out of range
B-31
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Test Points
7.0
Test Points
Use the following test point tables as an aid in troubleshooting the Selenia:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“HV Control Board” on p. B-32
“HV Inverter” on p. B-32
“Filament Control Board” on p. B-33
“Generator Microprocessor Board” on p. B-33
“Power Distribution Board” on p. B-33
“Mains Board” on p. B-33
“Power Supply Interconnect Board” on p. B-34
“Host Microprocessor Board” on p. B-34
“Motor/Lamp Control Board” on p. B-34
“Rotor Control Board” on p. B-35
“Filament Protect Board” on p. B-35
“Tubehead Microprocessor Board” on p. B-35
Table B-45: HV Control Board
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
OV
TP2
INV OC SET
TP5
kV SEN
(1V = 8 kV)
INV I
TP6
mA SEN
(1 V = 40 mA)
Vfb
TP7
TP9
kV ERR
LG SET
TP8
TP10
SM SET
B DRV
TP11
TP13
TUBE I
SHUT DN
TP12
TP14
A DRV
-20 V
TP15
+20 V
TP16
TP17
DGND
TP18
TP3
TP4
TP19
R+15 V
TP20
CLAMP
kV PROG
(1 V = 4 kV)
+5 V
TP21
TP23
+10 V
+15 V
TP22
TP24
-15 V
GND
TP26
TP28
mA fb
VREF
TP27
TP29
HV FAULT INLK
+12.5 V
TP30
BACK UP
Table B-46: HV Inverter
B-32
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
TP3
LIS CLAMP
BRIDGE
TP2
TP4
15 V RET
Primary A
TP5
TP7
INV DRV D
320 V RET
TP6
TP8
CLAMP V
INV DRV A
TP9
TP11
INV DRV B
INV DRV C
TP10
TP12
Over L
Primary B
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Test Points
Table B-47: Filament Control Board
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
TP3
TP5
TP7
TP9
TP11
FIL PRGM
DGND
+20 V
AGND
ERR OUT
GRID PRGM
TP2
TP4
TP6
TP8
TP10
TP12
TP13
+15 V
TP14
+10 V
+5 V
-20 V
OV SET
INV I
GRID FB
OC FAULT
(1V = 1A)
OV FAULT
(1V = 1V)
SM OC SET
PGND
FB
+25 V
FIL I
GRiD UV
FIL V
FIL I MON
VREF
TP15
TP17
TP19
TP21
TP23
TP25
TP27
TP29
TP31
TP33
TP16
LG OC SET
TP18
TP20
TP22
TP24
TP26
TP28
TP30
TP32
TP34
GRID MONITOR
-15 V
GATE DRV
FIL I MON
FIL I ADJ
GRID OV
RAMP
12.5 V
GRID V
Table B-48: Generator Microprocessor Board
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
TP3
TP5
GND
+5 V VCC
4.75 k
TP2
TP4
CSGP2
4.75 k
Table B-49: Power Distribution Board
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
TP3
TP5
TP7
TP9
TP11
+525 V
+28 V
16 V/40 V
32 V-A-Fused
-20 V
GND
TP2
TP4
TP6
TP8
TP10
+22 V
+22 V
12 V-C-Fused
+20 V
+10 V
Table B-50: Mains Board
Test Point
MAN-00625
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
+24 V
TP2
+24 V
TP3
Less than 5Ω resistance
TP4
Less than 5Ω resistance
TP5
Less than 5Ω resistance
TP6
Line Voltage
TP7
TP9
TP11
U1B Pin 8 “TR”
U1A Pin 5 “Q”
U1B Pin 9 “Q”
TP8
TP10
GND
U1A Pin 6 “TR”
B-33
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Test Points
Table B-51: Power Supply Interconnect Board
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
TP3
Phase Sense
Main Sense
TP2
TP4
Rotor OK
Vth
Table B-52: Host Microprocessor Board
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
TP3
TP6
TP8
TP10
TP12
TP14
TP16
R/W
PB RST
TXD0
TXD1
GND
GND
VDISP
+5 PORT
TP2
TP5
TP7
TP9
TP11
TP13
TP15
TP17
X-ray Button
RXD0
RXD1
VCC
GND
GND
AGND
+5 SPI
Table B-53: Motor/Lamp Control Board
Test Point
B-34
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
TP3
CSGP2 1
PE1
TP2
TP4
PE0
PE2
TP5
TP7
PE3
PE5
TP6
TP8
PE4
PE6
TP9
TP11
PE7
R1 OUT
TP10
TP12
T1 IN
OC4
TP13
TP15
IC4
CLOCK
TP14
TP16
DATA
SEL1
TP17
TP19
SEL2
SEL4
TP18
TP20
SEL3
Tower Down
TP21
TP23
Tower Up
Compression Down
TP22
TP24
Compression Release
Compression Up
TP25
TP27
Collimator Lamp
Rotate Left
TP26
TP28
Rotate Right
Aux Rotation Limit Sw
TP29
TP31
Aux Rotation Limit Sw
Aux Rotation Limit Sw
TP30
TP32
Aux Rotation Limit Sw
Aux Tower Limit Sw
TP33
TP35
Aux Tower Limit Sw
Top Tower Limit Sw #
TP34
TP36
Lower Tower Limit Sw #
GND
TP37
TP39
Spare Pot
StereoLoc Pot
TP38
TP40
Spare Pot
Collimator Lamp
TP41
TP43
Collimator Lamp Ret
Compression Height
TP42
TP44
C-arm Angle Pot
Compression Force
TP45
TP47
VTA Force
Comp Motor -
TP46
TP48
C-arm Torque
Logic +5 V
TP49
TP51
Display +5 V
-12 V
TP50
TP52
+12 V
Comp Motor +
TP53
StereoLoc Input
TP54
StereoLoc Input
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Test Points
Table B-53: Motor/Lamp Control Board (Continued)
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP55
StereoLoc/Limit Sw
TP56
StereoLoc/Limit Sw
TP57
TP59
StereoLoc CMP Sw #
StereoLoc Center Sw #
TP58
TP60
StereoLoc Comp Sw
StereoLoc Adjust
TP61
TP63
Aux StereoLoc Inputs
Aux StereoLoc Inputs
TP62
TP64
Aux StereoLoc Inputs
Aux StereoLoc Inputs
TP65
TP67
Aux StereoLoc Inputs
Aux StereoLoc Inputs
TP66
TP68
Aux StereoLoc Inputs
Aux StereoLoc Inputs
Table B-54: Rotor Control Board
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
TP3
Gate DRV C
500 VDC
TP2
TP4
Gate DRV A
Gate DRV B
TP5
TP7
+90 V
+500 V RTN
TP6
TP8
+90 V RTN
Brake XSR
TP9
TP11
Gate DRV D
INV DRV B
TP10
TP12
INV DRV A
GND
TP13
TP15
INV DRV C
-15 V
TP14
TP16
INV DRV D
RAIL SENSE
TP17
TP19
RPM
RAMP
TP18
TP20
ISO +15 V DR
+5 V
TP21
TP23
GND
INV OC ADJ
TP22
TP24
+15 V
COM
TP25
TP27
PHASE
FREQ SENSE
TP26
TP28
MAIN
FILTERED FREQ
Table B-55: Filament Protect Board
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
GRID
TP2
FIL COM
TP3
TP5
GND
FIL LG
TP4
FIL SM
Table B-56: Tubehead Microprocessor Board
Test Point
MAN-00625
Voltage/Signal
Test Point
Voltage/Signal
TP1
D2ACLK
TP2
D2AIN
TP3
TP5
FILTER
REAR
TP4
TP6
MIRROR
FRONT
TP7
TP40
RIGHT
VCC
TP8
TP41
LEFT
GND
TP42
R/W
B-35
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
LED Indicators
8.0
LED Indicators
Use the following LED Indicator tables as an aid for troubleshooting the Selenia.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Filament Control Board” on p. B-36
“Generator Microprocessor Board” on p. B-36
“Mains Power Board” on p. B-36
“Power Supply Interconnect Board” on p. B-36
“Host Microprocessor Board” on p. B-36
“Motor/Lamp Control Board” on p. B-37
“AWS X-ray LED Board (left)” on p. B-37
“AWS X-ray LED Board (right)” on p. B-37
“Rotor Control Board” on p. B-37
“High Voltage Control Board” on p. B-37
Table B-57: Filament Control Board
LED
LED “ON” Indication
LED
LED “ON” Indication
D1
D3
RED = Grid Fault
RED = OV
D2
D8
RED = OC
GREEN = +15 V
D21
GREEN = SM
D22
GREEN = LG
Table B-58: Generator Microprocessor Board
LED
LED “ON” Indication
D1
D2
VCC
VCC
D3
+ 5 V OK
Table B-59: Mains Power Board
LED
D16
LED “ON” Indication
Power
Table B-60: Power Supply Interconnect Board
LED
D5
LED “ON” Indication
GREEN = Rotor Ready
Table B-61: Host Microprocessor Board
LED
B-36
LED “ON” Indication
LED
LED “ON” Indication
D1
D3
+5 Port
+5 Port
D2
D4
+5 Port
+5 Port
D5
D7
Run
INTLOCK OUT 2
D6
D8
X-ray Button
INTLOCK OUT 1
D9
ALARM
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
LED Indicators
Table B-62: Motor/Lamp Control Board
LED
LED “ON” Indication
LED
LED “ON” Indication
D1
VCC
D2
VCC
D4
D6
LOGIC +5 V OK
+12 V OK
D5
D7
Display +5 V OK
-12 V OK
Table B-63: AWS X-ray LED Board (left)
LED
LED “ON” Indication
LED
LED “ON” Indication
D1
YELLOW
D2
YELLOW
D3
D5
YELLOW
YELLOW
D4
D6
YELLOW
GREEN
D7
D9
GREEN
GREEN
D8
D10
GREEN
GREEN
Table B-64: AWS X-ray LED Board (right)
LED
LED “ON” Indication
LED
LED “ON” Indication
D1
YELLOW
D2
YELLOW
D3
D5
YELLOW
YELLOW
D4
YELLOW
Table B-65: Rotor Control Board
LED
LED “ON” Indication
LED
LED “ON” Indication
D3
RED = 500 V Rail
D8
RED = Brake
D20
D35
GREEN = +15 V
GREEN = Rotor Ready
D22
D36
RED = INV OC
RED = Control Fault
D37
D39
RED = Rotor Fault
GREEN = + 5 V
D38
D43
RED = Power Interlock Fault
GREEN = -15 V
D44
GREEN = UP OK
Table B-66: High Voltage Control Board
LED
MAN-00625
LED “ON” Indication
LED
LED “ON” Indication
D14
D19
RED = Tube OV
RED = Arc
D15
D22
RED = Tube OC
RED = Rail OV
D23
D33
GREEN = X-ray Interlock
RED = HV Interlock
D26
GREEN = +15 V
B-37
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Fuses
9.0
Fuses
Table B-67 provides rating, circuit, and part information on the fuses. Figure B-8, p. B-39
shows the AC fuses on the AC Fuse Board and the right AC Fuse Panel. Figure B-9, p. B-39
shows the DC fuses on the left Fuse Panel.
Table B-67: Selenia Fuses
Description/Part No.
Fuse
AC Power Distribution
Board PN 1-003-0505
F1
F2
F3
F4
F1
F2
Rating
Circuit
Part No.
AWS Fuses
Power Distribution
Assembly
Low Voltage Power Supply
F1
P/N 1-095-0049
4 Amp SB, 125 V
4 Amp SB, 125 V
4 Amp SB, 125 V
4 Amp SB, 125 V
2 Amp FB, 250 V
2 Amp FB, 250 V
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
120 VAC
1-070-1250
1-070-1250
1-070-1250
1-070-1250
1-070-1011
1-070-1011
2 Amp FB, 250 V
Input AC
1-070-1121
Gantry Fuses
Right Gantry Fuse Panel
PN 1-003-0306
Left Gantry Fuse Panel
Mains Power Board
PN 1-003-0354
Power Supply
Interconnect Board
PN 1-003-0483
B-38
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F1
F2
10 Amp SB, 250 V
10 Amp SB, 250 V
2 Amp SB, 250 V
2 Amp SB, 250 V
10 Amp SB, 250 V
10 Amp SB, 250 V
10 Amp SB, 250 V
10 Amp SB, 250 V
10 Amp SB, 250 V
10 Amp SB, 250 V
5 Amp SB, 250 V
5 Amp SB, 250 V
4 Amp SB, 250 V
4 Amp SB, 250 V
5 Amp SB, 250 V
5 Amp SB, 250 V
15 Amp SB, 600 V
15 Amp SB, 600 V
30 Amp SB, 600 V
30 Amp SB, 600 V
8 Amp, 600 V
25 Amp, 600 V
8 Amp SB, 250 V
5 Amp SB, 250 V
8 Amp, 250 V
1/32 Amp SB, 250 V
1/2 Amp SB, 250 V
+90 VDC
+90 VDC
120 VAC
120 VAC
24 VAC (Motor Control)
24 VAC (Motor Control)
+28 VDC
+28 VDC
Filament
Filament
Image Receptor
Image Receptor
+15 VDC
+15 VDC
+10 VDC
+10 VDC
+525 VDC
+525 VDC
+325 VDC
+325 VDC
Rotor Rail
Power Supply
Rotor Rail
Motor Driver
Filament
Input AC
20 VAC
1-070-1275
1-070-1275
1-070-1072
1-070-1072
1-070-1275
1-070-1275
1-070-1275
1-070-1275
1-070-1275
1-070-1275
1-070-1080
1-070-1080
1-070-1079
1-070-1079
1-070-1080
1-070-1080
1-070-1114
1-070-1114
1-070-1119
1-070-1119
1-070-1333
1-070-1332
1-070-1083
1-070-1080
1-070-1083
1-070-5019
1-070-1062
F1
1/10 Amp SB, 250 V
5 VDC
1-070-1053
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Fuses
Figure B-9: Gantry Fuses (Left Panel)
Figure B-8: Gantry Fuses (Right Panel)
MAN-00625
B-39
Maintenance Manual
Appendix B—Technical References
Jumpers
10.0 Jumpers
Table B-68: Circuit Board Jumper Settings
Circuit Board
B-40
Jumper #
Jumper Position
Host Microprocessor Board
JP1
pins 1 and 2
Host Microprocessor Board
Motor/Lamp Control Board
JP2
CJ32
pins 1 and 2
pins 1 and 2
Motor/Lamp Control Board
Motor/Lamp Control Board
JP1
JP2
pins 1 and 2
open
Motor/Lamp Control Board
Motor/Lamp Control Board
JP3
JP4
open
open
Motor/Lamp Control Board
Motor/Lamp Control Board
JP5
JP6
pins 1 and 2
pins 1 and 2
Motor/Lamp Control Board
Motor/Lamp Control Board
JP7
JP8
pins 1 and 2
pins 1 and 2
Motor/Lamp Control Board
VTA Motor Driver Board
JP9
WJ8
pins 1 and 2
pins 1 and 2
VTA Motor Driver Board
VTA Motor Driver Board
WJ9
WJ10
pins 1 and 2
pins 1 and 2
VTA Motor Driver Board
VTA Motor Driver Board
WJ11
WJ15
pins 1 and 2
pins 1 and 2
Rotor Control Board
Rotor Control Board
JP2
JP1
pins 1 and 2
pins 1 and 2
Power Distribution Board
Power Supply Interconnect Board
JP1
J1
K2 pin 3 and K2 pin 5
pins 1 and 2
Power Supply Interconnect Board
J2
pins 1 and 2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix C—Selenia Troubleshooting
Introduction
Appendix C—Selenia Troubleshooting
1.0
Introduction
This Appendix provides general information to aid the Service Engineer with
troubleshooting. Note that the Schematics manual can be a valuable aid in troubleshooting.
2.0
AWS Troubleshooting
Table C-1: AWS Troubleshooting Table
Problem
Probable Cause
Solution
System power on indicators off
(Gantry and AWS), UPS indicator
on.
Blown fuse on Power Distribution
Board.
Replace fuse—Chapter 4, Section 14.0, p. 4-21,
to access board.
System off, UPS off, cannot turn
UPS on.
Problem with site power.
Restore site power to system.
UPS does not turn on or off.
Computer interface problem.
Disconnect the Sun computer. If the UPS works
normally, inspect the interface cable and the Sun
computer.
UPS operates on-battery even
though normal line voltage exists.
UPS input circuit breaker tripped.
AWS—Power Distribution
UPS does not provide expected
back up time.
UPS fault alert message received
and all indicators on UPS are
flashing.
UPS fault alert message received
and on-line and on-battery
indicators on UPS are flashing.
No power to Selenia and the UPS
is not operating.
The replace battery light on the
UPS is illuminated.
Reset the circuit breaker by pressing the
breaker. If circuit breaker continues to trip,
replace UPS.
The UPS battery is weak due to
Allow the battery to charge for 4 hours. If the
recent outage or is near the end of battery is near the end of its service life,
its service life.
replace—Chapter 4, Section 23.1, p. 4-25.
Internal UPS fault
Do not continue using the UPS. Turn AWS
power off and replace UPS.
Internal UPS fault
Do not continue using the UPS. Turn AWS
power off and replace UPS.
The UPS is shutdown and the
battery is discharged from an
extended power outage.
None. The UPS returns to normal operation
when the power is restored and the battery has a
sufficient charge.
Weak batteries
Allow the battery to charge for 4 hours.
Replacement batteries not
connected properly
Confirm the battery connection—Chapter 4,
Section 23.2, p. 4-26.
Power on indicator is not Lit, and
power is turned off
Turn on display power, press power button on
lower right side of display.
AWS—Operation
Application does not start—
Display screen blank.
Power on indicator Lit. Brightness Adjust display screen brightness—Chapter 6,
is turned down.
Section 2.1.1, p. 6-2.
Video cable loose.
Inspect cable connections between display and
Sun computer and between display and display
power supply.
Faulty display.
Faulty video board in computer
MAN-00625
Replace display.
Replace Sun computer.
C-1
Maintenance Manual
Appendix C—Selenia Troubleshooting
AWS Troubleshooting
Table C-1: AWS Troubleshooting Table (Continued)
Problem
Application does not start—
Display screen on, Operating
System not started.
Probable Cause
Solution
UPS locked up, preventing OS
from starting.
Cycle power to UPS. Turn AWS power on, if
needed.
Computer problems.
Replace Sun computer.
Application does not start—
Display screen on, Operating
System on.
Incorrect Login
At bottom of screen display, select EXIT, click
YES to exit. When prompted to do so, log in. If
still unable to log in, call Service.
Alarm Message on screen.
Various
Refer to Appendix B. Troubleshoot as required.
Faulty Brick Assembly
Replace Brick Assembly—Chapter 5, Section
6.9, p. 5-21.
Faulty Image Receptor
Replace Image Receptor—Chapter 5, Section
6.2, p. 5-15.
Dirty Image Receptor
Clean Image Receptor—Operator’s Manual.
Faulty Image Receptor
Replace Image Receptor—Chapter 5, Section
6.2, p. 5-15.
Image Acquisition
No power to Image Receptor,
AWS and Gantry power are on.
Poor Quality image, artifacts
present.
C-2
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix C—Selenia Troubleshooting
Software Troubleshooting
3.0
Software Troubleshooting
Table C-2: Software Troubleshooting
Symptom
Probable Cause
A message appears
saying:
" The Acquisition Station
database is corrupt. The
system may have been
shutdown incorrectly."
It will then give the
options of:
The system detects a
database corruption
•
"Clear database and
restart"
•
"Repair database and
restart"
• “Exit the application”
Power problems
White screen with
message:
program terminated
ok
User Directions
Caution! If you see this message, you should
first attempt to repair the database.
If after performing this operation,
and rebooting, you still receive this
message, Contact Service. The
“Clear the database and restart”
should only be used under direction
of a service engineer.
1. Turn off the circuit breaker on back of AWS (Figure
C-1).
2. Wait for UPS to stop beeping (a minimum of 10
minutes).
3. Turn the circuit breaker switch back on.
4. Press the AWS On button. The computer restarts.
5. Log on to the OS.
Forgot user password
Can’t make a “tech” into a Logged in as tech
“manager”
MAN-00625
Figure C-1: AWS Circuit Breaker
Delete user account and re-enter.
This must be done by a Manager.
Delete user account and re-enter it when logged on as a
Manager.
C-3
Maintenance Manual
Appendix C—Selenia Troubleshooting
Software Troubleshooting
Table C-2: Software Troubleshooting (Continued)
Symptom
Probable Cause
User Directions
No screen function,
cursor still moves.
Dialog box hidden
behind main screen
If you accidentally click the Main screen when an alarm
dialog box is displayed, re-click the alarm icon and the
dialog box is re-displayed.
1. If the main screen appears to be non-functional,
click the upper right corner dot of the Main screen
bar, and the screen minimizes to an icon that says
Lorad.
2. Close any open application dialog boxes (not the
little icon boxes on the left).
3. Double Click the icon Application to return it to a
full screen.
If the Task Launcher screen is accidentally closed, restart
the application.
1. If a screen does not function—and, there is nothing
behind it, after you have minimized the program—
click the exit button on the OS task bar at the bottom
of the screen.
2. Log out of the session.
3. Click OK on the logout confirmation dialog box.
Lorad wallpaper appears
Open key pressed.
Incorrect paddle position
message doesn’t go away
Changed or moved
paddle while Preview
screen was displayed
Paddle not recognized.
Collimation on spot
paddles is wrong
Error 100
RPC3-Write error
Cannot delete patients
Image Washed out
CD-RW will not respond
C-4
Automatic Collimation
was turned off in setup
Error transferring preview
Image
Faulty generator
communications, brick,
cabling, etc.
Logged in as tech
Call field service if these solutions do not work. Do not
turn off the AWS circuit breaker with the program
running.
Press the Open key again or click the application icon on
the left and program should reappear.
• Restore the previous paddle or position. You may
need to also click Reset Generator.
•
Re-seat paddle to confirm good connection.
• Examine Paddle Configuration table.
Turn Automatic Collimation back on and leave on.
Restart the system. Be sure to restart the computer every
morning.
Call Service.
Log in as Manager.
Evaluate exposure bar, should be above 250.
• Wait five minutes before trying again.
•
Look at CD-RW spooler in Manage Queues to see if
Images are still being transferred.
•
Wait until Image transfer has finished before retrying.
•
Try a different media.
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Appendix C—Selenia Troubleshooting
Debugging DICOM
4.0
Debugging DICOM
The following is a brief description of how to set the debug flags so that detailed DICOM
information gets stored to the .0.log files. After following these steps, perform the DICOM
action and then look in the log files for this detailed information.
Debugging Retrieve Priors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Go to Service Tools.
Click DROC computer under Diagnostics.
Click Set Debug Flags.
Click apps.
Click droc.
Click apps.qr.
Debugging DICOM Store
1. Go to Service Tools.
2. Click DROC computer under Diagnostics
3. Click Set Debug Flags.
4. Click devices.
5. Click pdevremstore_001.
6. Click PDevRemStore_imp.
7. Select show useful tracing.
8. Click Update.
9. Click the Netscape Back button.
10. Click the Netscape Back button.
11. Click DCF (Dicom library) settings that will take effect immediately.
12. Click cpp_lib/DCS Dicom Core Services.
13. Select show ACSE pdu data.
14. Select show DIMSE message reads.
15. Select show DIMSE message writes.
16. Click Update.
Debugging Modality Worklist
1. Go to Service Tools.
2. Click DROC computer under Diagnostics.
3. Click Set Debug Flags.
4. Click raw.
5. Click mwlquery_001.
6. Click DCF (Dicom library) settings that will take effect immediately.
7. Click cpp_lib/DCS Dicom Core Services.
8. Select Show ACSE pdu data.
9. Select show DIMSE message reads.
10. Select show DIMSE message writes.
11. Click Update.
MAN-00625
C-5
Maintenance Manual
Appendix C—Selenia Troubleshooting
Debugging DICOM
C-6
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Index
Index
A
acceptance tests sign off sheet 7-1
accessing
exposure and error logs 5-9
Selenia components 4-3
system log files 8-1
accessories, compression paddles
smart paddles, moving position 3-13
acquisition workstation
clean and inspect 4-6
ACR phantom evaluation 7-3
add and configure
AWS CD-RW 8-24
CAD sever 8-18
diagnostic review workstation 8-21
DICOM archives 8-14
output devices 8-11
printers 8-11
adding
anon output 8-5
service CD-RW output device 8-5
adjusting
display
controls and functions 6-1
TEC exposure mode 6-33
tube bias 6-18
tube current 6-22
adjustments and calibrations
AWS 6-1
system 6-1
x-ray system 6-18
AEC
dark offset calibration 6-48
sensor position 3-4, 3-7, 3-8, 3-13
Auto 3-13
AEC calibration 6-37
enable AEC function 6-37
entering the AEC calibration tool 6-37
entrance screen function exposure (ESE) 6-43
exiting AEC calibration 6-47
generate goal image 6-45
half value layer (HVL) 6-40
alarm logs
operating system status 8-2
software status 8-1
alarm logs/brick assembly status 8-2
alarm messages B-21
MAN-00625
alarm types and system messages B-7
alarms B-24–B-30
category one B-7, B-8, B-22, B-23
category two B-7, B-8, B-24
dialog box B-9
self-correcting B-9
alignment
x-ray and light field 6-5
anonymous CDs 8-5
array monitor port B-6
automatic compression releases interlock 1-6
AWS 1-1, 3-1, 3-2
adjustments and calibrations 6-1
bar code reader configuration 8-26
CD-RW, add and configure 8-24
clean and inspect 4-6
component identification 4-2
computer, replacing 4-14
controls and displays 3-1
display and swing-arm maintenance 4-8
installing
trackball 4-10
IP address 8-2
keyboard and trackball 3-3
keypads 3-3
maintenance 4-1
operating system status 8-2
operation troubleshooting C-1
power distribution troubleshooting C-1
preventive maintenance 4-6
realigning
display bracket 10-6
post 10-6
swing-arm plate 10-5
reconfiguring
swivel arm to right 11-1
removing
covers 4-3
replacing
bar code reader 4-13
CD-RW drive 4-13
circuit breaker 4-23
computer 4-14
display 4-8, 10-2
display power supply 4-22
fiber optic cable 4-29
keyboard 4-11
I-1
Maintenance Manual
Index
left LED board 4-22
low voltage power supply 4-21
power control board 4-21
power distribution assembly 4-20
power distribution board 4-21
radiation shield 4-19
right LED board 4-22
storage shelf 4-12
UPS batteries 4-26, 4-28
workstation cooling fans 4-23
set to non-imaging mode 6-3
software status 8-1
troubleshooting C-1
UPS maintenance 4-25
B
backup
calibration and map files 4-14, 8-4
configuration 4-14, 8-4
bar code reader
configure 6-2
replacing 4-13
beam limiting assembly, replacing 5-19
breast density 3-4
brick assembly status/alarm logs 8-2
brick assembly, replacing 5-21
C
cabling, fiber optic 5-13
CAD server 8-18
cal data, downloading/initializing 6-13
calibrating
AEC 6-37
enable AEC function 6-37
entering calibration tool 6-37
compression system 6-58
chain tension 6-58
force 6-60
force load cell 6-58
speed 6-58
thickness pot 6-59
thickness pot mechanical adjustment 6-59
calibration and map files backup 4-14
calibration procedures
gain calibration 6-16
image quality verification 6-16
image receptor 6-14
image receptor gridlines calibration 6-15
image receptor gridlines test 6-15
tube voltage 6-20
C-arm
I-2
alarms B-23
compression clutch and clutch brake assembly,
replacing 5-47
compression thickness pot, replacing 5-46
controls and displays 1-1, 3-1, 3-6, 3-7
covers, removing 5-6
left rotation display board, replacing 5-33
motor and motor brake, replacing 5-49
movement
disabled 3-10
movement interlocks 1-6
paddle detect board, replacing 5-35
position display boards, replacing 5-34
right rotation display board, replacing 5-33
rotation 3-10
rotation and vertical speed control test 6-56
rotation drive motor and gearbox assembly,
replacing 5-44
rotation gear assembly inspection and lubrication
5-11
rotation limit switch, replacing 5-30
rotation potentiometer, replacing 5-43
switch boards, replacing 5-30
tests and adjustments 6-53
paddle programming and verification 6-53
rotation angle calibration 6-54
rotation display potentiometer 6-54
verify rotation limit switch 6-55
vertical travel adjustment 6-57
vertical drive motor/gearbox assembly, replacing
5-45
vertical travel limit switches, replacing 5-29
VTA motor driver board, replacing 5-34
category one alarms B-8
generator B-8
image receptor B-8
category three alarms B-31
category two alarms B-24
alarm dialog box B-9
functions B-8
CD-RW drive, replacing 4-13
CDs, anonymous 8-5
circuit boards, replacing 5-22
circuit breaker
gantry 3-6
replacing 4-23, 5-39
circuit components, replacing 5-22
clean and inspect
acquisition workstation 4-6
AWS 4-6
gantry 5-9
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Index
cleaning
cabinet 4-6
keyboard 4-6
trackball 4-6
close procedure 3-4
collimator
mode 3-12
override 3-12
complaints P-xxi
compliance requirements & statements 1-7
compliance tests
kv accuracy and reproducibility 6-24
compliance tests, system level 6-24
linearity worksheet 6-27
linearity worksheet-small focal spot 6-28
reproducibility worksheet 6-26
component identification, AWS 4-2
compression
controls and displays 3-8
release 3-3
compression system calibration 6-58
chain tension adjustment 6-58
force calibration 6-60
setting-force load cell 6-58
speed calibration 6-58
thickness pot calibration 6-59
thickness pot mechanical adjustment 6-59
configuration file backup 4-14
configure
array auto-power control time 6-51
array temperature 4-17, 6-52, 8-10
AWS bar code reader 8-26
bar code reader 6-2
for presentation outputs 8-11
modality worklist 8-22
output devices 8-11
R2 image checker 8-18
Service CD-RW 8-5
controls 3-4, 3-9
AEC sensor position 3-8
automatic compression release 3-9
C-arm 3-7, 3-10, 3-11
footswitch 3-8
collimator override 3-7, 3-12
compression 3-3, 3-7, 3-9, 3-12
footswitch 3-8
compression brake 3-9
compression device 3-7, 3-8
compression display 3-8
compression release 3-9
handwheels 3-8
MAN-00625
light field lamp 3-7, 3-12
covers
compression device 5-7
gantry, removing 5-5
removing 1-3
tubehead side 5-6
x-ray tube side 3-7
D
dark offset calibration, AEC 6-48
date, setting 8-3
definitions P-xxii
detector ghosting 6-31
detector_ready timeout adjustment 6-16
DICOM
archives, add and configure 8-14
debugging C-5
digital array field acceptance tests 7-2
display 3-5
adjustment 6-2
adjustments 6-1
AEC sensor position 3-8
brightness 6-2
compression force 3-8
compression thickness 3-8
contrast 6-2
control and function adjustments 6-1
horizontal/vertical position control 6-2
power supply, replacing 4-22
replacing 4-8, 10-2
display arm reconfiguration, Selenia 10-1
long base 10-2
Document Conventions P-xxvi
door indicators, exam room door 1-3
downloading/initializing cal data 6-13
DROC software configuration 8-6
dual function footswitches 3-8
E
early release interlock 1-6
electrical safety 1-3
Emergency Off switch 1-5, 2-8, 3-5, 3-6
replacing 5-38
using 2-8
error codes B-22–B-23
exam room door indicators 1-3
exposure and error logs, accessing 5-9
exposure mode and techniques 3-4
exposure timing parameters 6-16
brick bypass mode 6-17
detector_ready timeout adjustment 6-16
I-3
Maintenance Manual
Index
F
fiber optic cabling 5-13
gantry 5-13
replacing 4-29
field acceptance tests
ACR phantom evaluation 7-3
image receptor linearity 7-2
signal to noise ratio 7-4
spatial resolution 7-3
filament control board
over-current/over-voltage adjustment 6-20
replacing 5-25
filament protect board, replacing 5-27
film printer 1-2
filter 3-4
firmware, replacing 5-22
flat screen display 3-1, 3-2, 3-5
focal spot 3-4
footswitches 1-1, 3-6, 3-8
for presentation outputs 8-11
function keys 3-3
AEC position 3-4
breast density 3-4
close procedure 3-4
exposure mode 3-4
filter 3-4
focal spot 3-4
grid 3-4
keyboard 3-4
kV selection 3-4
mAs 3-4
new entry 3-4
functional tests 2-1, 3-9
fuses B-38
G
gain calibration 6-16
gantry 1-1
clean and inspect 5-9
component identification 5-2
controls and displays 3-6
fiber optic cabling 5-13
maintenance 5-1
preventive maintenance 5-8
remote x-ray on/power on light, connection 5-12
removing covers 5-5
removing covers and panels 5-5
replacing
beam limiting assembly 5-19
brick assembly 5-21
circuit boards, firmware, and circuit
I-4
components 5-22
circuit breaker 5-39
electrical power components/assemblies 5-36
Emergency Off switch 5-38
filament control board 5-25
generator microprocessor board 5-25
HV generator assembly 5-17
isolation transformer/power dist assembly
5-40
mains power board 5-38
mechanical components and assemblies 5-42
motor/lamp control board 5-24
position display boards 5-34
power distribution board 5-37
power supply interconnect board 5-41
rotor control board 5-26
timing belt 5-50
tubehead cooling fan 5-42
tubehead microproc./motor driver boards 5-28
tubehead switch boards 5-27
x-ray and imaging components 5-13
x-ray tube 5-20
replacing C-arm
compression clutch/clutch brake assembly
5-47
compression thickness pot 5-46
left rotation display board 5-33
motor and motor brake 5-49
paddle detect board 5-35
right rotation display board 5-33
rotation drive motor/gearbox assembly 5-44
rotation limit switch 5-30
rotation potentiometer 5-43
switch boards 5-30
vertical drive motor/gearbox assembly 5-45
vertical travel limit switches 5-29
VTA motor driver board 5-34
rotation angle displays 3-6
general information 1-1
generator microprocessor board, replacing 5-25
generator related alarms B-8
ghosting, detector 6-31
glandular dose and radiation output rate 7-4
grid 3-4
H
host microprocessor board
calibration mode dip switch S6 settings B-2
DIP switch S7 settings B-4
push-buttons S1, S2, S3, S5 B-2
replacing 5-23
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Index
rotary switch S4 settings B-3
switch settings B-1
HV control board 5-17
HV control board over-current/over-voltage
adjustment 6-19
HV generator assembly
mounting plate 5-17
replacing 5-17
HV inverter board 5-17
HV Test Well 5-17
I
Image Acquisition troubleshooting C-2
image quality verification 6-16
image receptor
calibration procedures 6-14
gain calibration 6-16
gridlines calibration 6-15
gridlines test 6-15
image quality verification 6-16
linearity test 7-2
replacing 5-15
replacing fans 5-16
retract calibration 6-14
returning 5-15
images
sizes A-11
indicators, exam room door 1-3
info menu 2-6
information dialog box 2-6
initiating x-ray exposure 2-2, 3-3
inspection and lubrication
C-arm rotation gear assembly 5-11
VTA lead screw 5-12
integrity, isolation 1-2
intended use P-xxi
interconnect board adjustment, power supply 6-60
interlocks 1-6
automatic compression releases 1-6
C-arm movement 1-6
early release 1-6
mirror and filter 1-6
smart paddle system position 1-6
introduction to Selenia 1-1
IP address 8-2
isolation integrity 1-2
isolation transformer/power distribution assembly,
replacing 5-40
J
jumpers B-40
MAN-00625
K
keyboard 3-3
controls 3-4
replacing 4-11
special function keys 3-3, 3-4
keypads 3-3
kV selection 3-4
kV/mA range A-9
L
label locations 1-8
large focal spot
light field alignment 6-6
x-ray alignment 6-5
Launch dialog box 2-4
LED board, left, replacing 4-22
LED board, right, replacing 4-22
LED Indicator tables B-36
light field alignment
large focal spot 6-6
small focal spot 6-7
light field edge contrast test 6-12
light field illuminance test and adjustment 6-10
light field lamp 3-9, 3-12
Log Files 8-1
login 2-4
to application 2-5
low voltage power supply, replacing 4-21
M
mains power board, replacing 5-38
maintenance
gantry 5-1
preventive 5-8
manual, using P-xxvii
manuals, Selenia P-xxvi
mAs
focal spots manual range A-10
mAs, changing 3-4
mechanical components and assemblies, replacing
5-42
mechanical safety 1-4
Menu, Info 2-6
messages see alarms
mirror and filter interlocks 1-6
modality worklist configuration 8-22
monitor
see display
monitor See display
motor/lamp control board, replacing 5-24
Multiplier Assembly 5-17
I-5
Maintenance Manual
Index
N
new entry key 3-4
non-imaging mode 6-3
O
On button 3-3
On indicator light 2-2, 3-3
operating system user name 2-4
operator interface 1-1
operator radiation shield 1-3
output devices configuration 8-11
over-current/over-voltage adjustment
filament control board 6-20
HV control board 6-19
overview 1-1
P
Paddle ID table 6-53
paddle parts list 9-4
parts list 9-1
performance testing 7-1
peripheral monitor port B-5
post-startup tests 2-6
power distribution board
replacing 4-21, 5-37
Power Panel dialog box 2-9
power supply interconnect board
adjustment 6-60
replacing 5-41
prerequisites P-xxi
pre-startup tests 2-1
preventive maintenance 5-8
AWS 4-6
printer, film 1-2
printers, add and configure 8-11
Q
quality control P-xxi
R
R2 image checker 8-18
radiation output rate 7-4
radiation safety 1-3
radiation shield 1-3
replacing 4-19
radiation symbol
x-ray indicator 2-2, 3-3
reconfigure
display arm 10-1
swivel arm 11-1
reject management 8-7
I-6
remote x-ray on/power on light, connection 5-12
remove output 8-5
removing gantry covers 5-5
replacement parts 9-1
C-arm functions 9-2
image acquisition subsystem 9-3
miscellaneous 9-6
paddles 9-4
power distribution functions 9-1
system control and x-ray functions 9-2
TechMate 9-6
replacing
C-arm covers 5-6
fiber optic cabling 5-13
filament protect board 5-27
firmware, gantry 5-22
host microprocessor board 5-23
image receptor 5-15
trackball 4-10
repreview tab 8-7
reset generator B-22
restarting system after Emergency Off Switch 2-9
review management 8-7
rotation and vertical speed control test 6-56
rotation angle displays 3-6
rotation limit switch 6-55
rotor control board, replacing 5-26
S
safety 1-2
electrical 1-3
Emergency Off switches 1-5
interlocks 1-6
mechanical 1-4
radiation 1-3
screen controls & exposure techniques 3-4
screens, non-functional, cursor moves C-4
SecurView 1-1
selecting exposure techniques 3-4
Selenia
accessing internal components 4-3
display arm reconfiguration 10-1, 10-2
introduction 1-1
label locations 1-8
reinstall backup files 4-17
replacing
bar code reader & power supply 4-13
CD drive 4-12
circuit breaker 4-23
computer 4-14, 4-17
cooling fans 4-23
MAN-00625
Maintenance Manual
Index
display 4-8
display power supply 4-22
keyboard 4-11
low voltage power supply 4-21
power control board 4-21
power distribution assembly & fuses 4-20
power distribution board 4-21
radiation shield 4-19
storage shelf 4-12
trackball 4-10
X-ray LED boards 4-22
troubleshooting C-1
verify system operation 4-17
Selenia manual set P-xxvi
service acceptance tests sign off sheet 7-1
setting
date 8-3
time 8-3
time zone 8-3
shutdown procedures 2-1, 2-7
signal to noise ratio test 7-4
small focal spot
light field alignment 6-7
x-ray alignment 6-6
smart paddle system 3-13
position interlock 1-6
SMPTE Pattern
display adjustment 6-2
SMPTE pattern, display adjustment 6-2
Software Maintenance 8-1
spatial resolution test 7-3
specifications A-1
dimensional information A-1
standard system test 7-1
startup
procedures 2-1
Selenia 2-2
TechMate 2-2
tests 2-1
wait time 2-4
swing-arm maintenance 4-8
switches
Emergency Off 1-5, 2-8, 3-5
gantry circuit breaker 3-6
swivel arm reconfiguring 11-1
system
adjustments and calibration 6-1
controls and functional tests 3-9
log files 8-1
messages B-21
System Controls, Indicators, and Tests 3-1
MAN-00625
system level compliance tests 6-24
system messages B-7
T
TEC
exposure mode
adjusting 6-33
adjusting the TEC master density setting 6-34
initializing the TEC lookup tables 6-34
setting the active TEC table 6-34
TEC tables 6-35
selecting the correct table 6-33
setting Exposure Mode 3-4
tables 6-33
defaults 6-35
high contrast 6-36
low dose 6-35
TechMate 1-1
accessing internal components 4-5
reconfiguring swivel arm 10-3
replacing
computer 4-18
display 4-9, 10-3
keyboard 4-11
trackball 4-10
UPS 4-27
UPS battery 4-28
swivel arm reconfiguration 11-1
technical references B-1
LED indicators B-36
service mode, switches and connections B-1
test points B-32
techniques, setting exposure 3-4
terms and definitions P-xxii
test point tables B-32
testing performance 7-1
tests
post startup 2-6
startup, shutdown, and functional 2-1
tests and adjustments, C-arm 6-53
time zone, setting 8-3
time, setting 8-3
timing belt, replacing 5-50
timing parameters, exposure 6-16
trackball 3-3
installing 4-10
training P-xxi
troubleshooting
AWS C-1
debugging DICOM C-5
software C-3
I-7
Maintenance Manual
Index
tube bias adjustment & values 6-18
tube current (mA) adjustment 6-22
tube voltage (kV) calibration 6-20
tubehead
cooling fan, replacing 5-42
microproc./motor driver boards, replacing 5-28
switch boards, replacing 5-27
tubestand 1-1, 3-1
U
Ultra 45, replacing 4-17
UPS 2-3
UPS & UPS batteries, replacing Selenia 4-26
UPS & UPS batteries, replacing TechMate 4-27
user
actions B-21
OS/Application user names and passwords 2-4
using the Emergency Off switch 2-8
restarting system 2-9
using the manual P-xxvii
V
W
wait time, startup 2-4
warnings, cautions, and notes P-xxvi
workstation cooling fans, replacing 4-23
write patient files 8-5
X
X-ray
collimated fields A-8
x-ray
buttons & indicators 2-2, 3-3
collimated fields 3-12
light field alignment 6-5
system adjustments and calibrations 6-18
tube
replacing 5-20
x-ray alignment
large focal spot 6-5
small focal spot 6-6
x-ray and imaging components
replacing 5-13
VTA lead screw inspection and lubrication 5-12
I-8
MAN-00625